The Future of E-commerce in APAC: Innovative Web Design Solutions

Millions of people have made the switch to online shopping in recent years, making the Asia Pacific (APAC) area a center of e-commerce activity. Web design’s influence on the quality of the online purchasing experience has grown in significance alongside the popularity of e-commerce. This article will discuss the current landscape of online business in Asia-Pacific (APAC), the significance of web design to this industry, and the pressing need for creative web design solutions to the problems plaguing this sector of the global economy.

The State of E-commerce in APAC

The APAC e-commerce market is expanding at an unprecedented rate, with a predicted $2.725 trillion in online retail sales by 2021. Several things, like the proliferation of smartphones and the Internet, the ascent of social media, and shifting consumer preferences, have contributed to this expansion.

E-commerce in Asia has been greatly aided by COVID-19 as well. Consumers have resorted to online shopping as a means of obtaining necessities in the face of lockdowns and social distancing tactics.

Throughout Asia and the Pacific, e-commerce companies face a significant challenge: how to give their customers a pleasant and satisfying online purchasing experience. When it comes to the internet, this is where web design comes in.

Web Design and User Experience in E-commerce

The quality of the user experience in online shopping is directly tied to the quality of the web design. Customers’ search for products, navigation around the site, and purchase completion times can all be reduced by a well-designed website.

E-commerce web design best practices include concise wording, an easy-to-navigate layout, and mobile device optimization. Carefully consider the adding buttons and colours, as well as sliders to your homepage with the help of a WordPress slider plugin.

Innovative Web Design Solutions for E-commerce

E-commerce companies can differentiate themselves from the competition and deliver a more exciting online shopping experience for their customers by implementing creative web design solutions. For online stores, some examples of creative web design solutions are:

  • E-commerce companies can use client information to tailor products and services to each unique shopper. We can tailor our suggestions for products, our email messages, and even our landing sites to meet your specific needs.
  • Customers may get a sense of how a product will look on them before buying it thanks to augmented reality try-on experiences.
  • Chatbots and AI can be used to provide around-the-clock assistance to customers, as well as to respond to their questions and address their concerns, and to make specific product suggestions based on their individual preferences.
  • Increasing numbers of people in APAC are using their mobile devices to make purchases online, which is driving growth in the field of mobile commerce.

Emerging Technologies in E-commerce Web Design

E-commerce website development in the APAC area is also set to be radically altered by the introduction of cutting-edge technology like blockchain, virtual reality, machine learning, and 5G.

When used to online purchases, blockchain technology can increase customer confidence and clarity. Blockchain technology allows online retailers to keep an immutable, auditable, and secure ledger of all customer and product transactions.

With the use of machine learning, businesses can provide customers tailored product suggestions based on their specific needs. E-commerce enterprises can employ machine learning algorithms to better tailor product recommendations to each individual client by monitoring customer behaviour and interests.

The Future of E-commerce in APAC

In the Asia-Pacific region, e-commerce is expected to continue expanding and developing in the next years. There will be a growing need for careful consideration of user experience in site design as e-commerce grows in prominence.

Businesses in Asia and the Pacific (APAC) who want to thrive in the future of e-commerce will need to be early adopters of new technology and inventive web design solutions. To accomplish this, you’ll need to have a firm grasp on what it is your customers want and need, as well as the courage to try new things and take calculated risks.


In conclusion, e-commerce in the Asia-Pacific region has a promising future, but successful companies will have to change with the times. Businesses may give their clients a more exciting and customized online buying experience by using cutting-edge web design solutions and developing technology.

In order to compete in the future of e-commerce, companies will need to make significant investments in site design and user experience, as well as keep abreast of emerging trends and technology.

9 Tips for Better Retail Inventory Management in 2023

Effective retail inventory planning is critical to the success of your business. However, mastering inventory management can be challenging, especially if you are running a rapidly growing company or are new to retail.

Fortunately, you don’t have to navigate your inventory planning hurdles alone. Join us as we take a deep dive into retail inventory management. We’ll examine the retail inventory method and identify a few popular methods you can incorporate into your business model.

We’ll also reveal 9 tips that can help you manage your inventory more effectively.

What Is Retail Inventory?

Retail inventory describes all the available stock that’s currently in your inventory. While you generally track the individual stock levels of each item, you also need to maintain awareness of the cumulative value of your inventory.

Retail inventory management is the process of overseeing both stock levels and your total inventory value. Losing sight of current inventory levels can lead to stock-outs, which will negatively impact customer experience.

On the other hand, failing to monitor the total cost of your inventory can create cash flow challenges that threaten business continuity.

What is the retail inventory method?

The RIM (retail inventory method) is an accounting method designed to estimate the value of your store’s merchandise. This method measures the cost of inventory as it relates to the price of your merchandise.

The RIM is widely considered to be the best tool for estimating merchandise value and stock levels. However, it is only an estimate. As such, you should always engage in periodical inventory counts to verify the accuracy of this accounting method.

Achieve Better Retail Inventory Management with These 9 Tips

The RIM is a good starting point for tracking and managing your inventory. But there are several ways in which you can optimize your inventory management capabilities. Specifically, we suggest that you:

1. Categorize Your Inventory

Not all inventory is equal. Some products will cost more and sell less frequently than hot-ticket items or trendy goods. With that in mind, you should categorize your inventory into a few priority groups. There are several ways to go about this, but a common method involves creating A, B, and C, inventory groups.

2. Track All Relevant Product Information

When setting up your inventory management systems and processes for retail, it is vital that you track all relevant product information. Some of the information you need to track includes:

  • SKUs
  • Lot numbers
  • Barcode data Country of origin
  • You should also monitor the cost of each item.

Doing so will enable you to monitor seasonal or scarcity-related price changes.

3. Conduct Audits

Remember, the RIM only provides an estimate of your physical stock and its value. Therefore, you should conduct an extensive inventory audit and compare it to your estimates.

Some businesses will only conduct an audit once per year. However, others will perform monthly or quarterly audits. In between audits, most retailers will do spot checks wherein they count the physical stock of a few of their top sellers.

Regardless of which audit intervals you choose, make sure that you are conducting some form of physical stock count on a recurring basis.

4. Assess Supplier Performance

Suppliers are critical to inventory management. If a supplier is unreliable or frequently late with your deliveries, it will be nearly impossible to effectively maintain adequate stock levels.

As such, you should continuously assess supplier performance. If a particular supplier keeps falling short of your expectations, reach out to them and see if you can remedy the issue. Don’t be afraid to cut ties if a supplier cannot meet the needs of your business.

5. Leverage the 80/20 Rule

Generally speaking, 80% of your revenue will be generated from 20% of your inventory. Once you identify what items fall into that 20%, prioritize managing those items to ensure that they are always in stock.

To be clear, you shouldn’t neglect the other 80% of your inventory. But your top sellers should receive the majority of your attention and focus.

6. Use the Consistent Receiving Method

Processing incoming stock is a core component of managing a retail business. It is also something that you are already doing regularly. The question is, do you have a standardized process for receiving new shipments? If not, you will inevitably encounter stock issues such as inaccurate inventory counts.

To prevent these issues, develop a consistent receiving process. Once you have done so, bring your team up to speed to ensure that every inbound order is processed the same way.

7. Closely Track Sales

Tracking sales seems like an obvious tip. But you would be surprised how many retailers simply add up their total sales volume at the end of each day.

In addition to calculating sales volume, you need to update inventory totals and determine how many units of each item were purchased. Next, you will need to analyze this information so that you can stay apprised of the latest purchasing habits.

8. Manage Restocks In-House

Some suppliers will offer to reorder inventory for you. This may seem like a convenient service that takes some responsibility off your plate. The downside is that the vendor is focused on accomplishing their goal, which is to move inventory. They are not necessarily looking out for the needs of your business.

To ensure that you do not get bogged down with unnecessary inventory, manage restocks yourself. It may take a little extra work, but it will also help your business better adapt to shifting buying trends.

9. Explore Inventory Management Systems

If you want to optimize your inventory management capabilities, you should consider investing in dedicated software. While many retail inventory management systems are on the market today, they’re not all equally effective.

Japan Inflation Slows to 3.1% in February

The figure, which excludes volatile fresh food, met market expectations and comes after the government introduced relief measures for soaring energy bills

Japan’s consumer prices rose 3.1 percent in February from a year earlier, slowing from the four-decade highs seen in previous months, government data showed Friday.

The figure, which excludes volatile fresh food, met market expectations and comes after the government introduced relief measures for soaring energy bills.

It is the first deceleration in over a year, marking a fall from January, when prices jumped 4.2 percent on-year — the highest level since September 1981, fuelled in part by higher energy bills.

UBS economist Masamichi Adachi had said ahead of the data release that he expected lower inflation in February “due to a discount on energy price with the government’s subsidies”, which were announced in October and came into effect this year.

The drop is also due in part to the comparison with data from February 2022, when prices began to rise in Japan following decades of sluggish inflation or deflation.

The 3.1 percent rise is above the Bank of Japan’s longstanding two-percent target, which has been surpassed every month since April last year.

But it remains lower than the sky-high inflation seen in the United States and elsewhere, with central banks worldwide hiking interest rates to tackle rising prices.

When both fresh food and energy prices are excluded, Japan’s figure for February is 3.5 percent.

The BoJ views the price increases as the result of temporary factors, including the war in Ukraine, so sees no reason to tweak its monetary easing measures.

Outgoing governor Haruhiko Kuroda left these measures unchanged in his final policy meeting this month before stepping down after a decade at the helm.

Despite pressure to hike interest rates, the BoJ has said it first wants to see evidence of more sustained, demand-driven price rises, supported by salary increases.

Wages have long been stagnant in Japan, although major companies have this year announced substantial salary increases for staff.

Kuroda will be replaced by economics professor Kazuo Ueda next month, but analysts say the new chief faces a tough job navigating a way forward for the bank, whose easy-money policies are viewed as unsustainable in the long term.

China New Home Prices Rise in February but Unsold Homes Cloud Outlook

Uncertainty remains over the still sizable stock of unsold homes

China’s home prices gained momentum nationally in February, rising for a second consecutive month driven by pent-up demand even in smaller cities, but prices have yet to recoup all their losses and there remains a sizable stock of unsold homes.

Average new home prices in February edged up 0.3% month-on-month from a 0.1% gain in January, according to Reuters calculations based on National Bureau of Statistics (NBS) data, the fastest pace since July 2021.

Since mid-2021, the property sector has grappled with a liquidity crisis, with developers delaying or defaulting on debt payments as they struggled to sell apartments and raise funds.

Battered sentiment improved after China’s abrupt U-turn in December on its restrictive zero-COVID policy, with some home buyers trickling back into the market in January.

“The (February) reading came as a surprise to me as national home prices are expected to remain low in the first half of the year before rising in the second half,” said analyst Ma Hong at Zhixin Investment Research Institute, who attributed the price gain to pent-up demand spurred by supportive policies.

Current home prices remain a little lower than at the end of the second quarter of 2021 when the downward cycle of prices started, he said.

In annual terms, prices fell 1.2%, marking the slowest pace in seven months and narrowing from a 1.5% drop in January.

In February, 55 of the 70 cities surveyed by the NBS saw growth in new home prices month-on-month, up from 36 cities in the previous month.

Among the 66 tier-two and tier-three cities, 51 saw new home prices rise in February, compared with 34 cities in January.

China’s yuan strengthened on Thursday, as signs the property market is stabilising raised expectations of a broader economic recovery after Beijing dropped its zero-COVID strategy.


The large number of unsold new homes in small and medium-sized cities clouded the outlook for a continued rebound in the sector, analysts said.

Developers are still under great pressure to reduce their stock of unsold homes, said Liu Lijie, analyst at Beike research institute.

“Despite the apparent stabilization in property prices, its sustainability remains unclear. Beijing may have to do more to instill confidence in the property sector,” Nomura analysts said in a note commenting on the data.

Official data on Wednesday showed the area of unsold homes stood at 655 million square metres as of the end of February.

A manager at a large real estate firm said second- and third-tier cities were unlikely to see a sharp drop in new housing inventory “as market confidence has only just been restored” there.

Official data for January-February on Wednesday showed much narrower declines in home sales, developer investment and construction starts, suggesting the real estate sector was stabilising.

Local governments continued to step up efforts to boost demand this year with around 30 cities optimising policies on provident housing funds, such as allowing smaller down payments and more loans.

By the end of 2022, outstanding mortgages grew by just 1.2% to 38.8 trillion yuan ($5.6 trillion), decelerating by 10 percentage points from the end of the previous year, according to central bank data. ($1 = 6.8993 Chinese yuan) (Reporting by Liangping Gao, Qiaoyi Li and Ryan Woo; Additional reporting by Shuyan Wang; Editing by Jacqueline Wong and Sonali Paul)

Trade gap widens by 27% in January: Philippines

Based on PSA data, the trade gap ballooned to $5.74 billion in January

The country’s trade deficit widened by 27 percent as imports continued to outpace exports in January, according to the Philippine Statistics Authority (PSA).

Based on PSA data, the trade gap ballooned to $5.74 billion in January, the biggest since the record-high monthly deficit of $6.02 billion in August last year.

The latest trade shortfall was 27.2 percent wider than the previous year’s deficit of $4.51 billion and was also 11.9 percent higher than the $4.50 billion in December 2022.

The country’s merchandise exports amounted to $5.23 billion in January, 9.8 percent lower than the $5.80 billion in December last year, and down by 13.5 percent from $6.05 billion in January 2022.

Rizal Commercial Banking Corp. chief economist Michael Ricafort said exports declined ‘in view of global economic headwinds brought about by higher prices or inflation, interest rates that increased borrowing costs or financing costs, (and) risk of economic slowdown or recession in the US, which is the world’s largest economy and among the country’s biggest export markets.’

Of the top 10 major commodity groups in terms of exports value, the PSA said six posted declines in January this year from a year ago. These are coconut oil, which fell by 39.1 percent; cathodes and sections of cathodes, of refined copper by 39 percent; metal components by 19.8 percent; electronic products by 19.2 percent; chemicals by 14.6 percent, and other manufactured goods by 11.9 percent.

Japan accounted for the biggest share of the country’s total exports in January this year with a 16.6 percent share amounting to $866.25 million.

Other major export trading partners of the country in January were the US with $738.26 million or 14.1 percent share, China with $666.99 million or 12.7 percent share, Hong Kong with $530.16 million or 10.1 percent share, and Singapore with $318.47 million or 6.1 percent share.

Imports, on the other hand, reached $10.97 billion in January, 6.5 percent higher than the $10.30 billion in December last year, and up by 3.9 percent from $10.56 billion in January 2022.

Ricafort said imports of certain goods increased as the economy further reopened toward greater normalcy and due to possible pent-up demand.

‘Higher imports could also be due to some pick-up in the prices of global commodities during the month after China reopened its economy from COVID restrictions since December 2022, which led to some upward correction or pick-up in some global commodity prices since China is the world’s biggest importer of oil and other major global commodities,’ he said.

The PSA said seven of the top 10 major commodity groups increased year-on-year in January.

These are metalliferous ores and metal scrap, which rose by 333.5 percent; mineral fuels, lubricants and related materials by 70.6 percent; telecommunication equipment and electrical machinery by 15.2 percent; other food and live animals by 6.4 percent; transport equipment by 3.7 percent; industrial machinery and equipment by 3.4 percent, and miscellaneous manufactured articles by 2.2 percent.

China was the country’s biggest supplier of imported goods with the value at $2.32 billion or 21.1 percent of the total imports in January 2023.

Other major sources of the country’s imports in January this year were Indonesia with $1.16 billion or 10.6 percent share; Japan with $958.70 million or 8.7 percent; South Korea with $866.19 million or 7.9 percent; and the US with $696.99 million or 6.4 percent.

The country’s total external trade in goods amounted to $16.20 billion in January this year, down by 2.4 percent from the $16.60 billion in the same month last year, but was slightly higher than the $16.10 billion in December 2022.

The Benefits of Outsourcing Content and Blog Writing for Businesses

Are you a businessowner looking to expand your reach and appeal? Content creation is often the key to success, but writing blogs or crafting on-brand content can be time-consuming. If this is something you’ve been struggling with lately, outsourcing content and blog writing could be the solution for you. Outsourcing these functions other companies outside of the Asian Pacific region will give your business greater access to specialized knowledge while simultaneously freeing up resources that can be used elsewhere.  Read on to discover the incredible benefits of outsourcing content and blog writing!

Understand Why it is Beneficial to Your Business

Outsourcing content and blog writing is an effective way for businesses to keep up with the ever-changing digital landscape. Not only does outsourcing allow you access to a variety of quality writers, but it also eliminates the need for lengthy and costly recruitment processes. Additionally, hiring experienced and specialized content creators ensures your business produces professional, engaging, and high-calibre articles, blogs, websites, or product descriptions that will get
noticed by potential customers. Furthermore, outsourcing free’s up time which can be used to work on other areas of the business to ensure its success.
Finally, by wisely taking advantage of outsourcing content and blog writing services, businesses can gain the expertise necessary to stay above their competition.

Explore the Advantages 

Recruiting a professional content or blog writer can benefit businesses in various ways. An experienced writer will provide well-written, informative content tailored to
the needs of a specific audience. They are also knowledgeable about SEO best practices and can write pieces that accurately reflect the brand’s identity and
will draw more visitors to the website. Additionally, a professional writer may suggest topical ideas for relevant content or blog posts, which could further engage customers. In summary, utilizing experienced content or blog writers allows for the effective deployment of engaging content with suitable backlinks and keywords that have been carefully crafted with an ideal tone of voice.

How to Choose a Reliable Content or Blog Writer

When searching for a content or blog writer, you must ensure they have the skillset and experience necessary to fulfill your needs. Feel free to ask to see portfolios and/or samples of their work to establish if they can provide what you want. It is also important to note that good writing skills are not just about conveying information – creating engaging content that respects your brand identity and values is also essential. If a prospective writer does not understand your company’s ethos, it may be best to look elsewhere. Finally, ensure that you have a clear brief ready before commencing the search to evaluate if the candidates meet your requirements accurately. These steps ensure that you select a reliable, competent content or blog writer who will deliver excellent results for your business.

Learn About the Different Types of Services Available

Content and blog writing services are becoming increasingly popular for businesses that want to increase their online presence. With these services, companies can get quality content crafted by experienced, knowledgeable professionals who understand the nuances of the English language and the importance of delivering fresh and quality content that users find interesting. Depending on your needs, different types of services are available, including copywriting, article writing, blog posts, website content, press releases, and even content marketing. These services can help you enhance your online presence, create visibility for your business, and reach a wider audience than ever before. Whatever service you choose, be sure to research to find an experienced provider with expertise in creating great content for search engine optimization (SEO) purposes and for capturing user attention.

Learn How the Writing Process Works

Content and blog writing is a critical part of any successful digital marketing strategy. It allows businesses to engage their audiences and build trust by producing
valuable, relevant content for readers. From research and ideation to optimization and promotion, creating blog posts involves several phases. The research phase involves investigating topics to identify potential opportunities for content creation, while ideation uses the research data to generate ideas for blog posts with SEO in mind. Once an idea has been chosen, the writing process starts, including clear titles, descriptive headings, engaging body text, and plenty of visuals. Finally, there’s editing and optimization that helps ensure all on-page elements are properly aligned before finally publishing the post. Content and blog writing can be a daunting process. Still, with a well-planned pipeline that considers SEO best practices, creating great content can become an efficient business marketing process.

Examine the Cost Implications

Outsourcing content and blog writing for businesses can be cost-effective for those looking to create high-quality and engaging material for their website or blog. Hiring an experienced and professional freelance writer to handle the task provides businesses access to top talent that may be outside their budget. In addition, the ability to hire on a project basis gives companies the flexibility to manage their resources efficiently while ensuring they can reach their target audience. Furthermore, freelancer platforms and marketplaces have also made it easier than ever before for businesses to source quality writers without having to spend time, money, or energy searching out potential candidates through traditional methods. Outsourcing content and blog writing can be an economical solution that helps organizations achieve outstanding results online.

Ultimately, businesses looking to create website content can benefit greatly by employing a talented content or blog writer. With the right specialist, companies can look forward to consistently high-quality, engaging content tailored to their needs. In addition, outsourcing content and blog projects save time and money and allow business owners to focus on other core activities of the company while freeing up resources that can be better directed elsewhere. Finally, considering all the factors discussed above, it is clear that enlisting an experienced blog or content writer ensures that businesses can benefit from comprehensive coverage of professional grade materials without sacrificing quality or features. In this way, outsourcing content and blog writing can be an invaluable asset to any organization, regardless of size or scope. So if you need content or blog help, don’t hesitate: by teaming up with a reliable and capable writer, you’ll have the expertise you need to make your business a true success.

6 Video Marketing Benefits for Growing Your Business

Videos are not only the content strategist’s darling; they’re a marketer’s delight. This is to be expected as the video streaming market in the Asia-Pacific region is estimated to grow at a 21.8% annual rate.

Businesses globally are beginning to see the importance of video in marketing. Beyond the quality of being more appealing and memorable than its text counterpart, videos are now seen as an effective tool in e-marketing. This article highlights what video marketing is and how it helps grow your business.

What is video marketing

Video marketing involves using video content to inform your audience about your product, service or brand. It is the promotion of your business through videos. Videos are used as a marketing tool on websites, social media and other channels. They are one of the ways to maximize and make your business stand out.

The role of audio to text transcription in video marketing

When you transcribe audio to text in your videos, you improve your users’ overall engagement and experience. Assimilation is enhanced when people listen, watch and read at the same time. Also, they can remember the information better than when they only listen or watch.

6 ways video marketing can grow your business

Making video a fundamental part of your marketing strategies has many benefits. Five of them are listed below.

SEO boosting

Videos make your website rank higher in searches. The reason is simple – the longer people stay on your site, the higher your site ranks. Guess which form of content people spend the longest time on? Your guess is correct. Videos are more engaging; therefore, people spend more time watching them. The more your search engine optimization is enhanced, the more growth you experience in your business.

More effective marketing campaigns

Your marketing campaigns produce better results when you use videos. With the increase in online video growth in Asian Pacific countries, many more prospects can be reached through videos. If you fail to adopt videos as a marketing strategy, you will lose a lot of customers and prospects.

Improved customer-brand relationship

Your relationship with your customers and prospects is important to business growth. When you cultivate this relationship consistently, you get great dividends. Using videos as part of your marketing campaign allows you to achieve this goal. The longer your customers and prospects spend taking in your content through videos, the more they know, like and trust your brand.

Another benefit of having a vibrant customer relationship is increased customer retention. The trust you get from connecting with your customers via videos makes them willing to keep buying from you. For prospects, your videos make them want to patronize you. All these advantages help you maximize business growth.

Higher chance of influencing buying decisions

Since videos are more appealing and engaging, they stand a better chance of influencing buying decisions than other forms of content. Videos are often short, concise and pleasurable. These are all the ingredients needed to put your audience in a receptive mood. In that brief moment of delight, there is a higher likelihood that a decision will be made in your favor.

Enhanced brand perception

Videos are getting more popular, especially with modern features like Live, Reels and Stories on famous platforms like Facebook and Instagram. Aside from connecting with users on these platforms with videos, you’re positioning your brand as contemporary and trendy. This improves your brand perception considerably. Your audience views you as current and forward moving, which eventually leads to growth for your business.

Increased revenue

The endgame of marketing efforts is to make money. It matters not how elaborate and expensive your marketing campaign is; it’s all a waste if it doesn’t lead to increased revenue. Making videos part of your strategies is a way of working smart instead of hard. When videos are made and deployed correctly, improved revenue is one of the dividends.

Make videos part of your marketing strategies for rapid business growth

If you’ve been experiencing slow growth in your business, take a closer look at your marketing strategy. Without videos, you’re missing out on benefits like SEO boosting, effective marketing campaigns, enhanced customer-brand relationship, higher chance of influencing buyer decision and improved revenue. 

Moyofade Ipadeola is a Content Strategist, UX Writer and Editor. Witty, she loves personal development and helping people grow.

APAC Insider Magazine Announces the Winners of the Singapore Business Awards 2023

United Kingdom, 2023 – APAC Insider Magazine unveils the winners of this year’s Singapore Business Awards.

Recently, Singapore has seen its own economy flourish as it continues to gain direct investment from around the world. Its manufacturing innovations and financial services have formed its reputation for greatness, and we’re pleased to highlight the businesses and individuals exceeding all expectations in these areas.

Here we showcase law firms, underwater solutions providers, metal machining companies, fitness franchise development organisations, and much more, in order to celebrate and commemorate their achievements within their areas of expertise and niche markets.

Awards Coordinator, Stephanie Tooby, commented on the success of this year’s programme: “The winners of the Singapore Business Awards 2023 have gone above and beyond for their customers, and the reputation of Singapore within the corporate landscape. I want to share a sincere congratulations to each individual involved and I look forward to hearing more from them in the future.”

To find out more about these prestigious awards, and the dedicated professionals selected for them, please visit where you can view the award supplement and full winners list.


Notes to Editors.

About APAC Insider

Here at APAC Insider, our approach reflects the innovative, dedicated and results-focused culture that has seen the Asia Pacific region become home to some of the most prominent industry-leading businesses in the world.

Playing host to more than one third of the world’s biggest businesses and boasting more Global 2000 members – among them worldwide brands such as Toyota, Samsung, and Bank of China – than anywhere else on Earth, we are rapidly becoming the region to watch for those seeking the corporate world’s next big thing.


Exploring everything from business strategy and analysis to emerging trends and growth opportunities, APAC Insider is an invaluable resource for more than 160,000 leaders and decision makers looking to be kept fully informed of all the major developments in this most vibrant of business arenas.

We can see the great success of our platform with over 255,322 page views in the last 12 months averaging at 21,200 page views per month we can see our magazine is loved by many. The unique users average at an incredible 6,830 per month and we can’t thank our readers enough for the amazing support they give us to bring this content to you.


About AI Global Media

Since 2010 AI Global Media ( has been committed to creating engaging B2B content that informs our readers and allows them to market their business to a global audience. We create content for and about firms across a range of industries.

Today, we have 14 unique brands, each of which serves a specific industry or region. Each brand covers the latest news in its sector and publishes a digital magazine and newsletter which is read by a global audience. Our flagship brand, Acquisition International, distributes a monthly digital magazine to a global circulation of 108,000, who are treated to a range of features and news pieces on the latest developments in the global corporate market.

Blockchain Security – Aligning to Upcoming Digital Business Initiatives

The development and implementation of digital business initiatives are becoming increasingly necessary in today’s world. As companies strive to remain competitive, they must stay on top of the latest technology and ensure their data is secure. Blockchain technology is a key component of this process, as it is a powerful tool that provides a safe, distributed ledger system that can help secure the integrity of data and transactions.

However, as organizations move towards more complex digital initiatives, such as the e-Residency project of the government of Estonia, they must ensure their blockchain security measures are up to date. Below, you will find an overview of the benefits and challenges associated with blockchain security, along with outlined strategies for mitigating these risks and ensuring successful implementation.

Join us as we discuss the importance of staying up to date with changes in this technology and the implications for businesses in terms of data security and privacy and learn more about the future of blockchain.

What Is Blockchain?

A blockchain is a digital, decentralized ledger that records transactions on many computers across the globe in a secure, tamper-proof way. When a transaction occurs, it is combined with other transactions to form a block, which is then added to the end of the blockchain. Each block contains a cryptographic hash of the previous block, which links the blocks together and prevents any interference.

Since all transactions are recorded on a public ledger, blockchain technology can be used to track ownership, verify identity, and ensure the authenticity of data. Jaryd Krause, a digital assets expert from, notes that this makes it an attractive option for various startups and business initiatives.


The main benefits of blockchain technology are decentralization, immutability, and enhanced security and efficiency.

Decentralization refers to the fact that the ledger is not stored in a single location but is distributed across a computer network instead. This makes it more resistant to tampering or deleting, as there is no central point of failure.

According to Google, “instead of relying on a central entity to validate and store data, the governing infrastructure of a blockchain is a node – a device, such as a computer, laptop, or server, that contains a full copy of the transaction history of the blockchain.” This is a blockchain’s major advantage over traditional centralized systems, which are vulnerable to hacks and data breaches.

Immutability means that once a transaction has been recorded on the blockchain, it cannot be altered or removed. This is due to the fact that each subsequent block contains a cryptographic hash of the previous one, meaning that any change would be immediately apparent.

Security is achieved through the use of cryptography. Each transaction is encrypted and requires a digital signature in order to be verified. This makes it very difficult for anyone to falsify the data.

Not to forget increased efficiency. Traditional systems often require third-party intermediaries like banks to verify and approve transactions. This can slow down the process and add unnecessary costs. With blockchain technology, transactions can be quickly verified and approved by the network of computers, significantly reducing costs and speeding up the process. What’s more, building apps that run on the blockchain can speed up all kinds of business processes – here, you can find a Blockchain development guide.


Despite the many benefits of blockchain technology, there are also some challenges that need to be considered:

Scalability. The decentralized nature of the technology means that each computer in the network must process and store the entire blockchain. As the number of users on the network increases, so does the amount of data that needs to be held on the blockchain. This can lead to the network becoming overloaded and slowing down.

Governance. Because there is no central authority, it can be difficult to make changes to the protocol, potentially leading to stagnation, which could eventually make the network less attractive to users. Plus, since the technology is still relatively new, there is a lack of clarity about regulating it. As such, it could get tricky for businesses to comply with regulations later on, possibly resulting in fines or other penalties.51% attacks. These occur when a group of miners controls more than 50% of the computing power in the network and can therefore manipulate the blockchain. This can result in double-spending – i.e. when a user spends the same cryptocurrency twice. While this type of attack is rare, it is a serious concern for those using blockchain technology.

How to Mitigate Risks and Ensure Alignment

Despite the challenges, blockchain technology remains a powerful tool for businesses when used correctly. In order to mitigate the risks and ensure alignment with upcoming digital business initiatives, it is essential to implement proper security measures.

Below, we outline some key strategies for doing so:

  • Choose a scalable platform
  • Work with regulators
  • Implement strong KYC (know your customer)
  • Ensure that the private keys used to access the blockchain are stored securely.
  • Educate employees.

Wrapping Up

Blockchain technology can provide a number of benefits for businesses, including enhanced security, efficiency, and transparency. However, as with any new technology, there are also some challenges that need to be considered. This is especially important for organizations that move towards more complex digital initiatives, be it passports confirming the authenticity of digital products or an e-identity initiative.

In order to ensure successful implementation, it is essential to put in place proper security measures from the outset – only then will your startup be able to fully reap the benefits of this game-changing technology.

Accenture and Leading Financial Institutions Call for Applicants for the Asia-Pacific FinTech Innova

China Targets High-Quality Development of Private Economy 

As an important part of China’s economic development, the private sector contributes over 60 percent of the gross domestic product (GDP), over 50 percent of the total tax revenue and over 80 percent of urban employment, besides more than 70 percent of technological innovations and 90 percent of market entities in China, according to the National Development and Reform Commission.

Chinese President Xi Jinping on Monday reaffirmed the country’s support for the private sector and urged proper guidance for its healthy and high-quality development.

Xi made the remarks when visiting national political advisers from the China National Democratic Construction Association and the All-China Federation of Industry and Commerce, who are attending the first session of the 14th National Committee of the Chinese People’s Political Consultative Conference (CPPCC).

He joined their joint group meeting, and listened to their comments and suggestions.

Promoting private economy with various measures

Efforts are needed in improving the environment for the development of private enterprises, removing institutional obstacles that prevent them from participating in fair market competition, and safeguarding the property rights of private enterprises and the rights and interests of entrepreneurs in accordance with the law, Xi said.

He stressed the importance of treating state-owned and private enterprises equally, calling for efforts in encouraging and supporting the growth of the private economy and enterprises to boost market expectations and confidence.

High-quality development puts forward higher requirements for the development of the private economy, he added.

Private enterprises should practice the new development philosophy, and have a deep understanding of the shortcomings and challenges in the development of the private economy, he noted.

Private enterprises should change the mode of development, adjust the industrial structure, change the driving force for growth, and consciously follow the path of high-quality development, he added.

Highlighting that Chinese modernization is the modernization of common prosperity for all, he said that both state-owned and private enterprises are important forces for promoting common prosperity and must shoulder the social responsibility for promoting common prosperity.

Great achievements made against challenges

The year 2022 was an extremely important and critical year in the history of the Party and the country, Xi said.

“We implemented the new development philosophy in a complete, accurate and comprehensive way, put forth efforts to build a new development pattern and promote high-quality development,” he said.

With global inflation reaching its highest level in over 40 years, China’s overall price level remained stable, and the economy grew by 3 percent for the whole year, which was high among the world’s major economies, said Xi.

Noting that the five years since the 19th CPC National Congress have been “extremely unusual and extraordinary”, he said that China’s external environment for development is changing rapidly, and there is an increase in uncertain and unpredictable factors.

In particular, the Western countries led by the United States have carried out all-round containment and suppression, which brought unprecedented and severe challenges to China’s development, he added.

Against challenges, achievements have been made, he said, listing examples such as China’s GDP growing at an average annual rate of 5.2 percent, winning the battle against poverty on schedule, and completing the building of a moderately prosperous society in all respects.

On behalf of the CPC Central Committee, Xi also extended greetings and sincere wishes to female deputies to the 14th National People’s Congress and female members of the 14th CPPCC National Committee as well as women workers at the Two Sessions and women of all ethnic groups from all walks of life on the Chinese mainland, in the Hong Kong and Macao special administrative regions, and in the Taiwan region, and also to all women compatriots overseas ahead of International Women’s Day.

Sonata Software signs with Mumbai Indians as Associate Partner for Women’s T20 league in India

Sonata Software, a leading Modernization and Digital Engineering company, has announced that it has signed up with Mumbai Indians as an Associate Partner ahead of the premier T20 women’s league in India.

Sonata Software logo will be prominently visible on the players kits and this partnership marks Sonata Software’s first-ever cricket sponsorship, globally.

“It is indeed a matter of pride for us to be associated with Mumbai Indians and the Women’s T20 league. This association symbolises our continued commitment to enable and promote avenues for women talent to realise their true potential at work and outside of work. We are confident that the players will inspire thousands of Sonatians and others by demonstrating that they are second to none,” said Balaji Kumar, Chief Human Resource Officer, Sonata Software Limited.

Mumbai Indians is the most successful teams in T20 cricket, with the men’s team winning 5 titles and now the women’s team, that is set to debut this year. Mumbai Indians comprises of legends in the coaching team, marquee international and Indian players, and local domestic talent who could be the ones to watch out for.

“The Women’s T20 League is going to change the landscape of women’s cricket, globally. It is going to become one of the biggest-ever platforms for many young and talented women cricketers to show their class and mettle. The team that displays the ‘Play Big’ mindset will triumph,” added Roshan Shetty, Chief Revenue Officer, Sonata Software Limited.

Commenting on the partnership, Mumbai Indians spokesperson said, “We are glad to partner with Sonata Software as we embark on our journey in women’s cricket. We are excited about extending the MI ethos to the women’s team and building on the success enjoyed by us over the years. We look forward to working with Sonata Software, who have debuted in cricket sponsorship, and enhancing their engagement with our paltan across the world.”

Mumbai Indians play the season opener of WPL 2023 on 4th March 2023, at DY Patil Stadium.

Personal Injury Law: Everything You Need to Know to Be Compensated

When an accident occurs and you suffer an injury as a result, it can be a frustrating experience that leaves you wondering what you should do next. However, if the accident is severe enough, you may not be able to work for an extended period of time, or at all. Learning what legal options you have following an accident you were injured by can help you secure the compensation that you deserve.

What is Personal Injury Law?

Sometimes called “tort law”, personal injury legal matters refer to the event in which an injured person files a civil lawsuit against another person or an organization who they believe caused those injuries through an accident. The goal of these civil suits is to prove that the other party did indeed act in a manner that caused the accident and injuries, so that the injured party can receive a legal remedy, typically compensation, for the injuries they’ve suffered.

When Does Personal Injury Law Apply?

In most cases, there are four scenarios personal injury law comes into play for most situations:

In the Event of an Accident: While accidents are unfortunate, one person’s carelessness can cause harm to another. Car accidents slips and falls, malpractice in the medical field, and more are all forms of accidents where personal injury could apply if negligence was present.

In the Event of an Intentional Act: If another person intentionally caused the event that resulted in your injury, they can be held liable for your personal injury in some situations.

In the Event of Defamation: Should a person or organization speak defamatory statements about another, personal injury law could still apply.

In the Event of a Product that is Defective: Finally, if a company releases a defective product such as a vehicle, toy, medical device, or something else that causes harm due to being defective, there may be a personal injury case to be had.

Personal Injury Case: Who Are the Players?

As with most lawsuits, there are two opposing sides involved in the case: the plaintiff and the defendant. In a personal injury case, the plaintiff is the person who is alleging that they were injured as a result of an accident and that they are seeking some form of remediation from the court.

On the other hand, the defendant is the party, an individual or corporation in most cases, that is being accused of causing the accident which resulted in injuries the plaintiff suffered. The plaintiff, typically, has an attorney who represents them and presents evidence of their claim, while the defence also has an attorney who seeks to either erase or mitigate the charges that are being brought against the defendant.

What is the Process of a Personal Injury Case?

While most civil suits end in settlement, it’s still important to cover the timeline of a personal injury case so that you know what to expect if you are injured in an accident. Most commonly, there are three stages:

The Event

The event refers to the accident or incident in which a person received the injuries that they currently have. It is the starting point of all personal injury cases and could be anything from a car accident, someone falling into a ladder you’re standing on, a doctor making a mistake during surgery, or something else similar.

The Determination

The second stage of a personal injury case is determination. This occurs when the injured party realized that someone else may have been at fault for the accident and the injuries they suffered. It is at this point they often contact a legal office to discuss what occurred and to see whether or not a case may be there.

The Settlement or Trial

Finally, the longest part of a personal injury case, is the journey to settlement or trial. This requires gathering evidence, speaking with potential witnesses, selecting a jury if applicable, and going through the trial before either the case is dismissed, or you are awarded compensation. The majority of civil lawsuits will end in settlement, rather than going to trial, which is when both sides sit down and the defendant agrees to certain terms from the plaintiff in exchange for not going to trial.

How Much Can You Receive from a Personal Injury Case?

In most cases, the amount you receive from a person injury case will vary depending on how much fault is applied to the defendant. The judge or jury will come up with a value that seems fair for compensation, based on this amount of fault. To that end, the plaintiff will need to prove three things in order to win their case and receive maximum compensation:

Duty: You will need to prove that the defendant had a legal duty to avoid causing you harm.

Breach of Duty: You will need to prove that the defendant breached their duty and did not act in a manner that prevented harm.

Causation: You need to prove the actions of the defendant directly caused an incident that led to your injuries.

Damages: You need to prove you were injured as a result of the accident. If you can prove all of the above, a judge or jury may find that the defendant was partially or completely negligent, and they may provide you with compensation. On average, half of all plaintiffs receive about $24,000, which can be used to cover lost money due to medical expenses or being unable to work.

Contact an accredited personal injury lawyer today

There are a number of different scenarios in which a person may be eligible for compensation following an accident. It’s always best to trust a lawyer to evaluate your specific situation to determine if there is evidence that you should be awarded compensation for damages suffered as a result. Reach out to an accredited personal injury attorney in your area to review your case and see what you may be entitled to.

Agile Methodologies for Dedicated Software Development Teams

Software development has become crucial to any company’s success in today’s rapidly changing business environment. However, software development is a complex process requiring expertise, collaboration, and a systematic approach. That’s why dedicated software development teams are increasingly becoming the preferred choice for companies. These teams work exclusively on software development projects, providing specialized skills, knowledge, and experience. Dedicated development teams can adopt agile methodologies such as Scrum, Kanban, or Lean to enhance their effectiveness. This article will explore how agile methodologies can benefit a dedicated software development team.

The Benefit of Dedicated Development Teams Using Agile Methodology

Dedicated software development teams provide specialized skills and expertise focused solely on software development projects. Adopting agile methodologies such as Scrum, Kanban, or Lean can significantly benefit these teams by enhancing their efficiency, communication, and quality of work. Agile methodologies promote a flexible and adaptable approach to software development, enabling teams to make changes quickly and deliver value to the customer faster. Effective communication and collaboration are critical to the success of any software development project, and agile methodologies provide a framework for achieving these goals. Read below to learn more!


Agile methodologies promote a flexible and adaptable approach to software development. The iterative agile development process enables teams to make changes and adjustments quickly, leading to faster development cycles. Agile methodologies prioritize working software over documentation, encouraging teams to focus on delivering value to the customer. This approach can help dedicated software development teams increase their efficiency and productivity.


Effective communication is crucial for success when you hire dedicated development teams for your project. Agile methodologies emphasize collaboration and communication between team members, stakeholders, and customers. Agile teams hold daily stand-up meetings to discuss progress, identify issues, and plan their work. Regular communication helps teams identify and address problems early, minimizing the risk of delays or project failure.


Delivering high-quality software is a top priority for dedicated software development teams. Agile methodologies provide a framework for continuous improvement, enabling teams to identify and eliminate defects early in development. Agile teams prioritize testing and quality assurance, ensuring that software meets customer requirements and is error-free. By using agile methodologies, dedicated software development teams can improve the quality of their work and deliver value to their customers.


Scrum is a popular agile methodology used by dedicated software development teams. Scrum provides a framework for managing complex projects, enabling teams to work collaboratively and adaptively. Scrum teams work in short iterations, called sprints, focusing on delivering working software that meets customer needs. The Scrum process involves a product owner, a Scrum master, and a self-organizing team of developers. The product owner defines the product backlog, and the Scrum team works together to deliver the highest-value items in each sprint.


Kanban is another agile methodology gaining popularity among dedicated software development teams. Kanban provides a visual framework for managing workflow, enabling teams to identify bottlenecks and optimize their processes.

Kanban teams use a Kanban board to visualize their work, limiting work in progress to prevent overload and minimize lead time. Kanban teams focus on delivering value continuously, using metrics to monitor and improve their performance.


Lean is an agile methodology that originated in the manufacturing industry and has been adapted for software development. Lean provides a framework for reducing waste and improving efficiency, enabling dedicated software development teams to deliver value to their customers. Lean teams maximize customer value and minimize waste using tools like value stream mapping, root cause analysis, and continuous improvement. Lean teams work collaboratively, using a cross-functional approach to optimize their processes and improve outcomes.


Dedicated development teams are an essential component of modern business. These teams provide specialized expertise and focus on delivering high-quality software that meets customer needs. By adopting agile methodologies such as Scrum, Kanban, or Lean, a dedicated team of developers can improve their efficiency, communication, and quality of work. Agile methodologies promote a flexible and adaptive approach to software development, enabling teams to deliver value to their customers faster. Effective communication and collaboration are crucial to the success of any software development project, and agile methodologies provide a framework for achieving these goals. If you\’re looking to hire dedicated software development team or dedicated teams for software outsourcing, consider working with teams that use agile methodologies.

How to Manage Tax Obligations When Dealing With Company Finances

Managing tax obligations is a common challenge that every business owner must face. Between keeping track of payments and filing forms, it can be difficult to stay organized and keep up with the ever-changing regulations—especially when there are multiple people involved in the company’s finances. But don’t worry! In this blog post, we’ll provide strategies to help you navigate your tax obligations smoother and easier so you can focus on running the most successful version of your business possible.

Understand the different types of taxes your company may be liable for

Managing your company’s taxes is a crucial part of maintaining your business finances. In addition to federal taxes, there are two other types of taxes that you must be aware of and consider when budgeting – state and local taxes. State and local taxes can vary widely depending on where you are located and the type of goods or services your company provides. It is important to understand the different types of taxes you may need to pay and ensure all payments are made in a timely fashion in order to stay compliant. Failure to do this could end up costing your company significantly if fines or penalties are assessed.

Make sure you keep track of all business-related expenses

Managing your business’ finances and tax obligations can seem daunting, but it doesn’t have to be! The key is to make sure you keep track of all business-related expenses. Whether it’s keeping printouts of online purchases or entering every transaction into a spreadsheet, you need an accurate record of everything you spend money on so that you can know the exact amount of taxes you owe. Additionally, make sure to familiarize yourself with what deductions can be taken against your taxes. This could save your business money in the long run if done correctly.

Know when and how to file tax returns

Filing taxes can be a gruelling process, but it is an important step in managing company finances. Knowing when and how to file tax returns on time will keep your business in compliance by preventing any unnecessary penalties or fees. And while the thought of doing your own filing can seem overwhelming, there are plenty of options out there, from hiring a professional tax preparer to making use of online e-filing services. No matter what option you choose, understanding when your taxes are due and taking action accordingly ensures that you’re mitigating potential financial risks for your company.

Pay any taxes owed on time

Paying taxes on time is a key component when it comes to managing the financial obligations associated with your company. Not only will you avoid expensive penalties and interest charges, but staying on top of your necessary tax payments also provides peace of mind that you’re properly handling all of your company’s financial commitments. Establishing a timeline for all required payments is helpful in ensuring that any taxes owed are paid before the due date, leaving you to focus on other pressing aspects of running a business.

Seek professional help if needed

If you find yourself struggling with managing your company’s finances and tax obligations, don’t hesitate to seek professional help. A qualified accountant or financial advisor can provide valuable guidance on how to navigate these complex matters. Additionally, if you need legal assistance in dealing with any issues that may arise, visit Prime Lawyers in Parramatta. Their team of experienced lawyers can offer advice and representation to ensure that your company stays compliant with all relevant laws and regulations. Remember, it’s always better to be proactive in addressing financial and legal concerns rather than waiting for them to become bigger problems down the line.

Overall, it is essential to stay up-to-date on your company’s finances and tax obligations. A proactive approach helps keep you ahead of any potential problems, allowing for smoother operations and avoiding unpleasant surprises when the next filing date arises. It can feel intimidating at first but with the right resources and support, small business owners can easily and efficiently manage their taxes. Utilizing help from an accountant and taking advantage of technology solutions can make a huge difference in simplifying your own finances management process. Ultimately, staying organized and having an accurate understanding of your finances is key to managing company tax obligations in a timely manner while keeping more money in your pocket.

Five Ways Investors can manage Risk and Return

As an investor, managing risk is essential to a successful investment strategy. The truth is, no matter how good you are at picking trading pairs and stocks or how well you’ve diversified your portfolio, there’s always a risk associated with investing.

While it’s impossible to eliminate risk, there are several ways to manage it. This article provides you with the best practices that will help you to manage risks effectively and achieve your financial goals while protecting your capital.

Why do you need to manage risk as an investor

Here are a few reasons to manage risks as an investor:

Handling risk involves assessing the potential of your investments. It helps you identify probable losses and put actions in place to limit the impact of those losses. Plus, It also enables you to take advantage of timely opportunities.

Second, risk management is a way to increase your returns. By understanding the risks you’re taking, you can better decide which stocks to buy and when to buy them. You also leverage risk management techniques to maximize your profits when the market is in your favour.

Finally, risk management is a way to reduce your stress. When you manage your risks, you’ll be better prepared for whatever turn the market takes. This helps you stay calm during periods of market volatility and make decisions from a more rational perspective.

How to manage fraud risk

Fraud is common in the business environment. Most businesses experience several fraudulent actions, from identity theft and phishing attacks to financial misappropriation and other schemes involving multiple parties.

Learning how to manage fraud risk is crucial, as these actions will affect your company’s finances and reputation. Fraud risk management deals with identifying, assessing, and controlling the risks of fraud that arise during business operations. It covers implementing policies, procedures, and controls to prevent fraud. It seeks to protect organizations from losses and ensure compliance with applicable laws and regulations.

The first step to managing fraud risk is to understand what it is. Fraud takes different forms, from false billing and overcharging to identity theft and check tampering. An understanding of these fraud forms will help you to protect your organization and customers.

The next step is to identify the potential fraud risks of your organization. After identifying the core risks of your organization, develop a fraud risk management plan. This plan should identify the actions that need to be taken to reduce the risk of fraud, as well as the processes and controls that need to be implemented. It should also define roles and responsibilities for those involved in fraud risk management.

Finally, it is vital to monitor fraud risk on an ongoing basis. This requires regular monitoring and reporting to ensure that current controls and processes remain effective. It also involves responding quickly to any signs of fraud, including internal investigations and corrective action.

Fraud risk management is an essential part of any business, and your organization needs to take the necessary steps to protect itself. By understanding fraud risk, you will protect your business from costly losses and maintain your reputation of trustworthiness.

Five tips for investors to balance risk and return

The financial market is a risky one. Though its potential for high returns is incredible, it has a high possibility of losses. Hence, as an investor, you need to understand the risks associated with investing and develop strategies to manage those risks while still achieving your investment goals. Here are seven tips to help investors manage risk and return.

Understand your risk tolerance

Understanding your risk tolerance is vital in managing your risk and return as an investor. The idea is simple: you will earn higher returns if you have a high-risk tolerance. It also helps you establish the right investments and the funds to allocate to each. While there isn’t a fixed strategy to risk management, understanding your risk tolerance is an excellent place to start.

So, how do you figure out your risk tolerance? First, consider what assets you’re comfortable investing in and how much of your portfolio you’re willing to put into each investment. For example, if you’re comfortable investing in stocks but aren’t ready to put more than 50 percent of your portfolio into stocks, then you have moderate risk tolerance.

Second, think about the types of investments you’re comfortable making. For example, are you willing to invest in higher-risk assets like crypto? Or do you prefer lower-risk assets like bonds? Learning your risk tolerance will help you determine the investments to focus your portfolio.

Third, look at your time horizon. Different assets have distinct holding periods. For instance, stocks are more volatile than bonds, so stocks may be the better option if you’re looking for short-term gains.

On the other hand, if you want long-term gains, then simpler assets are the best choice. Finally, set goals. Are you trying to grow your wealth or are you just protecting your capital? The answers to these questions will help you choose a suitable investment.

Risk parity strategy

Risk parity strategy seeks to balance the risk of different investments by ensuring that each asset class contributes an equal amount of risk to the portfolio. It builds on the idea that if one asset class experiences a significant drawdown, then the rest of the portfolio should be able to absorb the losses. This approach allows investors to diversify their portfolios, reducing the risk of extreme losses while maintaining the potential for high returns.

When building your portfolio, you need to consider your individual preferences and risk tolerances. Risk parity strategies are tailored to an investor’s specific needs, allowing them to adjust the risk and return to their desired levels.

One of the key benefits of a risk parity strategy is that it allows investors to diversify their portfolios and manage risk more effectively. Investing in various asset classes will reduce the risk of extreme losses and increase the potential for higher returns. Thus, this strategy helps investors achieve their long-term financial goals and protect their portfolios from market volatility. Institutional investments, such as pension funds, often use risk parity strategies to create more balanced portfolios. However, individual investors can also benefit from this strategy.

Diversify your portfolio

Portfolio diversification is one of the most effective methods for managing risk. When you invest in several asset classes, you spread out and reduce risk. Diversification is a method that reduces risk by spreading out investments across different asset classes, sectors, and locations.

Investing in many assets will provide higher possibilities for the growth and protection of your capital. You have multiple alternatives for diversifying your portfolios. One, use a mix-and-match technique with assets from distinct asset classes such as stocks, bonds, real estate, and commodities. This helps to balance out the risk and return of each asset class, ensuring that the portfolio is capable of taking the changes in the market.

Second, you can diversify within an asset class. For example, if someone is investing in stocks, they can diversify across sectors such as healthcare, technology, and energy. If one sector experiences a downturn, the other will continue to supply steady returns.

Third, you can also diversify geographically. Invest in countries across the globe, and enjoy the growth of emerging markets and the stability of more developed markets.

Invest for the long-term

Short-term investments are quite risky due to the uncertainty of market movements. Investing for the long-term, however, helps reduce risk as market fluctuations tend to even out over time. It leads to meaningful wealth creation in the long run. It also reduces fees paid for regular short-term transactions.

Use stop losses

Stop losses are orders placed with a broker or other financial institution to automatically sell a security when it reaches a certain price. For example, if an investor owns shares of XYZ Corporation, they can set a stop loss order at $10 per share.

Using stop losses helps you protect your portfolios from drastic losses in a market downturn. Stop losses also help investors maximize their returns. By setting a stop-loss order lower than the original purchase price, investors will protect themselves from unexpected losses and lock in gains as soon as their investments reach a particular price.

When setting a stop loss, it’s vital to consider the security’s volatility and the amount of risk you are willing to take. For instance, if you are investing in a volatile stock, it’s wise to set your stop loss at a lower price than you would for a less volatile security. Also, remember to consider the risk you are willing to bear on any security. For example, setting a stop loss too close to your purchase price will limit your potential gains, while setting it too far will leave you vulnerable to a market downturn.

Strike a balance between risk and return in investing

You need to understand how to balance your risk and return as a business leader. While businesses with high returns are attractive to every investor, you need to calculate the risks involved and match them to your risk tolerance.

By following these tips, you will make smarter decisions and effectively manage the risk and return of your investments. While there isn’t a static method for investing, these strategies will help you to achieve your financial goals.

Author’s Bio

Jennifer Nwokolo is an SEO content writer for B2B and SaaS brands. She has helped a lot of brands tell their stories and expand their reach.

She upholds that the ideal content comprises the balance of information, entertainment, and SEO. She is steadily building a community of individuals who love reading great content.

Understanding Consumer Needs for Market Research in the USA

Do you want to know what today’s consumers in the USA are really looking for in the products and services they purchase? Market research provides invaluable insights that can help you create a successful marketing strategy. From formulating survey questions to leveraging customer data, there are several methods available to ensure your business caters to its desired audience. In this blog post, we’ll explore why it is important for businesses to understand their target market’s needs as well as provide great tips on how to get started with doing an effective market research project targeting the US consumer.

The different types of consumer needs

There are a variety of consumer needs that need to be taken into account when conducting market research in the USA, from product preferences and requirements to the overall shopping experience and customer service. With American consumers being more discerning and tech-savvy than ever before, researching their purchasing habits is paramount for companies hoping to remain competitive in the market. Understanding both current trends and predicting future changes is an essential part of successful market research, ensuring that what products are put on offer meet customers’ evolving wants and needs. As such, conducting thorough research helps businesses make sure they can identify key points of differentiation in order to provide value within their given industry.

Knowing the needs of your target market

Knowing the needs of your target market is key to successful market research in the USA. It’s critical to make sure you have distilled down who it is you are trying to reach and what their needs may be. The best way to do this is to draw on the data sources available, such as customer surveys and sales calls, to gain insights into your potential customer profiles. You should always monitor online conversations in forums or social media platforms and look for common responses that can point out possible issues or opportunities for improvement. Additionally, investigate annual reports from industry associations or competitors for further understanding of business trends that can affect new product development. By properly identifying your target market needs through careful research techniques, you’re much more likely to succeed in designing a product that meets their demands!

Meeting the needs of consumers through market research

Market research is an incredibly important tool for companies that want to make sure their products are meeting the needs of consumers. By understanding what people want, businesses can craft their offerings for maximum success and customer satisfaction. Companies should pay close attention to any feedback gathered from market research so they can use it to continually improve their products and services. Additionally, businesses can analyze large data sets from past studies and develop future predictions based on that information to stay ahead of trends while meeting the changing needs of their customers. Smart market research allows companies to effectively reach the right audiences and provide them with exactly what they need in order to gain loyalty and profitability.

Tips for effective market research in the USA

When conducting market research in the USA, it is important to keep a few key tips in mind. First of all, it is wise to use multiple methods for gathering information. Combining primary techniques such as surveys and interviews with secondary techniques such as existing data analysis can provide you with deep insight. Secondly, make sure to focus on both qualitative and quantitative research when designing strategies and collecting data; this will help create more rounded market intelligence. It is also a good idea to test the effectiveness of your research by piloting it with a small audience or sampling method first. Finally, having an experienced consultant or team familiar with local markets and cultural nuances can be invaluable when trying to get meaningful insights from the USA market research.

Understanding consumer needs for market research in the USA is crucial for any business looking to succeed in this competitive market. By conducting thorough research and analysis, businesses can gain valuable insights into their target audience’s preferences and behaviours, allowing them to make informed decisions about their products and services. To achieve this, it’s important to work with a reputable market research agency that has experience in the US market. Consider partnering with one of the USA’s best research agencies to ensure that you get accurate and actionable data that will help you make strategic decisions for your business.

Hotel Star, China Mobile and ZTE Secure GSMA 5G Smart Production Challenge Award

ZTE Corporation, a global leading provider of information and communication technology solutions, Hotel Star and China Mobile have been rewarded GSMA 5G Smart Production Challenge Award at the 2023 GSMA 5G Industry Challenge for its “5G Enables Digital Transformation of Manufacturing” project.

GSMA 5G awards are among the most prestigious awards of the telecoms industry. This accolade has recognized ZTE’s achievements and contributions in the telecoms industry, and verified how ZTE has come a long way helping more vertical industries to benefit from the cutting-edge private 5G technologies.

The SMEs (Small- and Medium-sized Enterprise) account for the vast majority, in terms of number of enterprises, of vertical industries such as manufacturing, and they are no less enthusiastic about modernizing their businesses with mobile network technologies. However, the challenges to these SMEs are often much greater than to the big enterprises, due to unfavorable scale of economy related to infrastructure, human resource and budget. It has always been one of the biggest hurdles for them to overcome before they enjoy more productive and efficient businesses.

ZTE and China Mobile, backed up with technology innovations, have been committed to addressing these issues with their customers and partners. Bai Gang, Vice President of ZTE, said: “Bringing 5G to smart manufacturing has always been one of our goals in helping vertical industries. SMEs are particularly challenging for a powerful and sustainable 5G to materialize, and we are very pleased to see that the NodeEngine based private 5G innovations really help. They enable very capable and easy-to-use private 5G, so the enterprises can integrate and digitalize their core production.”

“Edge computing capabilities, integrated right into the existing 5G base station, is one such innovation that tackles the core challenges for SME’s digital transformation, in that it offers much needed infrastructure for applications such as machine vision and AGV with the smallest possible network footprint, flexible capacity and easy-to-use integration with the enterprises’ existing apps and systems.” added Bai Gang.

Deng Wei, Director of Department of Wireless Communication and Terminal Technology, China Mobile Research Institute, said: “China Mobile actively builds a new information service system of “connection + computing power + capability”, innovates an intelligent and simplified 5G private network solution. Relies on intelligent industrial cloud base stations, the agile deployment of cloud, network and industrial services and intelligent coordination of network and services can be achieved. The duration of private network commissioning and service deployment can be shortened to the hour level, and the service latency can be stabilized to within 10 ms, facilitating industrial digital development. In the future, China Mobile will continue to work with partners to strengthen the capabilities of intelligent industrial cloud base stations, expand the scope of application scenarios, and achieve in-depth integration and large-scale application of the 5G+ industry.”

The joint efforts and achievements of ZTE, China Mobile and Hotel Star are just one of the many successful cases of ZTE and China Mobile in the industries by and large. Moving forward, the three parties will stay committed to innovating private 5G technologies and bringing them to more enterprise and industries for a better digital future for everyone.

For more information, please visit ZTE booth (3F30, Hall 3, Fira Gran Via) at Mobile World Congress 2023, or explore:

3 Things To Consider When Selecting Link Building Services In 2023

Are you feeling like a small fish in a big pond when it comes to driving organic traffic to your website? Is your website buried deep in the search engine results, never to be seen by potential customers? Are you tired of using different SEO & marketing tricks in the book only to see no real results?

Well, in this ever-changing digital marketing landscape, it can be tough to navigate and find the right SEO strategies to get the job done. But it does not mean you should feel discouraged. There is a solution that can help you break through the noise and achieve the success you’ve been striving for, i.e., Link Building Services.

That said, in this article, we’ll explore three key factors to consider when selecting a link building service in 2023. Let’s begin!

Quality Over Quantity

It’s an age-old debate in link building: should you prioritize quantity or quality when it comes to backlinks? In 2023, the answer is clear: quality wins every time.

Google’s algorithm is getting smarter and more skilled at identifying low-quality, spammy links, especially with the recent helpful content update. That means you could hurt your website’s ranking if you’re not careful.

So when considering a white label link building service, ask them about their approach to this strategy. Do they focus on earning high-quality, relevant backlinks from reputable sources? Or do they promise to deliver hundreds or even thousands of backlinks in a short period?

Remember, one high-quality backlink from a trustworthy source is worth more than dozens of low-quality links from spammy websites.

Transparency and Communication

Communication is key in any business relationship, and link-building services are no exception. When you’re entrusting a company with your website’s SEO, you want to be sure that you’re kept in the loop.

So, look for service providers that prioritize transparency and communication. They should be willing to share their link-building strategies with you and explain their processes in detail.

Check whether they have a clear point of contact? Or are they available to answer your questions and address your concerns in a timely manner. If a link building service is evasive or uncommunicative, that’s a clear red flag that you must not avoid.

Reputation and Results

Finally, you’d want to work with a service with a proven track record of success and a reputation for providing high-quality backlinks. So, ask the shortlisted companies to provide case studies and examples of their past work.

Also, check if they have a history of delivering results and building positive relationships with their clients. Or do they have a reputation for shady practices and ineffective strategies? You can even look for reviews and testimonials from past clients to confirm the same.

Simply put, you must work with a credible & trustworthy team to achieve impressive search engine results.

To Sum It All Up

When you are searching for a link-building service to elevate your SEO efforts, keep an open mind, and don’t be afraid to ask questions. Seek referrals for a service that aligns with your unique needs and budget. Also, consider the factors discussed above. So, what are you waiting for? Take the plunge and start exploring your link-building options today.

Who are C++ Developers, and How to Become the Best

C++ is an improved and expanded version of the C programming language. The programming language is best suited for intermediate-level programmers because it is free-form, statically typed, and frequently compiled. Those who begin their programming journey using C++ discover that they may quickly acquire programming ideas that will help them stay ahead of their peers when companies decide to hire C++ developers. Keep reading to learn more about C++ Developers and how to become the best fit when companies decide to hire C++ developers.

C++ Practical Applications

This section will help newbie C++ developers to understand the top application areas. 

Operating Systems (OS)

C++ was used in the development of most operating systems, including Microsoft Windows, Apple Mac OS X, Symbian OS, and even mobile operating systems such as IOS. In general, operating systems must be quick and efficient at managing system resources. Because C++ is a fast programming language with a wide range of system-level capabilities, it is an excellent choice for creating operating systems.


Because of its proximity to hardware, C++ is one of the most extensively utilized programming languages in game creation. C++ and its high speed are used in games with graphics as an intrinsic element of their structure. 

GUI-Based Applications

Due to its speed, C++ is used to construct many popular GUI (Graphical User Interface) and desktop programs. Adobe apps such as Illustrator, Photoshop, and Microsoft’s Win Amp Media Player are all instances of C++ applications.

Web Browsers

Your current web browser was most likely written in C++. It drives the backend services that retrieve data from databases and translate code into interactive web pages. Browsers can work at fast speeds and with minimal latency thanks to C++, so material appears quickly on our displays.

Cloud Computing

Because it is near to the hardware or machine-level language, C++ is an obvious choice for creating cloud storage systems. It is very machine-compatible. As a result, large firms that employ cloud computing and distributed apps use C++ because it supports multithreading and can develop concurrent programs while also providing load tolerance to the hardware system.


C++’s standard library includes a plethora of built-in functions. Excellent-level mathematical computations require high performance and quickness. As a result, most libraries make use of C++ as their primary programming language. C++ is an excellent contender for a backend programming language that provides libraries for a number of new and popular high-level libraries, such as Machine language libraries.

What Are Your Career Prospects as a C++ Expert

You will have fantastic work chances, salary, and career prospects even if you only have C++ programming experience. However, for a profession focused on programming languages such as Java and Python or occupations front-end, back-end, and full-stack development, C++ expertise will take you further. Furthermore, you are expected to know C++ in development domains such as software testing.

Your potential compensation after studying C++ will be determined by your skill level, geographical region, employer if you work as a freelancer, and other things.

How to Build a Career in C++

Though C++ is a difficult language to master, the variety of applications that can be created with it is amazing. The more information and expertise you have, the more probable it is that you will acquire a respected career.

There are various jobs looking to hire C++ experts, and this will help you create a career in C++. Some of these are Junior/senior programmers, software engineers/developers, C++ analysts, backend developers, and database developers.

Google, Amazon, Intel, Infosys, Sun Microsystems, Microsoft, and other industry titans hire C++ programmers. So, if you have the necessary skills, there are plenty of opportunities.

C++ Developers are in high demand. A C++ developer makes around $103,035 on average. The salary is also determined by your skill set, certifications, and expertise. 

Tips to Become The Best For Companies Looking to Hire a C++ Developer

To completely understand C++, you must go through multiple C++ tutorials and books. Here are a few things to consider:

1. Commit to the long term. The amount of time and effort required to learn C++ will vary based on your level of dedication. It also depends on your current situation and previous experiences. In any event, don’t expect to master it in a week.

2. You must devote time to learning the fundamentals and seek assistance from peers and more experienced C++ programmers.

3. Stick to the norms and C++ standards. Guidelines encourage you to concentrate on fundamental guidelines that will assist you in getting the job done efficiently. Building on such a solid foundation will allow you to build on what you’ve learned without having to go back to basics every time you encounter a new location or purpose.

4. Practice, practice, and practice some more. Putting what you’ve learned into practice is the greatest way to ensure that you comprehend what you’ve learned.

5. Find and correct any flaws or faulty code. Whether you construct your own applications or try to modify other people’s code, you learn the most when you try to solve these problems.

6. Read other people’s C++ code to discover diverse coding approaches. Learning on your own might lead to tunnel vision, which prevents you from obtaining new ideas or finding easier methods to apply what you’ve learned.

7. Participate in a community and attend seminars. There are numerous useful communities you may join to assist you with your C++ learning journey, e.g., Codechef and StackOverflow.


Now that you are well versed in the wide range of C++ applications, go ahead and explore the career prospects of C++ that we mentioned and clear your vision to embark on the right track. There are a lot of C++ developers for hire; improve your career prospects with these tips as companies look to hire a C++ developer.

Dos & Don’ts of Managing An International Team In 2023

Remote work is here to stay. As demand for digital nomadism rises — and with international hiring among 2023’s big market trends — employment experts reveal the dos and don’ts of managing a successful global team.

Global employment is growing exponentially on the back of remote work. The business benefits of a worldwide team are endless, but “Leaders cannot take for granted on a distributed team what they do in an office,” warns Job van der Voort, CEO of international hiring and EOR service Remote.

Signs remote teams are going global:

  • A global benefits study by Remote shows that 54% of business leaders expect their teams to become more geographically distributed over the next five years.
  • 22% of the American workforce will be remote by 2025, with 30% of the UK workforce already working remotely. A further 42% of UK employees would like to work from abroad, with millennials driving demand for work wanderlust.
  • Three-quarters of workers would only consider new roles if they offered ‘work from anywhere’ policies. 

Remote, the global employment expert, reveals the do’s and don’ts of managing global teams as the movement grows, helping businesses get the transition right.

Do adopt an asynchronous work model

  • Two-fifths of employees believe an asynchronous model is the future of work.
  • 21% of European business leaders say they would not rule out moving towards more employee-centric scheduling strategies.

Team members are not required to work on the same schedule when working asynchronously. “Asynchronous working principles allow global teams to thrive, especially when these teams have several different time zones to consider,” says Job van der Voort. “Leaders of remote workforces should think critically about whether it is truly important to be online at the same time for most projects, and in the cases when working together is better, how to use that time in the most effective way.

Don’t fall into the ‘proximity bias’ trap

  • 42% of supervisors forget remote workers when assigning tasks.
  • Nearly three-fourths of companies are enforcing measures to prevent remote workers from being disadvantaged by organizational processes.

Proximity bias is a form of favoritism, occurring when those in leadership positions favor team members they interact with in person,” says Job van der Voort. “Proximity bias harms organizations by limiting the growth of talented people who do not work in offices while creating a negative culture.” 

Job continues: “Eliminating proximity bias is about nurturing a strong and supportive remote work culture that’s inclusive to all, however they choose to work. Such a culture is built from the top down, giving all team members the confidence and flexibility to work wherever they are most productive without sacrificing career progression and growth.” 

Do use simple and accessible collaboration software 

  • Collaborative work makes up 85% of people’s work weeks. By 2024, in-person meetings will only amount to 25% of team conversations.
  • 83% of team members say they rely on digital technology for team collaboration, with 59% facing challenges using their organizations’ tools. Another study claims 91% of employees are frustrated by the tools they’re given for collaboration work.

“The tools your organization uses must be intuitive, simple, and most importantly accessible,” says Job van der Voort. “Usability of tools is incredibly important. A powerful collaboration tool only a handful of people feel comfortable adopting will inevitably become a source of frustration throughout the team, only serving to hold your remote processes back.” 

Continuing to talk about simple and accessible collaboration tools, Job says, “The tools you use should go hand-in-hand with your business’s commitment to asynchronous work, meaning instant access to information is pivotal. You need reliable, usable solutions for communications, instant video recordings, scheduling, and especially documentation.”

Having these tools working in harmony makes it easy for everyone to work together regardless of working hours or locations. That is what we mean by async work: people have the tools they need to do great work and not wait for others to be online.”

Don’t forget about compliance 

  • The upsurge in digital nomadism now means there are 46 countries around the world offering digital nomad visas to foreign professionals — these legal documents allow people to travel and temporarily live and work in specific countries. 
  • The Global Employer of Record market size is forecast to grow to over $6.7 billion by 2028, helping SMEs and other businesses to permanently and legally employ talent abroad.

Companies are moving from simply offering remote work to embracing distributed teams,” says Job van der Voort. “This means companies can hire great people all over the world, but it also means they need to be mindful of issues of compliance.”  

Job adds, “Many companies still believe you need to open an entity in a new country to hire there. Thanks to employer of record services, this is not the case. You can get set up to hire people in other countries in days instead of months, and you don’t have to bear the burden of compliance risks when you use an EOR.” 

Do establish a core benefits package for remote workers

  • Remote’s global benefits report reveals that 78% of company decision-makers have seen greater employee retention after adding or improving their benefits packages. 
  • The same report indicates that 60% of employees would choose between jobs based on the benefit packages they offered.

Our data shows there are four primary benefits in most parts of the world,” says Job van der Voort. “These core benefits are health insurance, life insurance, disability insurance, and a pension or retirement fund. Depending on where your team is located, governments either provide these benefits as part of the social safety net or require employers to provide them.” 

Any statutory benefits not provided by the government are usually the responsibility of the employer. And all employer-provided benefits programs must comply with the laws and regulations of the jurisdictions where their employees work.” 

Job adds, “When dealing with a global team, a one-size-fits-all approach to packaging benefits won’t work. The leaders’ role is to appropriately tailor statutory benefits with lifestyle benefits that are truly useful to team members in each location. Otherwise, you risk your benefits package becoming a boon for one employee and a burden for another.” 

Don’t overlook the importance of cybersecurity

  • 34% of organizations identify improving cybersecurity as the biggest challenge for hybrid work models, making it the number one priority moving forward.
  • A remote work setup can raise the risk of cyber threats if your remote team isn’t sufficiently trained and protected.

“Legacy office-based security processes aren’t robust enough to handle remote work,” says Job. “I suggest leaders implement a zero-trust security framework. A zero-trust framework embraces the accessibility of a flexible work culture, protecting people, devices, apps, and data stored in the cloud.

Job also talks about the importance of implementing a crisis response plan, saying “While your primary responsibility is to prevent breaches, you must also create a response plan to guide you in case of disaster. Training is essential here. You must include all areas of the organization including your staff, partners, contractors, and even local authorities, depending on the laws in the locations where you hire.”

All You Need to Know about Travel Insurance When Going to Australia

Travelers usually love vacations to Australia, making it one of the most popular destinations. As a result, tourists are curious to know whether or not having travel insurance is required for vacations in Australia. There is nothing quite like the peace of mind that comes from knowing you are protected by travel insurance. Travel insurance for your trip to Australia is vital if something goes wrong.

There are different reasons for getting travel insurance. The ability to cover unexpected illnesses or accidents while traveling to Melbourne is essential. For increased safety on your trip, you should lodge at places with a history of little or no incidents. Given the abundance of rental choices, you can compare Rentola Australia options with housing in the area. By doing so, you will stand a great chance of keeping safe from incidents. That being said, you should have no doubt considering getting travel insurance for your trip to Melbourne.

Types of Travel Insurance

Travel insurance, considered an absolute need, helps cover unforeseen expenses. Not every form of travel insurance is the same. The following are some of the most common kinds of travel insurance:

Medical Insurance

Depending on the type of coverage you acquire, it can be utilized to pay medical costs incurred while traveling. If you happen to get ill or get injured, medical insurance helps manage the situation without you having to worry.

Rental Car Insurance

This provides financial protection against the expense of repairing or replacing a rented vehicle. When renting a car on your trip to Australia, this information can be beneficial.

Travel Cancellation Insurance

This is supplementary insurance that, if you have to cancel a trip for whatever reason, you will get compensated for a portion of non-refundable costs.

Death Insurance

This coverage, comparable to life insurance, will make a payout to an individual of your choice if you pass away while on your trip.

Insurance for Baggage Loss

This insurance offers financial compensation if your baggage is lost, damaged, or stolen. With this, you can make up for whatever you lose at the time.

How Much Does It Cost to Get Travel Insurance to Australia?

This depends on the kind of Insurance you opt to get. The cost of an Australian travel insurance plan differs from one traveller to the next. The price of travel insurance to Australia is based on several factors. This includes the age(s) of the traveller(s), the number of travellers, and their medical history. Also, the type of coverage they purchase and the length of their trip determines the cost. You can choose to insure your travel cost in some situations, which will also affect the final price of the insurance package.

Adventure activities and extreme sports like skiing, scuba diving, and white-water rafting are considered extras. They can be purchased for an additional fee and added to the total price. In addition, if you have a pre-existing medical condition, the plan’s cost may be higher. Learn how pre-existing health conditions affect trip insurance so that you know what may or may not be covered. Doing so helps whether or not you need to adjust your policy.

Should I Purchase Travel Insurance Before Going to Australia?

Getting travel insurance for your trip to Australia is undoubtedly beneficial. You would want to travel knowing that you are covered in case of any occurrence. An investment in travel insurance is always a good idea whenever you are embarking on a trip. It is especially vital, given how difficult it is to foresee undesirable occurrences. Acquiring a policy that covers a travel-related risk is always a viable alternative. Remember that costs will vary based on the travel destination, dates, age, and overall trip cost.

A cautious traveller may find that purchasing travel insurance gives them a sense of relief. You may or may not be interested in purchasing travel insurance. However, you should seriously consider purchasing one to guarantee that you are insured. If this is something you are interested in doing, be sure to use the best insurance company to obtain the best possible bargain for your needs.


Whether you are on a business trip or taking a vacation to Australia, securing travel insurance is the best gift for yourself. After getting everything sorted out, you can kick back, relax, and have the trip of a lifetime. You will feel secure in the knowledge that no matter what happens, the situation will be sorted out with ease.

India Wants a Clean Energy Transition Deal – And its Coal Too

India is unlikely to sign a deal with richer nations this year for a just energy transition, as international funding rests on India committing to a timeline to phase out coal, an “unviable” proposition for the country, energy analysts said.

The Group of Seven (G7) industrialised nations, together with Norway, Denmark and the European Union, believe a ‘just energy transition partnership’ (JETP) with India will financially empower it to reduce climate changing emissions from power production.

Similar pacts have been signed with South Africa, Indonesia and Vietnam, but India wants a JETP on its own terms: no phase out of coal and funds for clean energy expansion in the form of grants, not loans.

“The developed world is pushing for a JETP as they want coal out. The JETPs with South Africa and Indonesia are all about coal. But that won’t work here,” said economist Vaibhav Chaturvedi, a fellow at the New Delhi-based Council on Energy, Environment and Water (CEEW).

“Coal is the only stable source of energy in India, which is still a developing economy. India won’t talk about coal but (instead about) more renewable energy, which has more achievable and demonstrable targets,” Chaturvedi said in an interview.

India’s ministry of external affairs, which is considering JETP proposals this year as India helms the G20 presidency, did not respond to queries despite repeated emails and phone calls.

But analysts familiar with India’s stance said conversation around a JETP is stuck on the financial terms of funding and India’s resistance to being “bullied into a partnership”.

What India needs is more green jobs and funds to train people for them, said Swati Dsouza, an energy analyst with the International Energy Agency (IEA).

“The JETP as it currently stands may not be the best model or framework for India given that the country will see an increase in energy demand and possible increase in coal capacity,” she said.


In recent months, India has relaxed environmental and public consultations on coal mine expansions, boosted its coal production and cited coal as critical for energy security in global climate dialogues.

But the country still aims to reduce coal from 50% of its energy mix currently to about 30% by 2030, while building 500 gigawatts (GW) of new renewable capacity.

Simultaneously beefing up both coal and renewables points to a messy energy transition for India, including the risk of job losses if some coal mines are abandoned.

India’s mixed signals, analysts say, indicate the country will phase out coal only when it is sure the transition won’t cause power disruptions, with renewable energy storage capacity currently still weak and expensive.

As the world’s third largest power consumer, India’s power use has doubled since the turn of the century, with over 900 million citizens gaining an electrical connection in less than two decades, according to the IEA.

Last year, the country faced one of its worst power crises in six years as a heatwave swept across the nation, pushing up energy demand, triggering power cuts, causing a fuel crisis at overworked power plants and boosting heat-related deaths.

As it tries to meet rising demand for power, coal use will peak in India between 2030 and 2035, the government said – but meantime the country needs to strengthen its renewable grid and infrastructure, for which it wants JETP funding.

“We still want to negotiate with developed countries … as long as developed countries listen to us,” said Santosh Patnaik, program coordinator at Climate Action Network South Asia.


The village of Bhadla, in a desert region in northwestern Rajasthan state, got its first power grid connection five years ago.

While electricity arrives less than eight hours each day, it has lit up evenings in a village that earlier used kerosene lamps to help its sheep-herding children study at night.

“All we want is a steady power supply,” said Sadar Khan, the village council head who has written to authorities lamenting power cuts that can last in some cases a whole day.

A JETP that focuses only on reducing coal would be looking at India’s energy transition too “narrowly”, glossing over the growing aspirations of Indians, analysts say.

Many are new consumers of electricity and need affordable power to improve their economic condition, they said.

Households with new electricity connections, many of them in rural areas, are now using washing machines, refrigerators and laptops, said Gauri Singh, deputy director-general of the International Renewable Energy Agency (IRENA).

India’s transition efforts need to be mindful of these aspirations, she said, adding the country’s challenge was to ensure clean and affordable energy for all while moving away from fossil fuel.

“The JETP cannot be a broad-brushed partnership but has to look at the context of each country. It is much more complex than retiring thermal plants,” Singh said in a video call.


Last December, the G7 nations announced $15.5 billion for Vietnam to help it transition away from coal, with only a minor part as grants and most of the money as loans.

India could land a much larger deal, with the United States and Germany at the forefront of negotiations with the South Asian powerhouse, analysts say.

India may be able to use its position as G20 leader this year to steer discussions on a deal toward scaling renewable capacity and investments in new technologies, said R.R. Rashmi, programme director for earth science and climate change at The Energy and Resources Institute (TERI).

To meet its target of having 500GW of renewable energy capacity by 2030, India will have to invest an average of $27.9 billion annually up to 2029, research estimates show – but its budget allocations aren’t sufficient for that, economists said.

Beyond scaling up renewables, India also needs to acknowlege that energy shifts now underway will require a just transition for workers.

“This is not the question of our energy sector being decarbonised but also about exit, compensation of coal workers and alternate livelihoods,” Rashmi from TERI said.

“Even if we cannot cut down on coal, we have to prepare for a phase down,” he said.


At least five Indian states – some of them the country’s poorest – depend heavily on the country’s coal economy. In the absence of a uniform just transition plan for the country, they risk losing their main revenue source.

Coal workers’ unions say funding to restore land in areas ravaged by years of mining, creation of new jobs in new industries and training in the skills needed for jobs in clean energy are needed.

“The just transition conversation is dominated by technical and financial issues, ignoring the social aspect of transition, which is the most important,” said D.D. Ramanandan, general secretary of the All India Coal Workers Federation.

“Engineers and finance experts are discussing just transition, not us. We are the biggest stakeholders in this. If coal ends, everything ends for us, but we are sidelined. This will be an unjust transition.”

($1 = 82.6820 Indian rupees)

CGTN: China achieves ‘major, decisive’ victory in COVID-19 response: CPC leadership

Over the past three years, China has always been putting people’s lives and health first and adapting its COVID-19 response in light of the evolving situation, in efforts widely believed to have bought precious time for a smooth transition.

The country has achieved a major and decisive victory in its COVID-19 prevention and control since November 2022, the Standing Committee of the Political Bureau of the Communist Party of China (CPC) Central Committee said at a meeting on Thursday.

It has been proved that the CPC’s major judgment, policy decision and strategy adjustment on COVID-19 are completely correct, said the meeting, which was presided over by Xi Jinping, general secretary of the CPC Central Committee.

“The measures are effective. The people recognize them. And the achievement is huge,” it said.

‘A miracle’

China has kept optimizing and adjusting its COVID-19 prevention and control measures since November 2022, with the focus on protecting people’s health and preventing severe cases.

In a major shift in its response policies, the country started to manage COVID-19 with measures designed for combating Class B infectious diseases, instead of Class A infectious diseases since January 8, 2023.

It was noted at Thursday’s meeting that China has realized a stable transition in its epidemic prevention and control stages in a relatively short period of time.

With more than 200 million people having received medical treatment and nearly 800,000 seriously ill patients effectively cured since November, China has kept its COVID-19 death rates among the lowest in the world.

“We have achieved a major and decisive victory in terms of epidemic prevention and control, creating a miracle in the history of human civilization in which a country with a huge population successfully emerges from a pandemic,” said the meeting.

A new phase

As China’s COVID-19 response enters a new phase, the country has been speeding up efforts to consolidate what has been achieved over the years in fighting the COVID-19 pandemic.

It is important to strengthen epidemic monitoring capacity and improve regular early warning systems by establishing a sound surveillance and reporting mechanism, the meeting of the CPC leadership pointed out.

It also called for efforts to make a scientific plan for next-stage vaccinations, in particular to increase the vaccination rates of the elderly.

In face of the evolving COVID-19 strains, China has also stepped up the nation-wide promotion of booster shots. According to an updated action plan released by the State Council joint COVID-19 prevention and control mechanism, nine combinations of booster vaccines developed in different technical routes, including vaccines providing good cross immunity against the Omicron strain, are now available.

Thursday’s meeting also underscored efforts to guarantee the production and supply of medical supplies, and improve their coordinated deployment mechanism.

Efforts should also be made to advance scientific and technological breakthroughs in the health sector in a coordinated manner, and improve the level of life and health science and technology, the meeting concluded.

Why Finance Companies Should Prioritize Identity Verification

Banks and fintech companies have come a long way in recent years, with technology emerging as a game-changer. It enables them to streamline internal operations and deliver top-notch services to their customers. But cybercrime, online fraud, and identity thefts are the areas they struggle with. Finance companies need to go the extra mile to address these risks. Fortunately, they can rely on identity verification practices to ensure the safety of the organization and its customers. Let us explain why finance companies should prioritize it as a part of their operations.

Preventing identity theft

Identity theft is rampant, with countless people reporting such incidents every year. It is also one of the most daunting concerns for banks and financial institutions. Online fraudsters often access personal information through various scams and tricks and use it for fraudulent financial gain. For example, they steal credit information and misuse these credentials. Fortunately, finance businesses can rely on real-time identity verification solutions to verify customer documents and analyze previous records from the databases.

Ensuring coverage against fraud risks

Banks, B2C fintech, credit unions, credit card companies, insurance firms, and accounting businesses deal in money. It makes them vulnerable to fraud. Cybercriminals can find loopholes and vulnerabilities in the technology and commit financial fraud with a few clicks. Data breaches and financial losses are the worst threats financial companies encounter. However, ID verification can keep hackers and malicious actors out of the systems and safeguard businesses from fraud risks.

Facilitating regulatory compliance

Money laundering and tax evasion are more common than ever, and unscrupulous people use financial platforms for such activities. Law authorities enforce compliance guidelines for finance businesses to check these fraudulent activities. Banks and financial services firms must comply with AML (Anti Money Laundering) and KYC (Know Your Customers) to stay on the right side of the law. The good thing is that they can leverage online identity verification solutions to ensure compliance without a lot of work. It protects them from penalties and legal hassles in the long run.

Enhancing customer experience

The financial sector is competitive, and businesses struggle to stay ahead in the race. Customer experience is the main differentiator. Financial institutions can leverage digital ID verification to verify consumer identities during onboarding. The process is smooth for banks and seamless for customers as they need not share excessive data. Moreover, verification during onboarding is quick, with step-up methods used only when necessary.

Improving reputation and credibility

The reputation and credibility of a business are crucial in a competitive landscape. Implementing identity verification can boost business reputation as customers are surer about the safety of their confidential data with a proper verification process in place. Trust leads to strong and lasting relationships with customers in the long run. It also drives recommendations and referrals, as people are far more likely to refer businesses they feel confident about.

Nothing matters more than customer trust in financial institutions because it is the core of their business. However, upholding the faith is easier said than done in the era of cyber threats and online fraud. But the situation is not as daunting as it appears. Banks and financial institutions can rely on robust ID verification to prevent malicious fraudsters from accessing their systems.

The Necessity of Cybersecurity Training for Employees

In today’s digital age, the threat of cyber-attacks is at an all-time high. As a result, it’s become increasingly crucial for businesses to implement robust cybersecurity measures to protect their sensitive information and assets.

However, more than simply having technology in place is required. A significant factor in maintaining a solid defence against cyber-attacks is educating employees about best practices for staying safe online. Research has shown that employee behaviour is often the most vulnerable link in an organization’s cybersecurity chain.

Cybersecurity Threats and Their Impact

In the first six months of 2022, phishing attacks skyrocketed dramatically, with 11,395 incidents being reported and causing a whopping $12.3 million in losses to businesses worldwide. This near 50% increase significantly highlights the threat of financial ruin and lasting reputational damage.

Types of Cybersecurity Threats

Cybersecurity threats are malicious actions that damage, disrupt, or illegally access computer systems, networks, or devices. Some common types of cybersecurity threats include:

Malware: malicious software that infects a device or network and can be leveraged to steal data or cause damage.

Phishing: a social engineering attack where an attacker tries to trick a user into providing sensitive information, for instance, passwords or credit card numbers.

Denial of Service (DoS) attacks: an attack that floods a network or website with traffic to make it unavailable to users.

Ransomware: a variation of malware that encrypts a user’s files and then asks for payment in exchange for the decryption key.

Insider Threats: employees or contractors with access to sensitive information and misuse it for personal gain or to cause harm to the organization.

Vital Elements of Cybersecurity Training for Employees

These fundamental elements will give you an idea of how to train your employees when it comes to cybersecurity:

Password Management

Passwords are the first line of defence when someone attempts to gain unauthorized access to systems and data. Cybersecurity training should include best practices for password creation, such as using strong, unique passwords and not reusing passwords across different accounts. Employees should also be taught never to share passwords with anyone and to change them regularly.

Email Security

Email is a well-known vector for cyber-attacks, such as phishing and malware. Employees should be trained to identify suspicious emails. They must refrain from clicking on links or opening attachments from unknown sources and report any suspicious activity to the IT department.

Safe Browsing Practices

Safe browsing practices include avoiding unsafe websites and clicking on pop-ups and banners that could lead to malware and other cyber-attacks. Employees should be taught only to visit reputable websites and never to download or install software or plugins without approval from the IT department.

Data Protection

Data protection includes keeping sensitive and confidential information secure. Employees should be trained on handling data, including encryption and other security measures to safeguard sensitive data, and properly dispose of it when it is no longer needed. Using trusted Virtual Private Network (VPN) providers can also help protect employees’ online activity. Thus, it is essential that a VPN for PC is active on employees’ computers. Traffic encryption can also assist greatly when people work remotely.

Social Engineering Awareness

Social engineering uses psychological manipulation to trick people into disclosing sensitive information or perpetrating actions that may compromise security. Employees should be trained to recognize social engineering tactics, such as phishing emails and phone calls, and not disclose sensitive information to unauthorized parties.

Best Practices for Cybersecurity Training

Best practices for cybersecurity training are:

Creating a Cybersecurity Policy

An effective cybersecurity policy is essential for any organization looking to safeguard its data and assets from cyber threats. It should provide a comprehensive approach that covers the measures needed to protect against such threats, how employees can help keep these systems secure, and what consequences may be faced if protocols are not followed correctly.

Continuous Training and Updates

As cyber threats become increasingly sophisticated, employees must stay informed and ready. Organizations must take the initiative by providing continuous training on emerging risks and enacting clear protocols should a breach occur. Employees can nurture their cybersecurity know-how with online courses, in-person sessions, or simulated attacks.

Conducting Simulated Attacks

Organizations can use penetration testing or pen tests to identify vulnerabilities in their security systems and test how employees would respond to real-world cyber threats.

Understanding Business Travel Expenditure

By Kevin Harrison, Managing Director, Good Travel Management

Two-thirds of employees admit they haven’t read their company’s expense policy. It’s often for several reasons like not knowing where the correct information is stored, knowing there is a policy but not checking if it’s been updated or assuming certain things are covered, when in fact, they are not.

Even if travellers find a great flight or hotel deal, they might still get in trouble for being out of policy if their companies require them to book through an official booking tool or with a designated airline or hotel.

To combat such issues, it’s important businesses clearly communicate expense policies in several ways….

Best practices for managing business travel expenses.

Firstly, and most importantly ensure policies are widely accessible in company-wide HR documentation and saved in an obvious place on the company server or intranet.

Organising team or department expense meetings or sending company-wide emails as reminders during peak travel months are good ways to ensure everyone stays updated.

A clear expense process ensures that employees are logging expenses in a timely manner, providing you with more accurate visibility. Expense forms, spreadsheets, and dedicated expense management software are all helpful options for employee expense claims. 

Travel expense management software often provides all-in-one multiple dashboards, making it easy to track spending for various departments, locations, projects, or specific employees.

How to calculate business travel expenses

Analysing previous spending and setting up projections will help you get a good idea of what your average spend will look like, when it comes to calculating potential travel budgets.

Examine your travel expenses from previous years too, to set up projections for a longer period. You’ll need to include additional factors that could increase or decrease spend like new employees joining the business, seasonality, or recurring expenses.

Categorising business travel expenses is also important, and you’ll need to set up foundational categories like air travel, ground travel, meals, accommodation, and miscellaneous. Retaining these groups will make it easier to predict your budget and find opportunities for cost control.

Again, this is where software or using a Travel Management Company can be useful, as many can run reports on amenities like hotels, to help you understand average hotel rates or lodging costs associated with certain locations for projects.

How to reduce travel costs

Peak seasons, particularly during the summer months and winter holidays, can increase your travel costs by 50 percent depending upon your destinations. Business locations may be quiet but travelling in general at a peak, so planning, well enough in advance is essential to managing transport and accommodation expenses.

Negotiating rates and making use of reward schemes where possible is also key. You can negotiate corporate rates with both chains and more boutique options, especially if your company frequently stays at these places and again a Travel Management Company will take the lead on this if you use one.

If you use a travel booking platform with an integrated expense policy, then be sure to work with one that has got the widest content and can cover more complex travel that may not be possible to book online.

Be warned, using generic, digital comparison sites is not always the best route. While the offerings online may appear cheaper, this does not mean better. There are often hidden extras, and your company may end up using unsafe or unrecommended travel vendors.

We recommend a blend of both on and offline bookings to ensure employees travel safely and cost-effectively and integrate all the costs into your expenses systems.

Most airlines, hotels, and car rental companies also offer reward schemes. So, make sure your company is collecting points and employees are using them when enough are collected.

Remember you might also be entitled to recover VAT on business-related accommodation, meals, conferences etc through their VAT return.

Global Investors and Traders Growing Appetite for Chinese Futures – Gaining Access Via QFI

OP Investment Management (“OPIM”), one of Asia’s leading hedge fund platforms, RCM China Consulting (“RCMCC”), and GROW Investment Group (“GROW”), a leading China-focused institutional advisor, have jointly announced that they have entered a tri-party strategic joint venture. The purpose of the joint venture is to provide a one-stop China alternative investment solution. Recently, GROW’s localized product design offering has been added to OPIM’s and RCMCC’s joint platform to bring established PRC onshore strategies directly to institutional investors via managed accounts and direct market access.

The three firms have established investment and compliance infrastructure to deliver cross-border opportunities for offshore investors, to meet the demand for actively managed strategies for the Chinese mainland markets. The demand has increased significantly due to investor optimism for a rebound in the Chinese markets and appetite for actively managed strategies.

Alvin Fan, CEO of OPIM commented “With over 30 years’ experience in Greater China, OPIM is taking our award-winning structuring and incubation expertise to help build the most robust and scalable solutions through Hong Kong. It’s more than just a license. It’s about navigating the evolving regulatory space that comes with market liberalization. With the right ingredients and partners, professional investors can drive uncorrelated returns out of previously untouched markets, such as the commodities futures. PRC regulators recently released 41 new derivative products allowed to be traded by offshore investors via the Qualified Foreign Investor (QFI) license.”

“William’s (William Ma) track record of identifying alpha drivers and more importantly his bespoke approach to institutional due diligence speaks for itself. More importantly, these resonate with OPIM’s values and standards.”

William Ma, CIO of GROW, added, “With over 20 years of on-the-ground investment experience in the domestic China market over the cycles, we called the bottom months ago in early Nov 2022 with the “billion-dollar tweet” on the China market. Investors who partnered with us are well prepared to position themselves for the coming run. While the markets have rebounded 50%, we see entry opportunities still for actively managed strategies ranging from Convertible Bond strategies to Commodities Futures. Together with OPIM and RCMCC, we plan to build FoF/MoM product that will tap into the track record of well-established onshore managers who’ve fared well over this last bear cycle.”

Matthew Bradbard, Head of RCM China Consulting stated, “We’ve been working with onshore investors and Western strategies since 2018. We’ve identified talented managers both in onshore and offshore markets. Our trader network and investors are thrilled to get access, but we need to ensure scalability throughout the ecosystem. By this, I mean a strategy’s edge can be capacity constraint by markets but certainly not by structure.”

RCM China Consulting is led by Matthew Bradbard, with over 20 years of experience in the financial markets primarily in the exchanged traded futures space. Bradbard and his RCMCC team have developed an expertise on the Chinese markets through a subsidiary consulting & technology entity incorporated in Mainland China. The team has consulted with investors and traders about China access via WFOE, QFI and TRS programs. To date, nearly 1B RMB of Mainland capital has been invested by Chinese Capital partners, that utilize market signals and data analysis procured by RCMCC. Execution is also handled by RCMCC with their proprietary OMS that has been written to 4 Mainland China Independent software vendors thus far. Bradbard is confident that RCMCC and his team are facing extraordinary growth opportunities.

Can You Get Life Insurance in Asia if You Have a Mental Illness?

According to the latest studies conducted by the NCBI, the general population in Asia shows a presence of 14.2% for Common Mental Disorders. The worldwide prevalence of mental disorders showed an average of 13.4% having a mental illness can be challenging but can also make life insurance coverage more complicated. Depending on your diagnosis, you may be eligible for specific life insurance policies or find yourself unable to get any.

What is life insurance?

Life insurance is a financial tool designed to provide security and cover the financial costs associated with an untimely death. Whether you’re looking to support your family in the event of your death or want some extra peace of mind knowing that your family will be taken care of at the end, life insurance can help ensure those goals are achieved. With different options for different needs and budgets, life insurance can give you the coverage you need for those unexpected occurrences.

By investing in life insurance now, you can ensure your loved ones are prepared and secure regardless of what happens down the road.

What is classified as a mental illness?

Mental illness is often misunderstood and can be a complex subject to talk about. It encompasses various conditions that affect an individual’s behaviour, emotions, thoughts, and overall mental well-being. Common mental health disorders include depression, anxiety, panic disorder, bipolar disorder, PTSD, schizophrenia, OCD, and eating disorders.

Mental illnesses are severe medical conditions that require appropriate diagnosis and treatment by mental health professionals such as psychiatrists or psychologists. It is important to remember that those with mental illness are not alone; many resources are available to assist in recovery and lead a mentally healthy life.

Things to consider before getting life insurance if you have a mental illness

Here are some things to consider when applying for life insurance while living with a mental health condition.

Understand your diagnosis

Before attempting to apply for life insurance, take some time to understand your diagnosis and the severity of your condition. This will help you determine the type of policy best suited for you and ensure that you can get an accurate quote from providers.

When filling out a life insurance application, including all the information regarding your mental illness. Providers need this information to properly evaluate your risk and provide you with an accurate quote. Lying on an application can lead to the rejection of a policy or even fraud charges.

Do some research

Researching different types of policies is essential when attempting to get life insurance while living with a mental health condition. Many providers offer special coverage specifically designed for people with pre-existing conditions like mental illness, so finding one that meets your needs may be more accessible. If you have had suicidal thoughts you may want to check if life insurance covers suicide.

Consider term policies

Term life insurance policies are typically more affordable than whole-life policies and are generally easier to obtain if you have a mental health condition. It’s essential to keep in mind, however, that these policies only last for a certain period and may not be the best option if you plan on having coverage for a more extended period. It’s imperative the you get the best long term care insurance for your unique needs.

Work with an independent broker

An independent broker can be an excellent resource for life insurance while living with a mental illness. They can help compare quotes from different providers and determine which company will most likely accept your application.

Some life insurance providers have more flexible criteria when offering coverage to people with pre-existing conditions. Be sure to research and find one willing to work with you based on your circumstances.

Get a medical exam

For a life insurance provider to evaluate your risk and provide an accurate quote, they may require you to undergo a medical examination. Be sure to ask about this upfront so that you’re prepared when the time comes.

Consider joint policies or group plans

Joint policies can be beneficial if you live with someone who also needs coverage but has no pre-existing conditions like mental illness. This can help reduce costs since each person will only pay half the premium instead of the total amount.

Group life insurance plans may be another excellent option for those with a mental illness. Employers typically offer these plans, so check with your employer or any professional associations you may belong to about what types of group plans they offer.

Consider disability coverage or no-exam policies

Disability insurance can help provide income replacement if you cannot work due to an illness, including a mental health condition. This type of policy is usually more affordable than traditional life insurance and can provide financial security if you cannot work due to your condition.

No-exam policies are becoming increasingly popular and may offer an excellent option for those with a mental illness who don’t want or cannot undergo a medical exam. Be sure to ask your provider if this is an available option.

With that said

Finding life insurance when you have a mental illness may seem daunting, but there are several steps you can take to get the best coverage possible at an affordable rate. Consider looking into term policies, speaking to an independent broker, getting a medical exam, exploring joint policies, and asking about riders.

Additionally, consider accelerated death benefits, no-exam policies, discounts on premiums, group plans, and disability coverage. By taking the time to research your options thoroughly and finding the best policy for you, you can be assured that you will be covered no matter what life throws your way.

What are the Popular Payment Methods in eCommerce?

eCommerce is the order of the day and is transforming how businesses sell their products and services. A crucial element of successful eCommerce operations is allowing customers convenient payment methods that match their needs and preferences. With so many different options available, it can be challenging for retailers to know their customers’ most popular payment solution.

In this article, we will explore various payment technologies that enterprises should consider when setting up an online store and discuss each method’s advantages and disadvantages.

What are the various payment options?

The most common payment methods available in eCommerce are debit/credit cards, online wallets, digital banking, and cryptocurrencies. While debit/credit card processing is the most popular choice for those shopping online, other solutions can bring more convenience to your customers.

Debit/credit cards: Debit/credit cards are one of the most popular payment solutions for online shoppers, and it offers customers a secure and convenient way to pay online. Moreover, debit/credit card processing is highly secure as it relies on the latest security protocols and encryption technologies to protect customer data from fraudsters.

Online wallets: Another convenient payment solution for eCommerce transactions is using online wallets. This payment solution is particularly popular with customers who do not have debit/credit cards or are unsure of the security offered by debit/credit card processing. Online wallet services such as PayPal and Apple Pay require customers to register for an account before using them to pay for goods and services.

Digital banking: Digital banking is becoming increasingly popular for those looking to pay for goods and services online. This payment method allows customers to directly debit their account directly when making a purchase, eliminating the need to enter debit/credit card information each time they shop.

Cryptocurrencies: Cryptos such as Bitcoin and Ethereum are another payment option that is becoming increasingly popular in the eCommerce space. These digital currencies offer an alternative to debit/credit cards and online wallets, allowing customers to make payments without disclosing their credit card information.

What is debit card processing?

Debit card processing is a payment method that enables customers to debit directly from their bank account when making an online purchase. This payment solution is becoming increasingly popular as it reduces the need for customers to manually enter debit/credit card information each time they shop, thus providing them with
greater convenience.

When using debit card processing, customers must first register with the payment processor to link their bank account to the service. Once this is done, customers can start making payments via the service instantly and securely.

Advantages of debit card processing for eCommerce

Debit card processing offers several advantages to customers who shop online. Firstly, the payment method is quick and easy to use. Customers can enter their debit/credit card information once and won’t have to do it again when making future purchases. It eliminates the need for customers to enter their credit card details each time they shop manually.

Moreover, debit card processing is highly secure as it relies on the latest security protocols and encryption technologies to protect customer data from fraudsters. Finally, the payment method is cost-effective for merchants as there are usually no transaction fees when customers use debit/credit cards to pay for goods and services online.

Disadvantages of debit card processing for eCommerce

Debit card processing may only be suitable for some eCommerce businesses. Firstly, the payment method is only available to customers with a bank account and debit/credit card. It means that customers need these financial instruments to use this payment solution.

Moreover, some eCommerce merchants may find setting up a debit/credit card processing system too high, as they may have to pay a fee to the payment gateway. Finally, the security of debit/credit card processing can also be an issue, as there is always a risk that fraudsters could steal customer data.

Other payment methods to consider for eCommerce

Apart from debit/credit card processing, there are other popular payment solutions that eCommerce businesses can consider. These include online wallets, digital banking, and cryptocurrencies such as Bitcoin and Ethereum. Each payment method has its pros and cons, so it is essential to take the time to weigh all the options before deciding on a payment solution.

Online wallets such as PayPal and Skrill offer customers a secure and convenient way to pay for goods and services online. At the same time, digital banking solutions allow customers to use their bank accounts when making payments. Cryptocurrencies may also be an option for those who want to make anonymous payments or take advantage of the low transaction fees that come with using these digital currencies.

Tips for selecting a payment solution for eCommerce

When selecting a payment solution for your eCommerce business, it’s essential to consider the needs of your customers as well as the features and costs associated with each option. Make sure to thoroughly research all available payment solutions before making a decision, and remember to consider any additional fees the payment gateway may charge.

It’s a good idea to keep track of customer feedback and reviews when choosing a payment solution, as this can help gauge how satisfied customers are with their experience using the service. Finally, test out any new payment solutions before launching them on your eCommerce store, as this will ensure that everything is running smoothly when customers start making payments.

ADDX Lists Global Macro Hedge Fund Asia Genesis by Top Veteran Trader

Private market exchange ADDX has listed a global macro hedge fund by Chua Soon Hock, the Chief Investment Officer and fund manager behind the famed Japan Macro Fund (“JMF”).

In 2009, JMF was one of Singapore’s largest macro hedge funds, with approximately US$800 million in assets under management (AUM), having grown 100 times from an AUM of about US$8 million in 2000. The BarclayHedge-rated, top-performing hedge fund chalked up an annualised net return of 18.7% over the ten-year period of its operations between 2000 and 2009. Mr Chua took a break after 2009 and was managing his own money, before launching Asia Genesis Macro Fund (“Asia Genesis”) in May 2020.

Now listed on ADDX, Asia Genesis is an Asia-focused, global macro hedge fund that seeks to achieve investors’ twin goals of capital preservation and positive annual compounding. Net return for 2022 was +15.3% on a Sharpe Ratio of 1.2. The fund aims for consistent, positive and uncorrelated returns with low downside volatility, across bull, bear and range markets. The “all-weather” fund engages in discretionary, nimble tactical trading. Between 60% and 70% of the fund’s trading is in the stock indices of Japan, Hong Kong, China, India, and the US. The remaining exposures are in interest rates and major currencies.

The fund trades exclusively in highly liquid exchange-listed futures and options. This allows the open-end fund to offer investors a monthly redemption option, with no lock-in periods. Using blockchain and smart contract technology, ADDX was able to reduce the minimum subscription size from US$1 million to US$20,000 for its investors.

Mr Chua Soon Hock, the Founder and Chief Investment Officer of Asia Genesis Asset Management, has 39 years of experience in trading and fund management. Before founding JMF in 2000, he was the Chief Strategist and Head of Interest Rates and Arbitrage Trading at Sanwa Bank Singapore. He had also served as Managing Director at Koch Capital Asia. Earlier in his career as a trader, Mr Chua worked at Bankers Trust, Salomon Brothers, and the Monetary Authority of Singapore.

For a strong alignment with investors’ interests, Mr Chua and his family have jointly invested more than US$40 million of their personal wealth in the fund, which has an AUM of US$173 million.

Chua Soon Hock, Founder and CIO of Asia Genesis, said of his comeback: “Up until 2020, I noticed many of my close relatives and friends being adversely affected by risky financial products in a leveraged environment. I felt that I could use my expertise to help them do better, and offer a transparent, safer alternative with lower downside volatility and steady returns.  While many traders find the ideal risk-reward ratio for their trades to be approximately 3:1, we look at risk-reward ratio differently from our peers. We want to make money consistently, with less risk taken for every dollar of return earned. Our risk-reward ratio can be 1:1, and we seek to achieve a higher probability of winning for each trade by identifying good risk-reward trades. We put in many smaller-sized good risk-reward trades with strict risk controls while keeping our position size small; this way, we let the probability of good risk-reward over a large population of total trades work in our favor over time. This approach enables us to make profits most of the time with well-controlled downside volatility. Only occasionally will we make a bigger bet on a macro idea when the risk-reward is enormously in our favor and lopsided.”

He added: “2020 to 2030 will be unlike any of the past four decades from 1980 to 2020, when the bull markets were sustained and prolonged. We have likely entered a multi-year range market decade with more frequent bear phases. We are experiencing the effects of fundamental changes in the macroeconomic environment, and these are unprecedented times when compared to the past 40 years.  This new era is marked by rising uncertainty, geopolitical tensions, supply chain challenges, trade war, military build-up, as well as the cumulative effects of huge money supply trends leading to rising inflationary pressures and interest rates. The fund strategy is designed to be ‘all-weather’, to achieve investors’ twin goals of capital preservation and positive annual compounding, with low downside volatility and steady consistency regardless of market conditions. I hope to achieve the best risk-adjusted returns among global macro funds, just as I had done with my previous fund, the Japan Macro Fund. My understanding of market psychology and inflexion points in times of high uncertainty and more frequent flip-flopping between bull and bear phases should give us a strong edge.”

Oi-Yee Choo, CEO of ADDX, said: “As investors continue to face uncertainty in the financial markets, the value proposition of hedge funds has become more compelling. ‘All weather’ funds like Asia Genesis have a strategy designed to bring in uncorrelated returns across market cycles. Amid a broader reallocation towards alternatives by both institutions and mass affluent investors, technology is likely to be an important driver of growth for the hedge fund asset class in the coming years because it reduces the barriers to entry for investors. Individuals can now gain appropriately-sized hedge fund exposure for the very first time with a US$20,000 entry ticket, enhancing the diversification of their overall portfolios.”

She added: “Chua Soon Hock is a household name among Asian hedge fund managers. His track record speaks for itself: throughout a ten-year period ending 2009, his Japan Macro Fund – which, despite its name, had a broader Asian focus – was a top-ranked hedge fund which maintained consistent absolute returns with low downside volatility. Not surprisingly, investors who were pleased with their JMF returns are now excited that he has returned to trading and fund management, with a strategy similar to that of JMF. ADDX is the only digital exchange giving investors access to Asia Genesis, and we are doing so at a fraction of the usual minimum ticket size of US$1 million.”

Understanding the Different Types of Workers Compensation Coverage

Getting injured on the job can prevent you from doing what you were hired to do while costing you hundreds or thousands of dollars in medical expenses to recover. That’s why workers compensation was introduced in order to keep employees safe. By ensuring all employees are covered with workers compensation, companies can protect themselves legally while also making sure their workforce doesn’t need to worry financially in the event of injury.

What is Workers Compensation?

For those unfamiliar with the term, workers compensation insurance is a form of coverage required by every state, that offers medical and wage benefits to employees injured or who fell ill while on the job. The extent of these benefits will vary state-by-state. Any company or owner that refuses to purchase workers compensation insurance can face fines or imprisonment, along with being forced to pay out of pocket for any claims.

If an employee is injured during their work, they must report to a doctor right away for a medical assessment. With this report, which supports what is outlined on a worker’s compensation claim filed with the insurance agency, the injured employee can receive payment and return to work when ready.

How is Workers Compensation Different Than Personal Injury?

Workers compensation and personal injury claims are often used interchangeably, but they are different. The primary difference between workers compensation and personal injury is that the former is a form of insurance whereas a personal injury claim is a legal filing. Additionally, personal injury can occur anywhere, such as during a car accident on the way to the grocery store, whereas workers compensation only comes into play during an injury on the job.

On top of this, a person is required to prove the negligence of another party for a personal injury case. This means they must prove:

  • The other party had a duty of care against other parties
  • There was a breach of that duty of care
  • The breach led to an accident or injury
  • Damage was sustained as a result of the event

With a worker’s compensation claim, negligence does not need to be proved, and there is no court filing involved whatsoever. It’s worth noting that filing a worker’s compensation claim means you relinquish your right to sue your employer.

However, a party may be able to file both a personal injury claim and worker’s compensation claim if the injury occurred on the job and was also the result of extreme negligence on behalf the employer. Eligibility to file both is a case-by-case basis, so consult a personal injury lawyer if you believe your workplace accident may also qualify for a personal injury claim.

The Different Types of Workers Compensation

Given that benefits from workers compensation are a form of insurance, there are a number of different types employers provide for employees:

Medical Care Benefits

The most common form of workers compensation comes in the form of medical care benefits. All medical treatment that is reasonably required to cure or relieve the effects of an injury obtained in the workplace will be covered under this type of workers compensation. An injured employee must submit for a treatment request but may receive a denial notice for some treatments if it is deemed unnecessary for the healing process.

Examples of medical care items that may be covered under workers compensation include: hospitalization, physician services, x-rays, laboratory services, and more.

Temporary Disability Benefits

When a workplace accident temporarily prevents a worker from returning to their pre-injury job or another job with the same employer, they are qualified for can receive compensation in the form of temporarily disability benefits. In most cases, once they are healed, a worker will return to work and temporary disability benefits will end.

Permanent Disability Benefits

On the other hand, a workplace accident which is so severe that the former employee must live with a permanent disability that stops them from returning to work is eligible for this form of benefits. This form of workers compensation also has a subset known as partial permanent disability benefits which are paid when a worker has permanent disabilities, but those disabilities do not completely stop their ability to work.

Supplemental Job Displacement Benefits

Supplemental job displacement benefits are a unique subset of workers compensation insurance. This is a non-transferable voucher that can be used by an injured employee to pay for educational retraining or skill building that can help them get another job after the accident. This voucher can be used at state-accredited schools, which are typically listed by the workers compensation insurance agency.

Death Benefits

Finally, workers compensation insurance plans will include death benefits for employees who die on the job. This includes up to $10,000 towards burial expenses, along with compensation ranging from $250,000-$320,000 depending on the number of dependents left behind by the employee. In most cases, death benefits will continue until the youngest minor’s 18th birthday comes to pass, with disabled minors eligible to receive benefits for life.

The best part about workers compensation is that employees don’t need to do anything in order to qualify for the compensation besides work for the company and be injured on the job.

In recent years, there was a 9% increase in preventable work related deaths, along with 4.3 million medically consulted injuries. Getting hurt on the job can happen in any industry, but those working in construction, agriculture, and manufacturing are at the highest risk. Ensure your workplace has workers compensation and contact a lawyer if you are uncovered.

Receive compensation for your workplace situation Getting hurt on the job is a frustrating situation, but it doesn’t have to drain your savings account. Every workplace should have some form of workers compensation that applies to qualified employees so that you stay covered on the job. However, if your workplace doesn’t have coverage or you believe a more serious lawsuit is required, don’t hesitate to reach out to a certified lawyer as soon as possible.

6 Ways an ATS Can Help Your Business Grow in 2023

Hiring is a costly affair—it costs about $4,000 to hire an employee on average.

However, if you know your way around streamlining the hiring process and bringing in the right tools at the right time, you can save significantly on the cost. A significant part of that involves tracking candidates in each stage of their recruitment—job posting, screening, interviews, background checks, selection, and onboarding.

This is where an ATS comes into play. An Applicant Tracking System (ATS) helps a business address hiring challenges, save time in the process and hire the best candidates.

What is an ATS?

An ATS is a tool used by HR professionals and recruiters for tracking candidates during a hiring process and filtering and managing candidates’ data as per requirement. These tools are usually AI-backed for automating multiple hiring processes in one go, such as scheduling interviews and sending out communication to candidates.

Using an ATS, recruiters can:

  • Filter particular parameters and source the right candidate from their database
  • Organize candidates’ data systematically in their database
  • Track a candidate’s records at every stage of the hiring
  • Automate some redundant tasks such as onboarding emails, interview emails, resume formatting, etc

How an ATS can help your business

Here are six ways an ATS can take your business to the next level and streamline your hiring process.

1. You build a talent pool for your organization

Hiring is not only costly but time-consuming too—from sourcing candidates to onboarding the selecting candidates, it can be exhausting for hiring managers to conduct the whole process seamlessly. That’s where an ATS helps you build your own talent pool of candidates, from where you can simply pick candidates based on the required skill set as and when required.

This data comes from your past recruitment drives, which include candidates you didn’t end up hiring (who were a close call) and those who weren’t available to join at that moment. By building the database of eligible candidates, you’re essentially saving yourself the time to source candidates every time a new requirement comes up and saving up on costs.

To build a talent pool for your company, consider multiple touchpoints, including:

  • Your previous recruitment drives
  • Data from your referral drives
  • Your current employees looking for changing departments or a promotion
  • Passive candidates who weren’t looking for a job change earlier when you were hiring, but are a great fit
  • Candidates you see could be a great fit for your organization 

2. An ATS helps you process cover letters seamlessly

Since we’re talking about how an ATS helps you save time, a significant function to mention here would be applicant screening. With an ATS, you can skip the whole process of going through resumes and cover letters one by one and finding the best fit, and automate it all.

You can simply put in your company’s requirements as to what you’re looking for in an ideal cover letter, so you don’t have to spend hours finding suitable candidates for a role.

To save more time and ensure you only get the best candidates applying for the role, you can even put out guidelines and some cover letter examples for job seekers along with the job description. This will help the candidates understand your requirement beforehand and follow guidelines to ensure their cover letter doesn’t get screened out by your ATS.

3. An ATS helps you conduct inclusive hiring

Often, when hiring candidates, hiring managers and recruiters tend to indulge in bias (intentionally and unintentionally). This is not only unfair to the candidates but also against recruitment compliance laws set by many countries and associations (Example: EEOC by the US).

To ensure you’re abiding by the laws and conducting a fair hiring process, you need to consider the following factors:

How you’re screening applications—is it done manually, or are you automating it?

How bias-free your job descriptions are—are you using gender-biased language or mentioning an inappropriate (example: a job post written in a racist voice) requirement?What kind of questions you’re asking in your interviews—are these questions too personal or inappropriate?How your company culture is—is your team trained to be bias-free in the vicinity?

Automating hiring processes using an ATS eliminates the scope of biasing during the process and conducts fair and square recruitment. You can automate processes, including:

  • Screening and reformatting of candidates’ resumes
  • Sending out communication and updates about the hiring
  • Sorting candidates based on their skill set, interest, experience, etc

4. Hiring managers can spend their time on strategizing and other important areas

The average time to hire for hiring the perfect candidates can get as long as 49 days. The lack of an efficient process can further delay the process, depriving hiring managers of participating in other important responsibilities.

ATS will free up their time and speed up the hiring process significantly. This way, hiring managers can devote their time to selecting the best candidate for the role and pivoting their hiring strategy based on the response they get.

They can invest their time in other important areas, including:

  • Coming up with a better approach to assess candidates’ skills (example: skill assessment test) to shortlist them in the early hiring stages and know if they’re fit for the role
  • Ensuring all your hiring processes are bias-free and fair
  • Coming up with smart interview processes to assess your candidates in the best way possible
  • Analysing data and reports generated by the ATS to understand what they’re doing right and what needs improvement
  • Offering better recruiting and onboarding experience to the candidates to ensure they accept your job offer and stay with you for the long run5.
  • ATS allows you to offer better candidate experience
  • The way you make your candidates feel during a hiring process stays with them for a very long time and plays an important role in impacting their future decisions. Fast-tracking the hiring process will smoothen each step, making it more convenient for the candidates to undergo each stage.

This involves getting prompt updates within a day or two about an interview they gave or getting informed about each stage or process in advance, leaving no scope for confusion.

Moreover, it makes it easy for the candidates to apply, go through each hiring stage, and make an informed decision about joining the organization.

6. It provides you with a comprehensive analysis of hiring metrics

The best part about using an ATS is it lets you keep track of all the crucial data about hiring and make informed decisions. These are the decisions that can impact your business revenue and success.

Ideally, ATS gives you access to hiring metrics such as:

  • Time to hire
  • Quality of candidates you hire
  • Cost per hire
  • Source of hire
  • The time it took for a candidate to accept an offer
  • Attrition rate
  • By measuring these metrics, you can analyse how they compare with previous data and work toward improving them to get better hiring results.

Accelerate your hiring proces with ATS

Hiring the perfect candidates takes a lot of effort on the recruiter’s part.

First, there’s always going to be another company that’s competing with your offer. Second, it all depends on the candidate’s final decision of whether or not they want to join hands with you. It all boils down to having a streamlined recruitment process, and an ATS takes care of everything very efficiently.

Not only do you fast-track the whole process, but you also offer an excellent candidate experience that helps you retain them for the long run.

Nulogy’s Software Moves into the Fast Lane with Co-Packing of Automotive Spare Parts for CEVA Logistics in Australia

Nulogy’s relationship with CEVA Logistics is continuing to forge ahead after its flexible cloud-based software was chosen as the new platform for the co-packing of automotive spare parts at its Melbourne facility in Australia.

Nulogy‘s industry-leading contract packing software is replacing the existing solution in order to meet the growing requirements for the handling of automotive parts. By digitalising operations at the site, Nulogy will drive enhanced visibility and real-time production monitoring, as well as improve materials and inventory management for the business and its customers. 

Nulogy has successfully supported the implementation of its solution at several CEVA co-pack sites around the globe, including in the Netherlands, Poland, France, Turkey, and the United Kingdom. This new implementation in Australia expands the use of Nulogy from FMCG sector clients to the automotive sector.

Bart Beeks, Global Contract Logistics Leader at CEVA Logistics, said: “At CEVA Logistics, our focus is on providing our customers with a complete, agile, and efficient warehousing solution. This includes providing state-of-the-art contract packing services and our strengthened partnership with Nulogy will allow us to further digitalise our operations worldwide, especially in growth markets.”

Josephine Coombe, Managing Director, Europe, Nulogy, said: “As trusted partners in providing digitalisation across CEVA Logistics’ global co-packing network, we’re delighted to see the adoption of Nulogy in Australia.

“Innovators like CEVA Logistics recognise the powerful benefits that digitalisation brings to their co-packing businesses, enabling faster, higher quality and responsive service to customer needs whatever the products.

“As automotive customers demand collaborative and responsive partners across their supply chains, our customers enjoy significant competitive advantage in the market because of the customer service, quality and traceability benefits Nulogy delivers.” 

About Nulogy

Nulogy, a leading supplier of digital supply chain solutions, enables consumer brands and their supplier communities to collaborate on a multi-enterprise platform to deliver with excellence to an ever-changing consumer market. The Nulogy Multi-Enterprise Supply Chain Business Network Platform optimises contract manufacturing and co-packing operations, while empowering consumer brands and their external suppliers to accelerate network responsiveness and collaborate at the speed of today’s market.

Visit Nulogy online at

The Benefits and Drawbacks of Disbursement Funding for Business Start ups

A disbursement is a process of paying money, mainly from a dedicated or public fund. Disbursement Funding is the payment given to a client, leading to cash outflows. Disbursement is used in dedicated or public funds like NGOs and measures an organization’s cash outflow.

Disbursement is a payment done to an organisation in cash equivalents, or cash in bookkeeping, over a certain period. The disbursement entry features the amount credited, payment method, and payment purpose.

Disbursements are records of the amount of money flowing from a company, which differs from loss or profit. Managers use ledgers to know how much they have disbursed and also track it. Below we discuss the benefits and drawbacks of disbursement funding for business startups.

Research has shown that over 80% of new businesses do not survive five years after opening due to limited opportunities and stiff competition. While this might be demotivating, there is a solution if you wish to grow your business.

Most enterprises fail because they do not acknowledge growth opportunities, meaning they take action when it is too late. The proper funding can secure small-sized businesses and enable them to reach their goals.

Benefits of using a Disbursement Funding

The main benefits of disbursement funding include the following;

Cash Flow Alternative

Cash flow is among the essential aspects when operating a business, and most companies fail if they cannot access it. Most business owners do not know how this funding can help them proceed with operations when having cash flow issues, which leads to a shutdown.

Disbursement funding eliminates the dependence on cash flow sources while easily managing your daily expenses. Remember, solicitors, are appointed to manage expense payments, which is the best way to settle charges.

Ease of Usage

The most popular disbursement funding companies have a transparent and simple mechanism that enables SMEs to give additional working capital. These loans have provided tailored solutions to small-scale businesses which dream of reaching greater heights.

More Time

One of the leading benefits of disbursement funding is it has extended timelines. Here, payments can be held until settlement, a period that extends to twenty months. This is the main feature that differentiates it from a bank loan.

With this option, business owners can focus on their operations and worry less concerning payments.

Drawbacks of Disbursement Funding

The drawbacks of disbursement funding include the following;

It is Hard to Get

The main challenge of getting disbursement funding is approved. People with already established businesses stand higher chances of getting these funds than starters. Recently, a substantial financial crunch has made the approval process more complex.

Only enterprises that seem likely to repay receive these funds, and the high scrutiny makes it hard for start ups to get them.

High-Interest Rate

Another drawback of disbursement funding is it has a high-interest rate. Lenders make money by including high interest in their loans, which can be challenging for your startup. Almost all businesses experience a low-revenue phase with time, and these interests can hurt all-sized enterprises in such times.

Less Money to Put into Your Business

Most startup loans feature a repayment obligation, meaning you will remain with few funds, as most go to the bank. This might even hinder you from expanding your business or employing new staff, thus leading to business closure.

Types of Disbursement

The main types of disbursement funding include the following;

Controlled Disbursement

This cash flow is made available by various financial institutions to their customers. The controlled disbursement enables banks to reschedule and review allocations daily, allowing them to maximize the interest. This happens because they delay the exact time the funds are debited from an account.

Delayed Disbursement

Delayed or remote disbursement is when the payment process is dragged out deliberately by paying using checks acquired from banks in local regions. Remember, banks would process payments only after receiving the original check, and debit would be delayed by up to five days in the payer’s account.

Final Thoughts

Disbursement funding enables businesses to get immediate funds for the money they need. This is an excellent option for people who have trouble with funding approval, and the above article has discussed all you need to know about it.

Hiring ReactJS Developers: The Best Practices For Strengthening Your Programming Team

React is the foundation of many cutting-edge applications and user interfaces, making it a highly pursued front-end framework. Different firms are considering how to utilise it best to create dynamic, high-performing mobile applications. This is where you have to learn how to hire React developer.

One of the key reasons you should hire a React developer is that React is one of the most popular frameworks for JavaScript, the most well-known computer language in the world.

A React developer, like anyone who works with JavaScript, probably spends much time online and mingles with code for websites. However, there is typically greater complexity in the details of web development. 

In the article, you’ll learn what a React developer can achieve for your company and the pricing and abilities required to hire ReactJS developers.

Who Are React Developers

One must be familiar with React to comprehend a React developer’s role. While Facebook was responsible for the first release of React, the open-source framework is now maintained by a dedicated group of programmers.

Although many people think about React as a framework, this is probably not the case. Such confusion is so common that calling React a framework is no longer frowned upon by the software development community at large.

React, on the other hand, is a JavaScript library for creating UIs and UI components. Smaller parts of user interfaces can be displayed using components built with JavaScript and HTML.

Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) also come into play so React developers can design the aesthetic features of a page, such as typefaces and color selections.

Professional programmers who specialize in user interface design and development using React. Developers who work with React are, by definition, also familiar with the front end and JavaScript.

The Roles and Responsibilities of React Developers

Front-end JavaScript developers, like those working on React, are in charge of building and maintaining user interfaces for websites and web applications. “Front-end development” refers to the part of software creation wherein the user interface is shaped.

Moreover, front-end developers are responsible for the more technical aspects of user interfaces, such as buttons, scroll bars, text boxes, and so on. This requires the React developer to have experience integrating functionality into user interfaces.

Other critical responsibilities include:

Building dynamic web pages with responsive, interactive elements like menu buttons, online forms, gesture-driven activities, and more.

Testing and troubleshooting the interface software is important before releasing the program,

Participating in the app creation process with the customer to learn how to realise their vision in code best.

Working closely with the server’s developers and engineers, you provide expert advice to ensure smooth user-server interactions.

Skills Of React Developers

The three leading technologies for front-end development are JavaScript, HTML, and CSS, as previously mentioned.

Although HTML and CSS aren’t technically programming languages, front-end developers must be fluent in their syntax to create polished user interfaces.

Your website or web application will be built almost entirely with JavaScript. To back up their claims of React expertise, any developer worth their salt should have solid experience with JavaScript.

Knowledge of the Document Object Model (DOM) and the most recent version of ECMAScript, an upgraded version of JavaScript that supports many useful features, is essential for this background in JavaScript.

Despite being based on JavaScript, React has its own ecosystem, complete with libraries for data structures and popular workflows such as Redux and Flux. These instruments should be familiar to React programmers as well. Just knowing JavaScript as a developer is not enough. Developers working with the React library should be experts in it.

Finding The Right Developer- Where to Look For That

It is useless to know how to hire React programmer if you don’t know where to find them. There are numerous places to look for programmers of any type. Let’s explore the options:

Job Boards

You have probably used job boards before to find possible employees. Job boards like Indeed allow you to post a complete job description and allow interested candidates to apply directly from the board.

Remember that most job-seekers you encounter on job boards are looking for full-time positions with benefits and expecting to be paid accordingly.

Freelance Markets

Suppose you don’t require a React developer to dedicate themselves fully to your project. In that case, freelance marketplaces are an excellent place to look for one. Independent React developers offer clients their services on websites like Upwork and Fiverr.

If you provide the skills and experience you’re looking for in a candidate, you’ll get a long list of profiles to peruse. The only exception is that, as independent contractors, these developers should be given some leeway regarding how they organize their time.

They can work on numerous projects at once, and that’s their right. In this way, you can avoid the costs and commitments of hiring an employee full-time.

Outsourcing Companies

Having all of your software development needs met by a third party is possible when you work with an outsourcing firm. As a result, you won’t need to know where to look for React JS developers for hire.

The basic idea is to pay a fee, explain your needs to an agency, and receive the desired results. Since most outsourcing firms are based in countries other than the United States, their services come at a reasonable cost.

The downside to this ease of access is the increased likelihood of encountering communication problems, whether those problems stem from a language barrier or a lack of clarity on the user’s actual needs.

Tools That Can be Used to Hire React Developers

A variety of tools can aid many of the activities outlined above.

Screening Tools

The proficiency of your developers can be evaluated with those instruments (usually hard skills only). Devskiller and Codility are two of the most well-known platforms.

Recruitment Tools

Applicant Tracking Systems are a common feature of customer relationship management tools for human resources professionals (ATSes). SmartRecruiters and Recruitee are two examples of popular software in this category.

Sourcing Tools

They make it easier to quickly discover qualified new hires in several ways, such as providing access to a larger pool of potential candidates. You can try out other apps like LinkedIn’s Recruiter Life, Amazing Hiring, or Intelligence Search. 

Tips and Tricks To Hire React Developer

Read The Reviews and Ratings of the Developer

One of the best practices you can do to hire React JS developer is to go through their rating and reviews. You can understand what you can expect from a candidate by reading reviews of their past clients and ratings and analysing their portfolio.

Write A Powerful Job Description

If you want to hire ReactJS engineers who are qualified for your company, you first need to post a clear and appealing job description. When advertising positions online, be sure to include the following details. You can use these to set yourself out from the crowd while applying for jobs online.

A detailed React.JS developer job description can help you hire top talent. Your job description should include clear job responsibilities, a brief company description, important skills, required experience level, and hands-on experience. You must identify all significant job functions candidates will perform when joining your firm.

Conduct Detailed Interviews

When conducting an interview, you should thoroughly cross-check the ReactJS developer’s skills. To do this, you can conduct tests of their project management, communication, experience managing teams, and other relevant abilities. You’ll be able to evaluate the candidates more thoroughly and get a more comprehensive picture of their qualifications, which will aid you in selecting the best person for the job.


ReactJS is a well-known JavaScript framework for developing responsive web UIs. If you need assistance with designing and developing user-facing components for websites and applications, consider learning how to hire React developer.

Data Privacy Regulations: How They Will Change the Online Business Landscape in 2023

Back in 2016, The EU adopted the General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR), which gives complete control to users over their personal data and how a company uses it. The GDPR came into play in early 2018, and most companies were enforced to comply with it by providing consumers with the opt-out ability, such as gathering data, etc.

Soon after, many other data privacy regulations increased in popularity and required companies to comply with their data privacy laws right after.

However, have you ever thought about how data privacy laws will affect your online business in 2023? It’s quite a tough question to answer from time to time, but by following the right steps, you’ll be able to clarify everything you need to know.

Let’s dive deeper into this article to find out more!

How are data privacy laws changing regulations in 2023?

The GDPR has greatly influenced other data privacy law regulators, such as the CPRA and many other states across the United States. As of January 1st, 2023, the Virginia Consumer Data Protection Act (VCDPA), many new law regulations will come into play regarding these acts. Additionally, from July 1st, 2023, these regulations will be set by the Colorado Privacy Act (ColoPA).

One of the key components of these new regulations is the requirement for data discovery definition. This means that companies will need to clearly understand what personal data they collect, where it is stored, and how it is used. This will be crucial in ensuring compliance with these laws and protecting individuals’ privacy.

Firstly, let’s talk about the CPRA. It buys/sells/and shares information with over 100,000 consumers and receives more than 50% of revenue from the personal information sold. As of January 1st, 2023, the CPRA will increase individual and opt-out rights, limit personal data retention and protect employees’ and business contacts’ personal data on a higher level.

Secondly, we have the Colorado Privacy Act (CPA), which explicitly targets Colorado residents and processes personal data of hundreds of thousands of data. Those who violate the CPA regulations will face fines up to $2,000 which can add up all the way to half a million dollars!

Thirdly, there’s the Virginia Consumer Data Protection Act (VCDPA). Similarly, it processes the personal information of more than 100,000 residents and 25,000 of them are Virginia residents. All of them derive more than 50% of personal information sales. All users who violate these laws will usually pay a fine of up to $7,500 plus attorney fees included.

New privacy regulations that come into effect on January 1st, 2023 will include assessing the adequacy of the vendor’s security and privacy to welcome the return or deletion of data once the contract has ended. One way for online businesses to ensure compliance with these regulations and protect their customers’ personal data is by using contract management software. This type of software can automate the process of assessing vendor security and privacy, as well as facilitate the return or deletion of data once a contract has ended. It is important for online businesses to understand and comply with these regulations to avoid penalties and protect their customers’ personal data. Utilizing contract management software can help ensure compliance and protect sensitive information.


A new act that has been introduced is the SHIELD act. It encourages data protection and is completely against online breaches. Following in those footsteps, many individual states throughout the USA will continue to expand data privacy laws.

New regulations for the PIPL China is one country to get new privacy policy regulations from the Asian region. Like other privacy regulators like the CPRA and GDPR, the new Personal Information Protection Law (PIPL) sets higher restrictions for personal data collection. The law asks organizations to state a clear reason businesses need to use and handle personal data.

Getting ready for data privacy

Above all, your organization should assess what type of data privacy laws they should apply to your business and develop a plan. After that, the organization should look at the kind of data it collects and start creating it and how it’ll manage it.

Overall, organizations should create a process of alerting individuals on how their company uses and stores data, obtaining the appropriate methods of opting it out. If you aren’t sure about setting up a data privacy law for 2023, you can always ask data advisors or a counsel that can provide you with the governance plan and data management framework you need.

New contractual obligations under the US privacy law

It’s never a surprise to have a separate contract for separate jurisdictions. For instance, when you’re aiming to conduct targeted ads, you’re targeting nationwide customers instead of a state-to-state approach.

Updating your privacy requirements and data security will be a must for 2023 because you’ll need an excellent approach to navigate these differences and compliance requirements.

Getting the right contractual privity is challenging but not all impossible. For instance, the CPRA requires you to have a contract whenever you send data to a third party and to describe the nature of the sale/share information.

Furthermore, to stay updated, always hire a data privacy specialist to inform you of the latest contractual obligations. If you lack the necessary time to deal with the latest updates, there’s always someone who can!

The summary of what will change in 2023

Data privacy laws are only getting more strict over the years and requiring you to stay compliant. It’s always best to stay updated or hire someone specializing in this part to reduce time consumption and avoid hefty fines.

At the end of the day, it’s never a good idea to engage in data manipulation and always inform customers about the type of data you are trying to collect. Better to stay compliant with data privacy regulators than to pay hefty fines. Group sees surge in mainland China travel bookings boosted by Lunar New Year demand Group, the leading global travel service provider, has seen mainland Chinese demand for travel continue to surge in the run-up to the Lunar New Year holiday season. This comes after the decision last month by mainland China to officially abolish all quarantine restrictions for inbound visitors from 8 January.

Since the announcement on 26 December 2022, Group has subsequently seen a huge increase in searches and the volume of travel bookings.

Flight bookings and destination search trends

On Group’s leading Chinese language travel service platform Ctrip, between 26 December 2022 and 5 January 2023, search interest for outbound flights from mainland China increased by 83% compared to the two-week period prior, with outbound flight bookings increasing by 59% over the same period.

Bookings show the most popular cross-border destinations include: MacauHong KongTaiwanThailandAustraliaSingaporethe United StatesMalaysia, the United Kingdom, and Indonesia.

Lunar New Year Trends

With millions set to be on the move during the Lunar New Year holiday in China, also known as Spring Festival, which takes place from 21 – 27 January 2023 and the first major holiday following the liberalisation of border policies, outbound bookings for trips have grown significantly.

Analysis of Ctrip data shows overseas travel for the seven-day Lunar New Year holiday surged by 540% compared to last year’s Spring Festival; and the average cost of bookings was revealed to have risen by 32% year-on-year.

Ctrip data also shows airline bookings from mainland China to Hong Kong increased by 18 times compared with the previous year, following the announcement to ease restrictions. The number of airline bookings to Hong Kong has also increased by 36% month-on-month. Similarly, the search popularity of Hong Kong on the platform was more than double that and increased by 85% month-on-month.

Taking a deeper look, the top ten most popular domestic destinations for the Spring festival are ShanghaiBeijing, Sanya, GuangzhouChengduShenzhen, Kunming, HangzhouChongqing and Haikou.

Southeast Asia Shines as Top Outbound Destination

As of January 12, 2023, in the run-up to the Lunar New Year holiday, overall travel bookings of mainland Chinese tourists to Southeast Asian countries increased by 1026% compared with the same period last year. The number of air ticket bookings from mainland China to Southeast Asia increased by 864% year-on-year, and the top 5 most popular destination countries for mainland Chinese tourists traveling to Southeast Asia during the Lunar New Year holiday are: ThailandSingaporeMalaysiaCambodia, and Indonesia.

According to Ctrip’s data, from December 27 to January 11Thailand stands out as a top destination for Chinese tourists during the Spring Festival holiday on the platform. During the same period, inbound travel bookings from Thailand to mainland China increased by 101% year-on-year.

In addition to this, as of January 12, the number of mainland tourists traveling to Singapore for the Lunar New Year holiday increased by 499% year-on-year, Malaysia saw an increase of 584% year-on-year, with Cambodia and Indonesia each increasing by more than 10 times year-on-year.

A Welcoming Return for Chinese Tourists

With the adjustment of mainland China’s entry and exit policy, the cross-border travel market is also picking up with embassies and tourism boards across the world targeting Chinese tourists aiming to attract them back to visit their countries.

One example is The Tourism Authority of Thailand (TAT) who launched a campaign called ‘CHINA IS BACK’, to welcome the return of Chinese tourists. They expect more than 300,000 Chinese tourists to visit Thailand in the first three months of 2023 alone. Group’s first livestream broadcast targeting the outbound mainland Chinese audience recorded sales of more than 20,000 room nights amounting to a Gross Merchandise Value of over RMB 40 million (THB 197 million). The livestream session was supported by the Tourism Authority of Thailand (TAT), which has been collaborating closely with Group over the years. TAT Governor, Mr Yuthasak Supasorn, joined the broadcast and interacted with viewers.

Hosted by Group Vice President Sun Tianxu and presenter Xiao Yu, the livestream session featured almost 60 products, including attractions tickets and staycation packages at hotels across Thailand such as The Peninsula Bangkok, Capella Bangkok, InterContinental Pattaya Resort, and Banyan Tree Krabi.

EV Innovation: China vs The Rest of the World

As the electric vehicle market grows across the globe, we must look at countries that are finding the best course of action going forward. With organisations such as the International Energy Agency calling for the ban of all new petrol and diesel cars by 2035 to meet climate change demands, we must find the best methods for supporting this transition.

China is a leading country in the EV market, buying 50%, one in every two, of all EVs sold in 2021. Whether you are a car or battery pack manufacturer or electronic innovator, the lessons learnt from China’s EV market and infrastructure can help lead us to a cleaner future. Here we will explore exactly why they are excelling in this area, and how other countries can replicate their methods to achieve a more sustainable future.

China’s EV market

China’s strength in developing EVs comes from multiple factors, including the passion of its president for the progression of cleaner energy. President Xi Jinping has claimed that China will reach peak carbon dioxide emissions by 2030, with the country being carbon neutral by 2060. Having a government with strong decarbonisation goals is crucial for developing clean energy innovation, action, and commitment. And this commitment to the development of EVs isn’t a recent phenomenon for China, with Chinese leaders considering this since the 1990s. BloombergNEF predicts that while EVs only made up 3% of the whole of China’s passenger fleet in 2021, it is expected to reach 77% by 2040.

The Chinese government has also invested a lot of time, money, and energy into strengthening the infrastructure. By building charging networks throughout the country, it’s supporting a strong EV market through accessible plug-in ports. China has 1.15 million charging points publicly available, making up approximately 65% of all global stations. And 41% (470,0000) of these are fast-charging stations, compared to the 19,934 fast points in the UK and the 6,000 fast-charging stations in the US. These points aren’t solely in the big cities either, with charging ports also appearing in small villages, including those close to the Ming Tombs.

This infrastructure also includes a roadmap called “Ubiquitous Power Internet of Things”, which encourages EV drivers to charge their cars when the power companies need it. This reduces overproduced renewable power being wasted, improving power consumption efficiency across the country. 

How to rest of the world must compete

The strength of EV schemes comes from a supported infrastructure being in place. EV sales that surpass a strong infrastructure will make it more difficult to manage and, potentially, fail. Making sure publicly accessible charging points are frequent and functional is key to the strength and development of EV market growth. Just as the Chinese government has done, we must also encourage the accessibility of charging ports outside of urban areas, opting to create a network that spans even the most rural areas.

The main success of China’s EV market is the dedication the government has to it. Implementing the same ambition towards climate change in other countries could see the scaling up of progression that the IEA is looking for. Dedicated schemes and roadmaps for success are necessary for the development of any plan, including a change to renewable power.

What Is Usability Testing And When To Implement It

No matter how effectively you’ve built your website, app, or software, issues can arise over time. It’s up to you to spot these problems and rectify them quickly. Otherwise, your users won’t be very happy!

Did you know that users will find 85% of usability issues if they test continuously? This statistic alone is compelling enough to show why usability testing is critical. If you don’t test your website or application, issues will continue to happen, disappointing customers and disrupting potential conversions.

With that being said, below, we’ll take a further look at usability testing and when you should implement it.

What is usability testing?

A usability test involves testing your product with real people to discover whether it works as you intend it to. You’ll get the person to carry out a number of tasks, and you’ll make a note of their interactions. The aim is to understand if your design is intuitive and usable enough for users to achieve their goals.

Different types of usability testing

There’s no universal usability test. In fact, there are many types of usability testing, including:

In-person OR remote tests

You may need to carry out an in-person test for physical products, yet remote tests usually suffice for e-commerce websites and software.

Unmoderated OR moderated tests

The only difference between both tests is whether there is a moderator/facilitator.

Quantitative OR qualitative tests Quantitative research focuses on statistics and numbers to answer the following:




Qualitative research uses meaning and words to uncover the ‘why.’

When should you carry out a usability test?

Now you know what a usability test is and the different options available, you must figure out when to perform these tests. Rather than carrying out usability tests on a periodic basis, it makes more sense to conduct these tests at certain stages throughout a project. This includes the following:

During situations where there is low certainty and high risk

If there is any uncertainty in the design process, organizing a usability test is a great way of getting the answers you need.

There are many different ways uncertainty can manifest itself amongst your team or during a project. For example, an executive may have made a request that seems absurd to the team and has no chance of being effective. Alternatively, there may be disagreements amongst project members, which can cause uncertainty. These are just two examples of many.

Rather than wasting your time and energy going back and forward, it’s best to rely on high-quality data and analysis to make your decision. So, base your next steps on user research. This can help you to make more intelligent and informed decisions so the cloud of uncertainty disappears.

When you need to assess and iterate User research for a project is generally split into two categories; generative research and evaluative research.

Generative research helps you in defining product ideas and issues potential customers face. You do this at the very beginning of a projects

Evaluative research gives you feedback on how something is performing, such as your prototype. It’s beneficial if you want to find out more about a current product that you must redesign. After you’ve created a prototype or wireframe, and you’ve made some design decisions, you’ve moved into the evaluative phase.

At this stage, it makes sense to carry out behavioural research and user testing to get feedback on your design. The benefit here is you can make changes before you move on to a later part of the product process, which can save you an awful amount of time and money.

Before making design decisions

If you carry out a usability test before you make any design decisions, it gives you the ability to determine the most vital user pain points. Sadly, though, this is where a lot of designers skip user testing. Big mistake!

When you observe how a user behaves, you can discover latent needs they may not articulate during surveys or interviews.

If you’re embarking on a re-design project, this process can be as straightforward as simply viewing how someone interacts with the current version of your software or website.

However, if you’ve not yet created your own product, you’ll need to assess how someone interacts with the competition.

After you have launched your product

Not only do you need to perform usability testing before you make any design decisions and during the prototyping phase, but you need to continue carrying out these tests once your product has been launched.

After all, there’s an argument to say a design is never really ‘finished.’

You can always enhance something. You can also make it better for the end user. This is why the best businesses don’t simply create something, forget about it, and move on to the next. Instead, they continue to perform usability tests so they can continue to wow their customers and do better.

You can’t afford to slack when it comes to usability

So there you have it: everything you need to know about usability testing and when to perform it. Usability testing is an efficient and effective approach to unearthing issues so you can rectify them quickly and successfully, ensuring your business doesn’t suffer.

Don’t forget; it’s not a one-time thing! Usability tests need to be carried out on a regular basis to ensure your business stands out from the competition.

Choosing A Software Platform For Digital-Only Bank

According to a study by Global Market Insights, the global digital banking market size is forecasted to exceed $140 billion by 2025. What’s driving this growth? Most of it can be attributed to technological advancement in the software itself as it becomes easier for people to open accounts and manage their finances online.

Additionally, banks are offering more features to entice customers—low or no fees, attractive interest rates on deposits and loans, cash rewards programs, financial advice, and other benefits that have helped drive up customer demand for digital banking services.

In the last decade, digital interfaces started to be the main channel of communication between banks and customers, forcing some of the institutions to close physical branches. Thanks to technology adoption, in the last decade we witnessed the rise of digital-only banks (or neobanks). These are institutions designed to be run entirely online, meaning that customers don’t have to worry about going into a physical branch. Instead, they can manage their finances with just a few clicks using mobile phones. Neobanks often provide additional services and benefits such as budgeting tools, investment options, automated saving plans, and more that make managing your money simpler and faster than ever. By harnessing these innovative technologies, neobanks are revolutionising the way in which people bank in the digital age.

On the other side, such revolutionary changes provide lots of opportunities to start-ups entering the financial technology space. There are thousands of FinTech products launched every year across the world and most of them are being built on top of legacy banking systems that simply don’t fit next-generation banking products. Below are the key features to keep in mind when choosing a digital banking software platform for your neobank project.

  • Security: The software must not only come with the security essentials required by regulators but stay ahead and provide cutting-edge solutions utilising biometrics and AI.
  • Flexibility: It should be customisable to meet your specific needs, and easy to use so you can go live with new features and offerings as quickly as possible.
  • Ease of Integration: It should easily integrate with existing systems and prospect partners on the go.
  • Reporting and Analytics: The software should not only provide basic financial reports but also advanced behavioural analytics to improve customer retention and conversion metrics.
  • Scalability: It should be able to grow with your business, handling increasing volumes of transactions without slowing down.

Make sure to consider these features when evaluating different digital banking software options.

So, as you can see from the above when choosing a digital banking software platform for your business it is better to focus on high-level architecture and overall capabilities. Going down to very specific functions would only make sense if the criteria above have been met, otherwise you will likely put your business in dependence on a software platform that can’t provide long-term sustainability. Running a digital banking business will always mean for you constant improvements of the tech, including new features, partner API integrations and adoption of new regulatory requirements. Therefore, having a strong software platform architecture and a tech team is a key success factor.

5 Tips for Maximizing the Business Value of Your Software

Correctly using technology has been shown to reduce costs by up to 30% and increase productivity.

However, many businesses miss the mark by not using the application solutions to their full potential. This leads to wastage of resources and overcrowding of applications.

Getting the most use out of the software applications should be your first priority as it directly impacts your performance and management.

We’ve come up with some tips for maximizing the business value of your software. Read on to know more.

5 Tips for maximizing the Business Value of your software

The use of apps in business operations is not even in question anymore. Have you tapped into the digital potential? 59% fear it might be too late.

There are many reasons you’re not using software to its full potential. You mightn’t be aware of how to use it optimally or you mightn’t have trained your staff well enough. It mightn’t be the best fit for your needs.

Optimize your software by starting from the ground up. Take account of current needs and match it with your future plans to get a broader perspective.

Here are some tips to maximize the business use of your software for optimal performance:

Deploy an asset management tool

One of the most hassle-free ways to maximize your software usage is to deploy an asset management tool. Software asset management (SAM) is a recognized business practice that deals with managing and optimizing software usage in business operations.

It might seem counterintuitive adding another tool to your roster when you’re already struggling to juggle existing ones. But an asset management tool is not just an extra tool, rather one that supervises the operations of others.

It takes care of everything, from purchase, deployment, usage, maintenance, and disposal of your software solutions. You don’t have to micromanage your applications to see if they’re being fully utilized once you put your management tool to work.

Different tools offer different benefits depending on the nature, size, and scale of your business. Here is a comparison of software asset management tools to help you choose the best one.

Key benefits:

  • A greater understanding for your day-to-day operations
  • Identify software that are underutilized, overutilized, or obsolete Control spending with budget management and tracking
  • Maintain a neat record to be audit-ready and maintain license compliance
  • Get ahead of trends regarding usage and requirements

Choose the correct software

More often than not, entrepreneurs make the mistake of choosing the wrong solution for a task. It ends up yielding less than ideal results along with overspending and general confusion. You need to choose the most suitable software for the task at hand to gain the maximum usage out of it.

For example, you might need a software solution for managing HR in your firm. However, you choose a software that only takes care of salary payments of your employees and not much else. It only takes care of an element of HR and not in its entirety.

The ideal solution would be to either completely do away it and choose a fully rounded HR one. Or keep the tool and add supporting software to pick up the slack.

Choosing the correct tools for the task at hand tremendously improves the efficiency and productivity of your operations.

Educate yourself

The digital revolution we’re experiencing today is rapidly changing the way things are done. Not everyone is tech-savvy or up-to-date with the latest technological trends. This leads to poor choices.

Have a basic understanding of the technical aspects related to your industry to make the right calls in choosing one. While you can always enlist the help of professionals, you yourself need to have the basic concepts clear.

This will help you better understand features and choose smartly instead of simply acting on what the consultant says. When you have the basic concepts clear, you’ll be able to pick the tool that truly serves you.

Train your employees

Too often, you have the perfect software but your team wasn’t properly onboarded. This results in the underutilization or misuse of the software, yielding negative results.

Employee training plays a crucial role in business’ growth and success. Companies that invest in employee training enjoy a 24% higher profit margin. The training and development should include the correct way to use the software.

We talked about the rapid digital growth around us and the challenges entrepreneurs face in keeping up with them. The same applies to your employees as well. You need to empower them by providing regular training.

It helps them use the software correctly and get the most usage out of it. It also ensures that all your software is being used at optimal capacity and no wastage is occurring. Remember, the usage of software often changes with the arrival of new technology.

Integrations and updates

Some software needs integration with third-party platforms in order to perform to their full potential.

To get the maximum value out of your software, check its integration requirements. They need to be compatible with your existing system to be able to perform their function. If they’re not compatible or able to integrate, they’re not suitable.

In such a case, look for a different tool. Similarly, you need to update your software regularly for it to be able to perform at its full potential.

A software update improves the overall efficiency of the software while removing minor bugs to keep the system running smoothly. It also adds new features and removes obsolete ones to give the application a new look.

Plan to get the most out of software solutions

Software solutions and applications play a pivotal role in the functioning of modern-day businesses. It becomes crucial to make sure you’re getting the most out of the software solutions you deploy for efficiency and growth.

How to Celebrate the Chinese & Lunar New Year at Work

On 22nd January Chinese New Year will arrive, and this year it is the year of the rabbit. It’s good to be aware that some of your colleagues may celebrate this as it might be an important time of year for them. Just because you don’t traditionally celebrate the Chinese New Year, it doesn’t mean that you can’t start. It’s something that can be socially good for a workforce whilst also being inclusive to people from different cultures and backgrounds.

What is Chinese New Year?

This history of the Chinese new year stems back over 3500 years and originated within the Shang Dynasty. Chinese New Year is a 15-day festival celebration also known as The Spring Festival or (春节). The meaning of the celebration revolves around celebrating all things positive and wishing peace, health, longevity and luck for the new year. It focuses on starting fresh for the year and removing anything negative.

Our expert from Wildgoose, Jonny Edser has shared eight tips on how to celebrate the Chinese & Lunar new year at work.

1. Say your blessings

Blessings are a crucial part of Chinese New Year celebrations and are the best way to get your office involved. It might be worth taking some language lessons to help practise your Lunar greetings. 

2. Play a trivia game

Playing trivia games with your team is a great way to celebrate the Lunar New Year for 2023. Culture-themed games and team building activities improve inclusion within the office, and will boost the morale of your colleagues who celebrate the spring festival. 

3. Cultural learning

Acknowledging a variety of religious and cultural holidays is an important step towards building (and promoting) greater diversity and inclusion in the workplace. The Lunar and Chinese New Year is one of the best times of the year to educate your team on culture. One of the most effective ways of bringing teams together is understanding what makes us different and appreciating those differences. 

4. Decorate your office or virtual workplace

Red lantern decorations are very traditional for Chinese New Year celebrations and are a great way of breathing some culture into your office or virtual workspace. Again, it’s key that your team understands the significance of the “why”, rather than the “what” so let us help here! Red lanterns are traditionally used as a symbol that drives away back luck. 

5. The gift of flowers and Kumquat trees

The meaning behind the gift of blooming flowers is: “A prosperous new year”. The gift of kumquat trees means “Good luck and wealth”. This is one of the most popular gifts when celebrating the Lunar new year and is a great way to immerse your team into the culture. 

Flowers tend to symbolise spring and the start of a fresh and prosperous new year. Some of the most popular flowers used are:

  • Plum blossom: Represents courage, endurance, reliability, perseverance, and hope.
  • Chrysanthemum: Represents luck, wealth, and longevity.
  • Peonies: Are associated with peace, wealth, prosperity, and honour.
  • Orchids: Bring good fortune and are one of the most popular gifts for the Lunar New Year.
  • Peach Blossoms: Represents longevity and the blossom represents growth.

6. Share out red envelopes

One of the most popular and highly sought-after ideas for Lunar New Year celebrations is sharing out red envelopes. The use of red envelopes with money put inside is a widely used celebration idea usually among family, friends, and colleagues. The colour red is associated with luck and brings happiness and good fortune.

7. Take part in a traditional office spring clean

This might not seem like a very obvious celebration idea but spring cleaning is a very traditional activity that leads up to the Lunar New Year. The spring cleaning will usually take place on the 28th of the last month of the year. The spring clean before the start of the Chinese New Year symbolises driving away bad luck before the start of the new year. 

8. Organise a traditional lucky lunch

Organising an office lunch is the perfect way to bring your workforce together for a Chinese New Year celebration. A more traditional method would be organising a prosperity salad, also known as (Yusheng). For this, your office will need to toss a variety of ingredients into a large bowl, whilst wishing for good fortune and propriety.

Q1 2023

Happy 2023 and welcome to the Q1 issue of APAC Insider Magazine, your quarterly source for all of the latest news and updates from across the Asia Pacific region.

The last few months have been filled with opportunities for reflection, and our endeavours in 2023 will be strengthened by the successes in the time gone by. Contemplation of our many achievements, large or small, inspire growth and encourage us to build upon our already excellent foundation.

The base of each business is made stronger by an unwavering connection to clients, and with services that are ever evolving as time goes by. Here we explore a diverse collection of businesses which grow year upon year, so that we can experience better products and services.

From technological advancements to global travel service providers, consultancy firms to spectacular spirit distilleries, this issue has a varied selection of businesses all impacting their industries for the better. We can learn about efficient water and wastewater management, IoT, and AI platforms, and experience top quality litigation and digital marketing services, and much more!

We are pleased to present the businesses in this issue to you, and we look forward to welcoming you back for our Q2 issue in a few months’ time. Have a fantastic quarter ahead.

Rotating Shift Schedules – A Win-Win for Employers and Employees

Following the advent of COVID-19, 65% of employees prefer working from home. With the rise of remote and mobile workplace models, finding the ideal balance that’s suitable for firms might be challenging – because there are many factors to take into consideration when creating a scheduling calendar.

In such a scenario, remote woking schedules that are driven by rotating shifts are excellent. The framework enables businesses to maximize their employees’ personal time while maintaining their productivity and providing workers with the support they need.

Changing working hours give workers a chance to gain knowledge about various aspects of the company while assisting employers in achieving organizational targets.

In this article, we’ll cover the advantages of such a scheduling method for both companies and professionals.

The benefits of rotational shifts for both workers and organisations

Let’s start with how rotating shift schedules benefit employers. If you’re a manager leading a team, read on!

Composite training possibilities Each business experiences hectic and slow seasons. These times occasionally change over a few days — particularly when your firm operates in the customer service sector.

Inside a manufacturing plant, the same holds true. In this industry, shipments only can reach between 9 am and 5 pm. Hence, daytime shifts frequently have a higher volume of work than evening hours.

It implies that on some of the quieter and slower nights and weekends, your employees will get superior training. Your instructors will have more time to devote to imparting to workers the fundamental abilities required to carry out jobs properly.

People will be ready to handle the responsibilities when they transition to a fuller schedule. They’ll be prepared to discover more information as well. As a result, your staff will develop into a more versatile workforce.

Enhanced learning with smart Excel schedules

Rotating shifts give your staff more learning possibilities. They’re able to pick up new skills based on the hours they operate. Appropriate educational opportunities arise as a result of the various responsibilities employees handle during various shifts.

A smart way to give a boost to diverse learning opportunities is to initially understand how to make a schedule in Excel. Think of ways to swap tasks during different shifts in your Spreadsheet – so that each employee gets an option to learn something new in every rotation.

For instance, a worker who regularly works in the middle of the day will acquire new compliance or safety operating abilities when working the night shift. It’s advantageous for individuals to continue growing in their industry if they’re given the chance to acquire knowledge and abilities.

More diverse work

With the advent of the Great Resignation, keeping your employees away from monotony is critical. Rotating shifts provide your staff members with more diversity in their employment since they’re continually working on new projects. Usually, the activities employees complete while being on assignments vary – based on the hour of the days they operate.

For example, a civil engineer employed in the daytime may carry out different tasks than one employed during the evening. These variations, which might result from alterations in the surroundings or other circumstances, help give employees diversity to maintain their focus. Intense emphasis on a range of tasks also increases team effectiveness.

Extra perks to employees from your firm

With work that has rotating shifts, individuals end up receiving a few extra benefits based on the timetable they’re contemplating. Some firms arrange their work arrangements such that employees receive a little break each month.

Others might make sure they get a certain number of consecutive days free. For instance, if someone works two consecutive 8-hour shifts, they might get the following three days off. Alternating roles pay more as well.

Numerous employers who offer rotational or night hours pay their staff more hourly wages or compensation rates. Professionals get some excellent vacation time and increase their earnings if the shifts rotate.

Greater engagement at work

Utilising rotational shifts has the benefit of improving workplace engagement since training in new procedures motivates your staff to collaborate more. For instance, if one colleague has experience with shift-specific responsibilities but another doesn’t, the former may try to assist the latter.

As individuals are more proactively collaborating to accomplish goals, there may be a higher level of participation at work. And greater workplace involvement leads to maximizing the potential of your business in terms of performance and growth.

Let’s now explore the top five advantages of rotating shifts for you as a part of the company’s management.

Benefits of implementing a rotating shift schedule for employers

Equal distribution of workload and skills Spreading your top achievers across all schedule variants is an advantage of shift work that’s frequently neglected. Having somebody with specialised talents regularly shift into different schedules helps you avoid recruiting experts in the field you don’t require – as they can be in short supply for numerous tasks.

Additionally, service-based companies have the ability to guarantee a positive client experience at any moment during the day. The increased strain in peak traffic and the stress of lost sleep throughout graveyard hours can be divided by using a rotational shift.

It also permits employees to occasionally take the weekend away. Each person alternates between working their preferred shift and completing the hard hours. It encourages team unity among coworkers. Even senior employees partake in the loop, giving the whole thing an impression of fairness and inclusivity.

It fosters more team camaraderie and a deeper perception of your company when the complete unit is exposed to one another and all workplace circumstances.

More experienced employees

Due to the fact that employees operate at various times throughout the day, they’ll gain greater experience performing a variety of tasks. Rotating shifts makes sure everyone has the chance to attend important conferences and training events because many of them occur during daylight hours.

Shift changes are advantageous to employers since they keep your employees’ work interesting. They won’t be as prone to become complacent as their schedules plus employment experiences will be continuously shifting.

Strengthened morale and cooperation

There are frequently many shifts employed 24 hours a day in many businesses. Construction and engineering firms are typical applications.

The graveyard shifts are obviously the least preferred. One group of workers taking undesirable shifts might lead to division in the workplace. One that might cause shift hostility, poorer attitude, and decreased production.

Each worker takes a turn working a less appealing shift when there’s a rotating shift pattern, resulting in the inverse result. Employee happiness increases productivity. Consequently, it’ll be beneficial in the long term to develop a framework that raises enthusiasm and distributes your workforce’s suffering fairly.

Employees who work different shifts benefit from interacting with a wider variety of people, including clients, contractors, suppliers, coworkers, as well as other partners.

In certain rotational schedules, 8-hour intervals with extra days off are possible. Although they seem more difficult, they actually provide more freedom and extended periods of time off. Here, instances like law enforcement officers and medics are frequent.

Flexible work schedules for your staff

This is essential if your company has to keep changing seasonal and staffing concerns. Additionally, an unusual job gives workers plenty of time to connect with their acquaintances.  Many workers like the flexibility of a shift work plan considering they’re informed beforehand.

Eventually, productivity at work increases after your staff manages to adjust to such adjustments. You, as an employer, should consider what kind of rotational timetable will be most effective for the business.

Increased effectiveness

Your workers can manage all the shifts while still obtaining enough rest if they work rotating shifts. Shift-related manufacturing hiccups are also minimized, if not entirely removed. Additionally, if your company’s shifts are separated by 60 minutes, it’ll be easier to transition between them.

Additional advantages in terms of security and risk reduction come from shift work. A well-balanced regimen will result in fewer mistakes and accidents.

Additionally benefited are positions in the culinary and services sectors, since everyone may make more money then. Off-peak times can be used for training, which will help your personnel work more productively and effectively.

In fact, your corporation itself may profit from different shifts the most. Although having people work continuously has several advantages, having them work continuously has the most advantages in terms of satisfaction and keeping things in check — leading to enhanced efficiency as a whole.

With a few crucial factors in mind, move to a rotating shifts schedule successfully

The transition to changing shifts may be challenging for certain workers. Employ scheduling tools, give staff guidance on how they can effectively plan for different schedules, and make it possible for them to switch shifts by following established protocols.

Give workers advance notice of their calendars, and allow them to pick their desired schedule. If possible, try to accommodate these requests.

As a manager, you should create schedules that work for your business and its employees. Everyone will be capable of working on the weeks and at the hours they find most suitable for them in this way. Using rotating schedules serves as the finest approach for accomplishing this.

12 Management Tips to Grow Your Business in 2023


As we approach new year’s, new ideas are coming in and business owners are looking for new ways to grow their businesses in 2023. No matter your industry, business size, or others, implementing new ideas continuously is the ideal way to stand out from your competitors.

Growing a business wants time and you can’t do it overnight. It requires enough dedication and hard work. Especially with technology evolving so quickly, you need to keep up with trends more than ever.

Well, let’s not waste any more time because in this article, we will identify the top x tips you should follow for growing your business this upcoming year.

12 Tips to follow for growing your business this new year

Include a reward management system Everybody likes to be rewarded for their hard work and sometimes, it may seem impossible for some business owners to give their employees a pat on the back. A proper reward management system in your business will bring multiple benefits. Sadly, many business owners don’t even know what is reward management.

Statistics show that 90% of HR workers agree that reward programs and recognition help improve a business’s productivity. There are several benefits to incorporating a reward management system in your business and they are:

  • Attracts top talent Retains top talent
  • Contributes to employee wellbeing Increases employee productivity
  • Builds a solid reputation in your business
  • Encourage employee engagement
  • Employee engagement is the key to building better relationships in a business. If your employees aren’t happy at the workplace, they won’t fully engage with their daily tasks if they aren’t happy at the workplace.

Sadly, only 15% of employees are reported to be engaged at the workplace, meaning that the rest of the 85% of users aren’t engaged!

From your side, the best thing you can do as a manager is to motivate your employees to increase productivity. Moreover, you can consider investing in an employee engagement program since it’s an excellent way to grow your business. It costs nothing to tell your team they did a good job or to reward them for their hard work.

Hiring new talent can also be another great way of contributing to the business’s success. Populate your team with members that have passionate personalities and care about results.

Set your goals for 2023

A new year is coming, so you must prepare for a new version of yourself. Before you set goals for 2023, make sure to review your 2022 goals. What didn’t you achieve that you want to in 2023? Are you still on track with your current goals? What is the reason you are or aren’t? All of these questions should be answered in detail.

Always seek to review your goals regularly, or at least make sure you’re still on track. You may need to adjust as your business keeps on growing and changing. However, as long as you are focused on achieving your goals, that’s the most crucial part.

Encourage remarketing

Remarketing is another way of saying you have to use the customers you already have. Getting new customers is never a bad idea, but the way you can grow your business with existing ones is a whole different story.

Statistics show that around 65% of the average company’s revenue is made from existing customers and around 70% are more likely to purchase than new customers.

There are plenty of ways to remarket to your existing customers, including sending out promotional materials, letting people know about the new ways they can benefit from your product, integrating multiple remarketing campaigns and more.

Record detailed records

All businesses that taste how success feels have a set of detailed records. By doing this, you will know where your business stands and what kind of challenges it’s facing. Businesses will keep their records either physically or in the cloud. By continuously updating these records and backing them up, your business doesn’t need to worry about losing this data.

Physical records can be a great backup source if you lose your information in real life, so having them is never a bad idea.

Create a strategy for each of your department’s.

Your business is composed of many departments and you want to have a solid strategy for all of them, not only in marketing. Based on your previous goals, you can create a new plan for 2023. Create a business strategy for the following departments:

  • Finances
  • HR
  • Sales
  • Marketing
  • Business Development, and all other departments your business covers

All of these departments are connected, so you can develop strategies for connecting them to each other. It’s an excellent way to start.

Seek to improve your customer service

Your customers are the key to your success and if you don’t provide them with the right services, they will focus on your competitors. In this case, ensure you do what you can to give customers the best experiences they can have.

A suitable level of customer service includes asking customers the right questions, providing them with helpful insights and following up with them when they need them.

Create a buyer profile

When you understand your target audience, you prepare your strategies better. However, remember that your buyer personas allow you to understand your target audience better. Using a buyer persona will enable you to increase sales and better understand your information.

Afterwards, think about what your customer is thinking. You can create a survey and talk directly to your customers. From buyer personas and surveys, you can learn a lot about your customers, your product and service use, and the demographics. In fact, according to statistics, using buyer personas can help you increase your click through rates by 14%!

Provide the necessary training for your employees

Investing in your employees is the best factor you can have for business growth. Your staff can provide better services and contribute to the team when they are prepared and skilled.

Investing in employee training includes sending your team to conferences, workshops or providing the training on the spot. Additionally, to make it even easier for you, create your own employee training program to ensure your staff is at its peak level.

Stay up to date with trends

Yes, it’s all about the trends. If you want to succeed in business, you can’t risk losing what is trending. The latest trends ensure your product and service are up to date and valuable to the user. Additionally, you can use the latest trends as an advantage over your competitors.

Nowadays, the online world has made industry trends similar, but it’ll all depend on which region you live in. What’s trending in Australia might not be the same as what’s trending in North America, Asia, or other parts of the world.

There are different methods of how you can keep up with industry trends. Some of them are to read publications, follow influencers, social media leaders, and more.

Value your current clients

Your current clients are the ones who could turn into long-term customers. After all, it’s a much cheaper alternative to promote to your current clients than only focusing on getting new ones. Make your content scalable and this will keep valuable customers interested for a more extended period of time.

Great content sometimes isn’t enough to bring in new customers. Nowadays, it’s about who is consistent in creating high-quality content. Social media has made it easier for businesses to show their excellent work.

In short, scale your high-quality content if you want to promote new content to your team and get new clients.

Don’t forget about your competitors

Your competitors aren’t asleep, so you need to pay close attention to what they are doing, or else they might be one step ahead of you and you might not know it! The way you will analyse your competition will highly depend on the industry you are in. For example, it may be even more difficult to analyse your competitors if you are a company dealing with chemicals.

Also, keep in mind that each region has a different approach to competitors. For example, in Asia, you will have competitors in certain industries that will be harder for you to distinguish yourself from. In North America, you might need to stay ahead of competitors in the technological field and so on. Therefore, always pay close attention to which industry is the most popular in your region.

In short, you can consider hiring a specialist to deal with this part. If your time is limited, this is even more important. After all, you can’t know your competitor’s next move, but you can take action as soon as they do.

The reason 2023 will be a powerful year for you

2023 is going to bring many technological innovations and it’s now time to put all of these tips into practice. Scale your content to existing customers, analyse what your competitors are doing that may profit your business, create a reward program, recognize great work, and even consider having one-to-one time with your employees.

It’s never wrong to spend time with your employees and push them to be better, but leaving problems within your business unattended is wrong.

New Telematic Market Trends in APAC

It’s anticipated that the APAC telematics market will reach $63.79 billion by 2029, with a 31.9% CAGR during the forecasted period.

This is an industry that’s clearly set for a sustained period of growth, so it’s not difficult to see why many business owners and entrepreneurs have their sights set on this region and industry.

In light of that, we’re going to dig a little bit deeper and look at some of the newest tele market trends in APAC for 2023 and beyond.

APAC businesses will make huge maintenance savings by using fleet telematics

There is only one place to begin, and this is with the maintenance savings you’re set to make by switching to fleet telematics. This is something more and more businesses in the APAC region are going to make the most of.

A lot of fleet managers associate telematics with location tracking. However, solutions go way beyond this, and this is something more business owners are starting to realise.

Features such as fleet telematics maintenance task automation will automate maintenance workflows, ensuring routine maintenance is adhered to but also immediately addressing vehicle problems as and when they arise.

You don’t need us to tell you how much money you can lose when one of your fleets is out of operation due to unexpected maintenance issues. Nevertheless, this is something you won’t need to worry about anymore thanks to the advanced telematics available.

Passenger car safety will be a huge market segment for telematics

We can expect passenger car safety to be a huge segment for the telematics market in the region as we move into 2023.

There is an increasing interest in the use of telematics software to enhance convenience and safety across the board.

In countries such as Australia, India, China, and Japan, passenger vehicles are subject to much more stringent safety regulations, which have heightened demand for connectivity solutions.

Telematics will adapt to suit the self-driving phenomenon

One of the biggest trends in the world of automobiles is self-driving vehicles. We can expect to see a monumental rise in these vehicles in APAC over the next couple of years.

As a response to this trend, OEMs are incredibly delivering advanced telematics services within the passenger vehicle segment.

Asia-Pacific is considered a key region in terms of sensor fusion in autonomous applications. There are a number of contributing factors here:

  • A strong position in the worldwide semiconductor industry
  • Stringent government regulations
  • The increasing adoption of autonomous cars
  • All of these are expected to propel telematics growth in the passenger sector but also in the advancement of self-driving vehicles.

China is expected to hold a significant market share in the coming years

As a result of the stringent safety requirements and a high degree of regulatory scrutiny in China, we expect to see China become a major player in the telematics market.

In this part of APAC, the automatic industry is characterised by long product life cycles, extensive design-in timeframes, high reliability, functionally safe design architectures, zero-defect quality processes, and stringent qualification processes. All of these come together and result in telematics solutions being adopted on a broad scale.

In areas such as Beijing, telematics is available to approximately 50% of the new cars on the market, in comparison to approximately 25% in Heilongjiang.

In fact, in 2019, the installation of embedded telematics in new cars witnessed a 30 to 40% increase in demand when compared with two years previously.

China also has the upper hand in the manufacturing of telematics control units (TCU) because of the dominance it has in worldwide automotive microprocessors and microcontrollers.

The manufacturing of 5G TCUs is further being promoted by China’s recent investment in the 5G infrastructure market.

Leverage the latest telematic market trends and take your fleet to the next level

So there you have it: an insight into the top telematic market trends in APAC. This is certainly an exciting industry to be involved in, with businesses across the Asia-Pacific region set to benefit from cost savings and great efficiency rates thanks to the latest trends.

Proven Methods for Protecting Your Business from Fraud

Did you know that global losses from payment fraud tripled between 2011 and 2020? In 2011, $9.84 billion was lost. In 2020, this figure was $32.39 billion. It’s estimated that the cost will increase to $40.62 billion by 2027. So, the situation is only going to get worse!

Because of this, businesses need to do everything in their power to protect themselves from this very real and growing threat.

Create an AML checklist

An AML independent review checklist is imperative for achieving AML compliance, which in turn will help you to prevent fraud at your business.

For those who are unaware, AML stands for anti-money laundering. Some businesses are at a greater risk of money laundering than others. This includes art businesses, accountancy firms, trust or company service providers, high-value dealers, real estate agencies, and money service businesses.

Some of the essential elements of your AML checklist

Monitor real-time transactions – Anti-money laundering regulations demand that transactions above a certain threshold are monitored. This threshold can vary from one market to another.

Perform Identity Verification Checks – Know Your Customer verification involves reviewing a customer’s full name, residential address, and date of birth. An official document is necessary to validate this information, such as a passport, national ID, or driving license.

Check sanction and PEP lists – PEP stands for Politically Exposed Person. They are considered at greater risk than the average person because they can be subject to corruption or bribery. You need to check PEP lists. Sanction lists tend to be grouped with PEP checks, yet you can find online databases that specialize in this type of data.

Add alternative data checks to your process – Criminals are becoming increasingly sophisticated, and they know how to bypass checks. Therefore, you need to look at alternative data that can help you to verify someone’s identity. This data can come from the kind of device the person uses, a phone number, an email address, or an IP address, for example.

Educate your employees and use online surveys to test their knowledge

Did you know that most data breaches are insider attacks? This doesn’t mean that employees have turned against you and are trying to take your business down. While there have been instances like this, most breaches happen because employees have left your system vulnerable without realizing they’re doing so.

This happens due to a lack of knowledge and education. You cannot expect your employees to know how to protect your system if you don’t educate them.

You need to train your employees. Regular training sessions are recommended. You can also send weekly newsletters with tips and pieces of advice.

It’s good to run tests using online surveys to find out whether or not your employees understand the risks. Stress that these tests have no bearing on what you think of your staff members. They’re purely to find out where more training is needed.

Adhere to the 12 points of the PCI DSS guidelines

If you take payments at your business, you need to follow these regulations. If you are found to be non-compliant, you can expect a very big fine to be coming your way.

The great thing about PCI DSS is that the requirements are very specific and so they genuinely help you to provide your business with as much protection as possible. From changing default passwords to protecting endpoints, everything is covered.

Protect all of your devices

This includes smartphones your employees use for work purposes.

Hackers are professionals when it comes to spreading threats that can infect devices, meaning they’ll ultimately have access to your business’ data.

You are also advised to implement a strong firewall so you can protect all outgoing and incoming files and data. Antivirus software is another critical component when building a strong multi-layered security plan. Antivirus will consistently scan for phishing emails or websites and dangerous threats.

Apart from using tools, you can keep accounts and devices safe with two-factor authentication and strong passwords.

Carry out frequent audits

Frequent audits will help to determine whether or not there are any evident signs of fraudulent activity happening at your business. If such activity happens, you need to take action to keep damages to a minimum.

Use a fraud management system

Next, use a fraud management system to keep your business protected. It provides a real-time screening of all of the transactions that occur across your computer’s channels, accounts, and computer.

Leverage professional help if needed

If data security isn’t your strong point, don’t try to do it alone. There are great security companies out there that’ll be able to put together a solid security plan for your company.

They will start off by conducting an audit so that they can discover any vulnerabilities that need to be patched up. They’ll let you know what you’re getting right and where you’re going wrong with your data security efforts.

Image source

They have a whole host of different tools in their armory. Penetration hacking is a popular approach to getting to the bottom of how effective your network security is. With this, an ethical hacker will effectively hack into your system but rather than stealing data they will present you with the results and advice on what steps to take next.

Make sure your business doesn’t become the next victim of fraud

As you can see, there are a number of approaches you have at your disposal when it comes to protecting your business from the very real threat of fraud.

No matter how big or small your company is, it’s essential that you put methods in place to protect your employees, customers, and future. This list provides you with the perfect starting point!

Arencibia Establishes Joint Venture With SK Materiald AiPlus To Expand Bulk Gas Recycling Throughout Asia

New Company to Address Cost and Shortages of Helium and Rare Gases, Particularly in Semiconductor Supply Chain

On Friday, December 16, 2022, SK materials airplus CEO, Jong-jin Oh, and Arencibia CEO, Brent T. Frissora, joined hands at SK materials headquarters in Seoul, Korea to announce a joint venture focused on the construction and operation of bulk gas recycling systems for Asia’s largest manufacturers in the silicon, semiconductor, aerospace, metals, and other critical supply chains.

The joint venture will be the first business in Asia to focus exclusively on the design, engineering, construction, and operation of bulk gas recovery systems, particularly those focused on recovering expensive process gases like helium, neon, and other rare gases that are used in mission critical manufacturing operations. Arencibia will be responsible for the recovery process and design, while SK materials airplus will oversee operations and commercial functions, including sales and marketing.

Asia’s largest manufacturers are facing significant instability in their supply chains due to geopolitical risks, as well as dramatic price fluctuations and availability restrictions in the supply of bulk gases. This supply chain instability creates ripple effects throughout their production operation and commercial business.

By recycling process gases on-site for Asia’s largest manufacturers, the joint venture will provide unprecedented cost decreases, as well as supply chain security and reliability, not to mention dramatic reductions in the energy and carbon footprint of the manufacturing process. This will enable Asia’s largest manufacturers to increase their competitiveness, secure their supply chain, and reduce their impact on the environment – in short, to future-proof their manufacturing operation.

“Given the precarious supply and price fluctuation of rare gases, upcycling is the best solution for steady growth,” said Mr. Oh, CEO of SK materials airplus. “Through close cooperation with Arencibia, we will lead the upcycling business in Korea and Asia and shape the net-zero trend.”

“Arencibia is the only company exclusively devoted to designing, building and operating custom industrial gas recovery systems for the world’s largest manufacturers,” said Mr. Frissora, CEO of Arencibia. “Manufacturing industries, particularly in silicon, semiconductor, aerospace and metals, face unprecedented challenges related to industrial gas availability and cost, as well as reducing their environmental impact. We are honored and humbled to partner with SK to help Asia’s leading manufacturers reduce both their costs and carbon footprint. By combining our unique technology with SK’s tremendous scale, experience and vision, this new company will accelerate Asia’s transition to a low carbon economy.”

SK materials airplus issued a press release on Monday announcing the joint venture, which has been covered by over 20 major media outlets in Korea as of the date of this release.

6 Trends Shaping Digital Transformation in 2022

Digital transformation refers to adapting to newer and more efficient technologies to create completely new business processes or modify existing ones. This also extends to changing the business culture, customer experience, and general way processes are conducted daily.

Every industry from healthcare and automobile to marketing and the stock market is embracing technology to further itself in the market. Below are trends that are ruling 2022 and are here to stay. Learn more about them to embrace them in your business culture and get the most out of them.


Blockchain is a digital ledger technology or shared database on which the biggest cryptocurrency, Bitcoin, operates. Individual blocks are securely linked together and used to send data from one place to another in a secure and decentralized manner.

It has now grown outside of being a network for Bitcoin. Its secure network is now widely used in sectors such as healthcare, finance, and real estate. Not just that, it is also set to play a significant role in cybersecurity, another major trend of today.

Investing in blockchain[*image2*]

To hop onto the blockchain trend, invest in it directly or indirectly. Solana (SOL) and Mushe Token are some of the biggest blockchain investments you might look to get into, for starters. They’re available as cryptocurrency, DeFi, Web3, and NFTs among other options.

Solana is the fastest blockchain in the world at the moment. It is the most popular and common, making it a great investment option. You can buy Solana with a credit card in America. It is readily available to be invested in directly in America.

Use Solana’s decentralized technology to develop user-friendly software applications. It is also known as the ‘Ethereum Killer’ due to it outmatching the highly popular by offering solutions to its problems such as gas fees and transaction speed.

Remote working

Perhaps the most tangible digital evolution seen in countries around the world like the USA, Australia, India, and the UK is the rise of remote working. A report by McKinsey noted that 20% of the entire workforce of the world could work away from the office for most of the time without it impacting its productivity in any way.

Remote and hybrid work environments allow employees to work at the times and places they’re most productive. It might be in the morning, afternoon, or late at night. It might be from the comfort of an employee’s bed or a study table.

The resurgence of remote work has meant that the management has to also step up with digital workplace strategies. Courtesy of this, there has been a rise in the use of collaboration platforms and tools as well as automation, which we’ll discuss below.

Cloud technology

Cloud solutions were already gaining momentum due to their many benefits enabling smooth business operations. However, they have gained a significant push post-pandemic as they become the go-to tools for remote work and management.

Businesses might move their data to cloud platforms that might be accessed by multiple devices securely. It helps you create a seamless digital experience for both employees and customers. Its accessibility makes it key to the digital transformation of a company setup.

The cloud setup does struggle with some challenges such as managing the complexities of trickier work structures and inconsistencies in some cases. However, it has vastly helped in simplifying digital ecosystems, making it a mainstay in any company operating today.


Automation refers to creating processes and technologies that minimize human input in a procedure. As we evolve digitally, automation is being replaced by hyperautomation. It refers to the integration of automation in as many business operations as possible.

As per a report by MuleSoft, most companies intend to implement automation initiatives to achieve the following goals:

Improving productivity — 96%Improving the customer experience — 93%Improving overall operational efficiency — 93%Automation, and by extension hyperautomation, achieves these results by reducing costs and making your operations highly scalable. You might apply it to entire projects or just a part of a project, depending on your needs and budget.

Artificial intelligence

The use of artificial intelligence has increased by 88% since 2020 by service decision-makers. It is often used along with automation and machine learning to contribute to the seamless digital experience.

AI not only systematically collects data, but it also sorts in legible and meaningful ways. It’ll draw up the analytics you require to help you analyse situations in absolute terms. It helps establish a data-driven approach that fosters innovation.


5G is the fifth-generation mobile network that is the successor of 4G. It began deployment worldwide in 2019 with a focus on improving the speed and responsiveness of wireless networks. It serendipitously arrived at the onset of the pandemic.

5G is the new normal in the corporate scene now. It offers greater bandwidth and stable connectivity. Combined with extensively high speeds, the 5G internet is a highly satisfying experience for employees and customers.

It has completely changed the way we work and live. Every industry is trying its best to tap its benefits to propel itself further.

Some of the key digital trends of 2022 that you might keep an eye on are blockchain, remote working, cloud technology, and hyperautomation.

They help create a seamless work model that benefits both employees and customers. They simplify your work ecosystem and make it more accessible to everyone around the globe.

What is a Gold IRA and How Does it Work?

Retirement savings is something really important that most of us must focus on in our prime years, where earning income isn’t much of a challenge. Having retirement savings provide financial security and independence in old age.

When it comes to retirement savings, diversification is very important. Diversifying a retirement portfolio can help reduce the risk of losing money.

By investing in different assets, such as stocks, bonds, real estate, and precious metals, investors can spread their risk. Thus, the hit from losses in any single particular investment method will be lower.

Among all the investment methods out there, people nowadays seem to be more attracted to gold IRAs. If you too are researching gold IRAs, then today we are here with an article that will give you a detailed idea of the same.

What is an IRA?

An IRA, or Individual Retirement Account, is a type of investment account that is designed to help people save for retirement. IRAs come in two main types: traditional and Roth.

Contributions to a traditional IRA may be tax-deductible, and the earnings on the investments in the account are not taxed until withdrawn. This means that money put into a traditional IRA can grow tax-free until the account holder retires, at which point they will pay taxes on the money they withdraw. Traditional IRAs are a good option for people who expect to be in a lower tax bracket in retirement than they are now.

With a Roth IRA, contributions are made with after-tax dollars, but withdrawals, including earnings, are tax-free. This means that people who choose a Roth IRA will pay taxes on the money they put into the account upfront, but they won’t have to pay taxes on it when they retire. Roth IRAs are a good option for people who expect to be in a higher tax bracket in retirement than they are now.

What is a Gold IRA?

Both traditional and Roth IRAs typically invest in mutual funds, stocks, etc. to get you returns in the future.

On the other hand, gold IRAs are self-directed IRA schemes, wherein the investor can opt to buy and store precious metals such as gold, silver, platinum, etc.

One important point to note is that gold IRAs can come under either traditional IRA or Roth IRA, and it depends on the scheme you join.

Another important point to understand is that you cannot invest the precious metals currently under your possession in a gold IRA, nor can you directly buy and store precious metals yourself in the gold IRA.

Buying, storage, and selling of precious metals under a gold IRA have to be carried out by a custodian that facilitates these services. You will be charged a fee for the services offered by such custodians.

Gold IRA custodians in the United States such as Lear Capital with years of industry experience will provide you with a best-in-class and transparent service that too with competitive charges.

How Does Gold IRA Work?

Typical IRA schemes invest your money in stocks, bonds, etc. with the hope of gaining a profit in the long run, thus providing you a profit on your investment.

Gold IRAs also work in a similar way. Instead of investing in stocks, bonds, etc., your money is spent on buying precious metal bullions, which are then securely stored with the hope that the prices of these precious metals will increase in the long run.

Now, what makes gold IRAs more favourable to investors than investing in stocks or bonds is the security that comes with it.

Precious metals, especially gold, are limited resources and have a wide range of applications. Thus, as the demand increases and supply decreases, we are ought to see an increase in its pricing.

Moreover, historically speaking, despite short-term lows, precious metals such as gold has always retained their monetary value and have only increased in the long run.

Thus, being a physically limited resource, and from our historical knowledge, gold has significantly higher chances of providing us with better returns on our investment than traditional investment methods.

APAC Insider Magazine Announces the Winners of the 2022 APAC Business Awards

United Kingdom, 2022 – APAC Insider Magazine has announced the winners of the 2022 APAC Business Awards.

In its seventh year, the APAC Business Awards still celebrates the great success of companies of all sizes across the APAC region. Dipping into all kinds of industries, this programme recognises a group of businesses who are changing up the pace for the world as we know it. December brings a huge demand for services as we reach the end of another calendar year, and the enterprises in this programme do not disappoint. In fact, they have been excelling for quite some time and it is obvious that they won’t be slowing any time soon.

Awards Co-ordinator, Laura O’Carroll, commented on the success of the winners at the launch: “Our 2022 winners represent the incredible development within such an affluent region as they make it big in competitive markets. Our sincere congratulations to everyone recognised in this award supplement, we wish you all the best for the future ahead.”

To find out more about these prestigious awards, and the dedicated professionals selected for them, please visit where you can view the award supplement and full winners list.


Notes to Editors

About APAC Insider

Published quarterly, APAC Insider endeavours to bring you the latest need-to-know business content and updates from across the Asia Pacific Region

Keeping pace with a vast array of ever-changing sectors thanks to regular contributions from some of the region’s foremost corporate professionals, APAC Insider is home to the very best news, features and comment from the people and institutions in the know.

CGTN: China, Saudi Arabia to Forge All-round, High-level Cooperation Pattern

China-Saudi Arabia strategic mutual trust has been strengthened, and the bilateral practical cooperation in various fields has yielded fruitful results since the establishment of diplomatic ties 32 years ago, Chinese President Xi Jinping said in a written statement when arriving in Riyadh last Wednesday.

Bilateral relations steered by President Xi and King Salman bin Abdulaziz Al Saud of Saudi Arabia have not only benefited their people but also contributed to regional peace, stability, prosperity and development, he said.

During his talks with Saudi Crown Prince and Prime Minister Mohammed bin Salman Al Saud at the royal palace on Thursday, Xi said as an important member of the Arab world and Islamic world, Saudi Arabia is also an important independent force in a multipolar world and China’s important strategic partner in the Middle East.

A strengthened China-Saudi Arabia comprehensive strategic partnership

With the current international and regional situation undergoing profound and complex changes, Xi said the strategic and overall significance of ChinaSaudi Arabia relations has become more prominent.

China sees its development of relations with Saudi Arabia as a priority in its overall diplomacy, especially its Middle East diplomacy, Xi said.

China is willing to join hands with Saudi Arabia to achieve national rejuvenation, strengthen the development of strategic synergy, deepen pragmatic cooperation in all fields and enhance communication and coordination in regional and international affairs to push for greater development of the ChinaSaudi Arabia comprehensive strategic partnership, Xi said.

Meanwhile, Mohammed said Saudi Arabia looks forward to working with China to jointly commit to pushing the ChinaSaudi Arabia comprehensive strategic partnership to a new high.

President Xi’s visit will mark a milestone in bilateral relations, which will also promote cooperation in all fields, benefits the two peoples and achieve mutual prosperity and development of the two countries, Mohammed said.

The convening of the first China-Arab States Summit and the China-Gulf Cooperation Council (GCC) Summit hold special significance, which will play a strategic role in ChinaSaudi Arabia relations and China-GCC relations, Xi said.

China expects to work with Saudi Arabia to make the China-Arab States Summit and the China-GCC Summit milestone events in the development history of China-Arab states relations and China-GCC relations and promote the relations to a new level, Xi added.

China will work with Saudi Arabia to strengthen collaboration under multilateral frameworks, such as the United Nations and the Group of 20, Xi said.

Mohammed thanked China for its support in granting Saudi Arabia the status of dialogue partner in the Shanghai Cooperation Organization, adding that Saudi Arabia stands ready to strengthen communication and coordination with China and jointly address challenges of energy security, food security and climate change to make contributions in safeguarding regional peace, stability and security.

“I have full confidence in the prospect of bilateral relations,” said Mohammed.

Synergize Belt and Road Initiative and Vision 2030

Under the leadership of King Salman and Crown Prince Mohammed bin Salman, the Saudi people are marching in big strides toward Vision 2030 and making important progress in economic and social reform and diversification.

China supports Saudi Arabia’s major development initiatives, such as Vision 2030 and the Middle East Green Initiative and is willing to actively participate in Saudi’s industrialization process, aimed at helping the diversification of Saudi Arabia’s economic development, Xi said.

Implementing the synergy of China-proposed Belt and Road Initiative and Saudi Arabia’s Vision 2030, the two sides should deepen and substantiate practical cooperation in all areas to yield more fruits, Xi said.

He added that China will work with Saudi Arabia to deepen cooperation in the fields of production capacity and infrastructure construction and advance the development of the ChinaSaudi Arabia (Jizan) Industrial Park and the construction of major infrastructure projects.

In fields such as e-commerce, digital economy, clean energy, high-tech and space research and development, Xi said China looks forward to expanding cooperation, calling for elevating cooperation levels in trade, investment and finance.

Mohammed said Saudi Arabia is willing to build the Belt and Road with China, expand trade and mutual investment and welcomes more Chinese enterprises to participate in Saudi Arabia’s industrialization process.

Saudi Arabia also welcomes Chinese enterprises to join in its major infrastructure construction and energy projects cooperation, Mohammed said, calling for strengthened cooperation in the automobile, technology, chemical engineering and mining industries.

China agrees to list Saudi Arabia as a destination for group travel and expand personnel exchanges, as well as cultural and people-to-people exchanges between the two sides, Xi said, adding that China will work with Saudi Arabia to promote more achievements in Chinese language education cooperation between the two countries.

Regarding energy policies, Xi said China will strengthen communication and coordination in this field with Saudi Arabia, expand the scale of crude oil trade, and implement major energy cooperation projects such as the Sino-Saudi Gulei Ethylene Complex Project.

Mohammed thanked China for supporting the Middle East Green Initiative, calling for enhanced cooperation in clean energy and green development.

How to Facilitate Your Business Growth in the Philippines with a Powerful Online Presence

When it comes to growing a business, many entrepreneurs can’t see the forest for the trees. They have no clear idea of what they want from their businesses and even less of an idea about how to get it. In time, such businesses either flame out or flounder. It’s better to make the most of your resources while laying a solid foundation for further growth. The process begins with understanding why building a powerful online presence is critical to your success.

The Department of Trade and Industry (DTI) said that 10% of Philippine MSMEs have closed operations since June of 2021, with 46% of MSMEs in partial operations, and 53.8% reporting a decline in their sales. With these figures, it’s no surprise that many have adapted a digital means of conducting business, with varying degrees of success.

Due to the numerous business opportunities, business people and start-ups tend to focus on building an online presence for their business which comprises different online marketing strategies. The first important step is to create a business website. However, it’s just a small part of what needs to be done.

It’s not only about your business online presence but also your reputation. If you have a business that depends on client feedback, then an efficient way to get more clients is to have an excellent online reputation. It can be hard sometimes, but your business will grow as long as you stick to the basics.

What Is an Online Presence?

– In short, an online presence is a collection of interconnected channels you can use to promote your business.

An online presence refers to your digital footprint and its impact on your brand. It’s experiencing success using social media, blogging, and building backlinks. It could also be something as small as a Google My Business page or as large as a dedicated website completely separate from your brand. Although simplistic, its definition highlights something significant. You need to think of your website as a foundation for many other interconnected channels to improve your reach and influence.

But a business online presence is more than just having a website. It is about how people find you and develop brand perceptions. It refers to your visibility, credibility, and reputation on the web. Having an online presence can help you do anything from letting people know who you are, what you do, and how to contact you to advertising your products and even fundraising for various causes. 

Benefits of Having a Strong Online Presence for Business

According to the PYMNTS research, SMBs most commonly say they are interested in innovating new digital capabilities because they have no choice. It is shown that 38.3 percent of SMBs are interested in enhancing their digital offerings because many consumers are under stay-at-home mandates and are prevented from doing business through other channels. The second and third most common motivations for wanting to upgrade such capabilities are because they believe doing so will help them attract customers and generate new sales, with 37.8 percent and 30.4 percent citing these reasons.

●      Get exposed to a broader audience

The internet offers businesses many opportunities to reach the right people and get their attention, automatically increasing sales.

“It’s only logical to go where the audience is, and that is online with the quarantine having increased the online activity. With a lot of businesses having started doing so, the challenge now evolves to how to drive and retain online engagement,” Norman Barrientos, the member of strategic partnership – APAC, said.

Online platforms expose you to a wider audience and promote your products and services to different communities worldwide. Word-of-mouth advertising is still one of the best forms of marketing at present. Organizations can harness benefits like enhanced exposure and recognition. Let’s go on!

●      Build brand trust

Having a strong online presence helps to build your company’s reputation. Consumers are exposed to many different advertisements, having second thoughts about the credibility of a brand or product they have not heard of before. Customers tend to trust a business that has a well-established and visible web presence because it inspires credibility and reliability. You’ve probably visited a website and thought: “Who are these people?” When that happens, your trust in the business decreases. A connection with your visitors via various channels is important for establishing online trust.

●      Build a relationship with the target audience

Before taking the plunge and deciding to trust a business, internet users today are more likely to do some research first. When conducting research, most consumers consider reading comments in blogs and forum websites, as well as searching for businesses on Google and other search engines. The advantage of having a strong online presence is that it enables you to build relationships with the target audience and attract the desired clientele. By paying close attention and becoming involved with what goes on online regarding your business, you can take another step toward building a closer relationship with your audience.

●      Get more conversions

Too many businesses in the Philippines today have a hard time staying competitive because they lack a strong web presence. You can have the best products, affordable pricing, and a great customer support team, but it won’t make a difference if no one is aware of your brand or products. Online marketing is so effective and helpful for businesses because it allows for expanding the reach of your business to places where you may not be able to reach and convert visitors into leads and sales. However, you will need to improve web presence to do this effectively.

●      Earn Google’s trust

Online presence is the new currency, and getting the most out of it means earning Google’s trust. Businesses that have been blogging for a while have gotten accustomed to creating high-quality content and, in turn, have gained trust in the eyes of Google’s algorithms, which tend to sort high-quality websites above others.

●      Promote your business even outside of operating hours

More and more customers are turning to the Internet to find answers to their questions and look at products before making a purchase. Whether it is to review a product before purchasing or to compare different brands, most people do some research online before buying. The world we live in now is a globally connected community that is always online, so the information about you and your business should always be available online to promote it even outside of your operating hours.

Powerful Tips for Building Online Presence

We’ve found that the more effectively you improve online presence, the closer you’ll get to reaching new audiences, driving leads and sales, and establishing yourself as a thought leader. There’s no magic formula for building a great digital presence, but there are many strategic elements to consider.

1.    Optimise Your Website

Due to the scope of the Internet, it’s essential to stay on track and stick to tried and true methods of increasing online presence. You must properly optimize your website to rank well in search engines. Optimizing your site includes creating quality, keyword-targeted content and ensuring that users can easily find your pages on SERPs and actively engage with your content due to mobile responsiveness.

In addition to that, you should build relevant inbound links to your site from other high-quality websites. This includes developing relationships with industry bloggers and journalists interested in writing about your site and hosting it on their site as guest posts.

Finally, since users like sites that are easy to navigate, you should improve the usability of your website through ongoing user testing and feedback so you will have a good resource for anyone who uses your site. You should always keep track of your web presence and improve it constantly. Try using SEO tools like SE Ranking to keep track of any significant changes and make adjustments accordingly. The Google organic ranking checker can help you monitor rankings both for Google organic and paid search results. Besides rankings for every keyword, you’ll get the data on relative traffic forecast, search volume, the general level of competition, and presence in different SERP features. It also tracks Google Maps results, so with this tool, you’ll have a comprehensive understanding of your online presence.

2.    Set up Finances

Starting an online business in the Philippines also requires preparing the money-related aspects of running your enterprise. Traditional brick-and-mortar stores use cash for transactions, but when it comes to eCommerce, you’ll have to incorporate the digital aspects of payment processing from the very beginning. Otherwise, you risk losing customers in the process. At least you will need a corporate bank account, a business credit card, and some regular or recurring payment methods to be able to offer your customers more convenient ways to pay for their purchases online using debit, prepaid, and credit cards.

3.    Social Media

Social has gone beyond being a separate entity of a marketing campaign – it is now an amalgamation of several channels that help a company connect with customers directly. It allows you to build relationships with the potential audience and keep them interested in your company. And it’s not just about engagement and sales but also about building rapport and loyalty with customers.

There are tons of social media sites that you can use to build an online presence of your brand. However, if you hope to stand out in a crowded field, you’ll need to focus on social media that reaches your target audience. For example, for a company that manufactures digital cameras, it would make more sense to be active on Youtube and Instagram than on Twitter. With almost three million monthly active users, Facebook is a prime choice for many businesses. Data published in Meta’s advertising resources indicates that Facebook had 83.85 million users in the Philippines in early 2022. Fortunately, it’s also the place where most online consumers initiate the research process that leads them down the path to purchase. Among other social media platforms, there are also Instagram, Linkedin, Twitter, Quora, etc. Numbers published in Meta’s advertising tools indicate that Instagram had 18.65 million users in the Philippines in early 2022, while figures published in LinkedIn’s advertising resources show that LinkedIn had 11.00 million “members”. According to Twitter’s advertising resources, Twitter had only 10.50 million users in the Philippines.

4.    Optimise Local Listing Platforms

Online local searches are growing day by day. Businesses must go back to the basics and make themselves more accessible to their customers, who can be found anywhere on the web. A way of reaching out to them specifically is through local listing websites. Location-based search is one of the major searches in the current market! Brand positioning, awareness, and visibility can be improved considerably by maximizing online presence through local listing platforms such as Google My Business, Yelp, etc. Local businesses in the Philippines get a lot of benefits from them. However, it takes time to create a page and ensure that it’s optimized to get the desired amount of traffic and clients.

5.    Respond to Reviews

Nowadays, word-of-mouth is what brings clients to a particular business. Reviews are a great way to see how people feel about your product/service and what they perceive as its key benefits or problems. A positively reviewed service or product is suitable for building trust and gaining new loyal clients. But what if someone loses their temper and writes something that can be interpreted as negative?

It might be because something bad happened to them, and they want to take it out on someone else’s product. Most customers trust recommendations more than advertising. That’s why we should remember to look at each review carefully and find the best way to respond to each type of review.

6.    Invest in Online Advertising

If you are serious about your business, online advertising is a must. For a lot of digital marketing companies, it may seem like a luxury when in reality, it’s the future. Whether selling discounted local services or running an eCommerce site, online advertising is one of the most effective tools for getting your message out there.

You can’t afford to keep your head in the sand and hope that your sales will increase over time if you do nothing. There is no guarantee that this will happen, and it will not happen on its own. The power of online advertising lies in the fact that it’s so targeted. With all the data on the public’s (and each specific person’s) consumption habits and preferences, you can target the right people with your ads.


Whether you’re running a small, locally-owned business or have an international organization in the Philippines, you should be developing a regular strategy for maintaining and building your online presence. Many people rely on search engines to discover local businesses like yours. Whether you handle this work in-house or have a trusted internal or external partner, it’s worth taking the time to understand the tools and strategies to enhance the search results so you can achieve a competitive edge. So, leverage your investment in online marketing and follow the above-mentioned tips to bring new customers to your business and maintain a strong online presence!

7 Tips to Build a New Business in 2023

Did you know that Victoria, Australia alone created more than 5900 new startup jobs between 2018 and 2020, which led to about 10.75% annual growth in local jobs.

Launching a startup necessitates consideration, decision-making, market analysis, and developing knowledge in fields you rarely thought possible.

Setting up a company necessitates a lot of work, and money, from the early idea stage to its initial flight. There are numerous parallels that almost all entrepreneurs run through as they start their businesses.

How to launch a successful business: Your 7-step guide

The first steps to take when beginning your personal business are outlined in this tutorial.

Identify a business concept

Do appropriate research on a possible business concept, taking into account elements like customer’s needs, intended audience, and competitors, in order to determine the sort of company you desire to create.

Think about your current abilities and how these might be applicable to your startup company, in addition to beginning expenses, the marketplace, the assets accessible, or any chances you have to explore your concept before choosing to push into the marketplace.

Compose a strategic plan

Drafting a business plan can force you to pause and think everything through systematically, which will assist you to rationalize and define your idea and hasten the procedure of launching a company. New businesses make a lot of mistakes because they rush into activities without taking these important business factors into account.

Your primary audience must initially be determined. How would people be able to buy your goods or services? Is there another option if you can’t show that your idea has a customer base? How do you plan to expand your business in the future? Furthermore, it’ll give you plenty to offer potential financiers and investors, serving as the final evaluation of your big idea.

Pick suitable applicants

Few people possess the ability to concurrently address all the required areas in management, manufacturing, promotion, finances, and modeling framework. No matter how good your product is, you’ve no potential of setting up an amazing organization if your staff can’t work together or is made up of inefficient people.

To help you hire the right candidates, you can utilize a software program called an applicant tracking system (ATS) – to organize and adapt your hiring procedure so that it’s effective and scalable. When you learn more about what makes the best applicant tracking system, you’ll understand how it can be used by recruiters and hiring managers to find, attract, assess, and hire prospects more effectively and quickly.

Market your new company with advertising

Every business must have a marketing department, which necessitates a number of abilities. Choose the promotional strategies that will have the biggest impact on your startup business first, and then utilize your plans to identify the talents you’ll have to execute them.

Ensure you have the requisite skills to use a few of the most successful promotional methods in your sector by doing some study and learning about them.

Among a business’s most critical components is its advertising. It’s the closest and most important link to the client. If a client is drawn to an ad, they’re more inclined to visit your business.

Your competitors and consumers will learn that you are available for business thanks to advertisements. Dynamic and upbeat commercials will draw customers to your business irrespective of the economic state or competition.

In order to attract the right advertising professionals, you can use a PPC test to assess applicants’ pay-per-click advertising abilities, including campaign strategy, execution, and optimization. The purpose of this test is to gauge a candidate’s capacity to make wise decisions in common paid marketing settings.

Evaluate your company’s finances

Decide how you’ll pay for the costs associated with starting a firm. Are you going to take loans or fund your own business? When you plan to leave your existing position to focus on your startup, have you got sufficient funds saved up to sustain yourself till you generate income?

Knowing what the beginning expenses might be is wise. Since businesses exhaust their funds before becoming lucrative, many enterprises fail. In fact, failure is most common for startups during years two through five, with 70% falling into this category.

It might take a while for a firm to begin achieving consistent revenue, so a smart idea to anticipate how much startup investment you’ll require.

Declare your business legally

Each entity’s incorporation process must include the crucial step of business registration. This offers a host of benefits, safeguards your company, and secures your assets from 3rd parties.

Failing to register your organization may have legal repercussions. Clients are more inclined to believe you since they realize your firm is authorized, which implies there’s a lower danger of theft, thanks to a business license, which improves your business image.

Get opinions

Getting opinions from others is crucial for validating company ideas. It helps you refine your product, choose the optimum price, and choose the most effective marketing plan. It’s crucial to make sure your business is as stable as possible.

Customer surveys yield more data than any other method. The study’s conclusions can be easily applied, obtained, reported, or, to put it differently, they expand effectively.

Soft launches entail welcoming customers while giving them time to adapt and learn. Create a webpage where users may register to receive early access to the platform and voice any issues or difficulties they may have about it.

Are you prepared to launch a business?Among the most thrilling and frightening pursuits a person can take on in their lives is starting a business. Although risks must be taken into account, you shouldn’t let them stop you from pursuing your company concept.

There’re several questions to consider in order to assess your preparation for an entrepreneurial adventure. How well-developed is your company’s idea? Are you conscious of the need for it? What would you say best describes your attitude toward financial ambiguity?

Find out whether you need to do any further research on any facets of company management or if you’re almost ready to launch a new venture.

Asia’s Fashion Industry Looks to New Strategies to Overcome Pandemic Impacts


Business-friendly policies, and the transition to greater use of e-commerce and on-demand production, are key to helping Asia’s small and medium-sized fashion companies bounce back from the pandemic. 

The fashion industry employs millions worldwide, from artists and models to dressmakers, merchandisers, and many more. However, it has also been deeply impacted by the COVID-19 pandemic as the majority of the work in the sector is carried out by small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs).

Although SMEs hold the largest proportion of the market in developing economies, they tend to have limited reliable safety nets and make little to no net revenue in their first 4–6 months of business. Many are also not fully prepared for digitalisation, which can create a communication gap between consumers and producers.

These combined factors pose serious risk for the labour force that relies on the clothing industry in Asian countries such as the People’s Republic of China and Bangladesh, the world’s leading clothing producers. Ready-to-wear apparel comprised 84% of Bangladesh’s total exports in 2019, highlighting the economy’s vulnerability to a deterioration in manufacturing. According to the Bangladesh Garment Manufacturers and Exporters Association, the country suffered over $3 billion in losses from order cancellations and suspensions in 2020 alone, impacting the livelihoods of 2.28 million workers and leaving 4.1 million fashion-related workers unemployed.

A study conducted by Penn State’s Center for Global Workers also found that more than 72% of original purchasers declined making the full payments for raw materials (such as cloth) that were already bought by producers.

Fashion merchandise vendors and supply chains have also suffered, especially within the luxury fashion industry, which lost around $43 billion worldwide in 2021, and the figure could be even higher when accounting for minor brands. The Milan and Paris Fashion Weeks lost revenue when Chinese fashion houses were unable to attend due to the pandemic restrictions in 2020. Despite these circumstances, big fashion names began taking new approaches by utilising digitalisation—Shanghai Fashion Week pioneered a fully digital experience, and the same approach was followed at London Fashion Week.

However, this new reliance on digitalization has led to the emergence of a wide digital gap due to the lack of digitalisation among SME brands. By April 2020, daily visitors to 100 major fashion brands in Europe collectively increased by 45% through the online platform, creating opportunities to cut advertising and other publicity.

But while most major brands have websites, most smaller ones do not. On average, new companies commence online commerce within 10–15 weeks, but it generally takes longer for SMEs in the fashion industry to expand their businesses online. This reality indicates the need to bridge the digital gap and promote mass digitization, especially in Asia.

E-commerce and on-demand production can be effective post-COVID-19 strategies for the fashion industry.

Recent data shows sharp increases in time spent by SMEs sending emails, using social media, and online shopping during the pandemic. This indicates the need for governments to support fashion SMEs in dealing with these changes and increased online commerce.

Governments in Asia should consider conducting capacity-building programs to help fashion SMEs establish an online presence, provide financial help for brands to speed up online logistics, and create a community where SMEs can collaborate.

Fashion brands can start adopting online platforms to engage with their current consumers and expand their customer base even if they are not currently online. Sending consumers relevant notifications or emails, adjusting their content using personalized algorithms, and constantly improving their services by listening to customers’ feedback can be vital tools for keeping businesses afloat.

Across the United States, Europe, and the People’s Republic of China, online shopping has continued to maintain a relatively high percentage since 2019. To improve sales volumes, fashion companies can combine the digital approach with greater human interaction to increase access by customers.

For example, in 2020, several Chinese fashion brands sent their customers QR codes that would connect them with sales representatives on the phone, mimicking offline shopping experiences. Similarly, in Latin America, companies used WhatsApp to promote their brands by signing customers up to group chats.

Another issue facing many fashion houses is supply chain disruption. The differences in the recovery speeds of the US, Japan, Western Europe, and the People’s Republic of China have been large. The four regions have bounced back to pre-pandemic demand since Q1 2021.

However, with large-scale worldwide travel restrictions, commodity exports have experienced challenges in production management, causing economic downturns in some economies and resulting in fewer purchases of fashion items while producing excess goods that very few can afford.

In response to this challenge of demand-supply mismatching, fashion brands should consider an on-demand production model and produce only the designs and amounts agreed upon with their customers. This model will improve business management and facilitate the transition to more ecological and financially sustainable production in the long run.

E-commerce and on-demand production can be effective post-COVID-19 strategies for the fashion industry, facilitating increased sales, reducing detrimental excesses, and promoting sustainable practices across multiple supply chains. SME fashion companies should leverage these strategies to reap the benefits and implement cost-efficient production.

These SMEs are usually not obligated to store massive amounts of clothing, so they can be more flexible and responsive with their business decisions—two important traits for competing in the digital era. Governments must do their part and ensure a smooth digital transition by introducing SME-friendly policies, such as technical and financial support, and collaborating with fashion brands to create a sustainable and long-term on-demand manufacturing model.

he fashion industry is thriving at the moment. Every year, this sector produces more than 100 – 150 billion items of clothing

What makes this industry so special is that it’s not concentrated in certain parts of the world. Rather, it’s flourishing on all continents. The Asian fashion industry is a prime example of this. Asia’s fashion market is expected to experience a growth of 8.96% in the next five years, which would lead to a market volume of over $641 billion by 2027.

Does It Make Sense To Start Your Own Fashion Boutique

Taking the plunge and starting a new business can be scary. However, starting your own boutique could be a great business venture to embark on in 2023. Fashion is a lucrative industry after all. 

A recent report from McKinsey shows that a lot of industry players are in a much better position now than they were during the pandemic. During 2020-21, the fashion sector experienced an increase of 21% in revenue.

This year, it’s estimated that revenue from the apparel market will exceed $1.7 trillion. So, there’s certainly a lot of money to be made in fashion!

Financial Tips Boutique Owners Need To Follow

Of course, a profitable business is never a guarantee. It requires hard work and determination. 

Organization Is Critical To Be Profitable

Simply throwing your receipts into a file won’t cut it. You need to set aside time every week to assess your numbers so you can stock inventory wisely and make intelligent business decisions. 

Aging Inventory Will Hold Your Cash Hostage

To build a profitable fashion boutique, it’s vital to turn products over at a quick rate. So, if your cash is tied up in a line of shoes that won’t sell, these shoes are holding your business hostage and preventing growth. 

You may think the obvious solution is to discount the products heavily. But wait. Start off by assessing how the products are presented. Maybe you could showcase the shoes with a new outfit? Sometimes, all you need is a new take on an old design. 

Blanket Sales Aren’t The Answer

You need to discount products with a strategy. Utilize slow-turning items as your loss leader to bring new visitors to your online store and fresh faces to your boutique. While they’re excited about an excellent deal, they’ll also locate add-on items they didn’t know you sold. 

Be Smart About Who You Target And Why

You must be clever about who you target and why you’re targeting them. Yes, it’s lovely to grow your new customer count or follower count. But most boutiques find that most of their revenue comes from a small section of their list. 

Of course, when you start a business, everyone is a new customer. However, you’ll soon build lists based on repeat purchasers and loyal brand advocates. Send them VIP emails or go the extra mile with personal text messages or phone calls. Do this, and they’ll always come to your brand first when they need fashion items.

Know Your Cost, Margins, And How To Set Prices

If your markups are low, you have a hobby, not a company. It’s as simple as that. You should be marketing up items at least 2.5 to 3 times. If your markup is less, how do you expect to thrive? 

You won’t be able to pay yourself, make future investments, or pay your employees when you grow

A price is a number we establish based on the margin or markup we require to cover our operating expenses, costs, and profit. Yes, we use math. But we also ask ourselves key questions. 

How much are other businesses selling this item for?

How much do you think the product will bring?

Furthermore, price is also the point whereby the perceived value of the item is greater than the perceived pain of the cost. So, the benefits of owning a new, stylish skirt outweigh the cost of paying for it. 

With Passion, There Can Be Profit!

You can jump into a thriving marketplace, but without a solid plan and the right execution, success is not guaranteed. Choose a business you feel passionate about, and this will ensure you have the drive needed to navigate the bumps in the road and ensure a profitable outcome. 

The Decade of Indian Equities?

By Charles-Henry Monchau, chief investment officer at Syz Bank

2022 is a challenging year for stocks, including emerging markets, which were down nearly 30% at the end of October. However, one market is holding up rather well: India. Indeed, the Sensex index lost less than 1% in 2022 in local currency and about -7% in dollar terms.
Indian equities are in fact only amplifying the outperformance accumulated over the past 30 years compared to other emerging countries, including China.

What are the reasons for such a performance differential, especially compared to China? As Wellington Asset Management explains: “In China, everything is done because of the government; in India, everything is done despite the government. While China has largely supported the development of its industry over the past decades, this has not been the case in India. With less government support, only those Indian companies that generate sustainably higher returns on capital have survived and gained market share. As a result, the Indian market’s return on capital is higher than that of other emerging countries.

Can Indian stocks continue to outperform?

Many structural and cyclical factors should continue to support the Indian equity market over the next few years.

1. A favourable macroeconomic context

Indian GDP is expected to grow by about 7% for the whole of 2022, a growth rate that is expected to remain at this level for the next few years.
According to Morgan Stanley, India is expected to become the third largest economy in the world by 2027. GDP could more than double in 10 years, from the current $3.4 trillion to $8.5 trillion.

Among the drivers of this strong growth is a major shift in economic policy from redistribution to stimulating investment and job creation.
Another factor that could support growth is the current political tensions between the US and China, which are pushing companies to diversify their supply chains. India is potentially the biggest beneficiary of this trend, and through its “Make in India” campaign, it is making significant efforts to attract foreign investment, boosting manufacturing exports in sectors such as chemicals, industrial machinery, pharmaceuticals and automobiles. A strong workforce of about half a billion people, many of them highly educated young people, supports this manufacturing momentum. New factories and service hubs created by international companies will not only create more jobs but also improve productivity. This is a virtuous circle of growth very similar to the East Asian model: increased exports lead to higher wages, higher consumption and higher savings, which are then recycled into productive investment.
India is also increasing its public spending to catch up on some of its backlog in terms of heavy infrastructure such as roads and railroads. But it is in the area of digital infrastructure that India is building its comparative advantage. Unlike other economies that rely on private networks, India was the first in the world to build a public digital infrastructure. This is based on its unique digital identification system, called Aadhaar.

On the inflation front, soaring energy and food prices have not created the price explosion that some feared. This is partly because India decided not to sanction Russia and became one of its major trading partners (importing more than one million barrels of crude oil per day). When the West put sanctions in place, the Indian oil minister mentioned that he had a fiduciary duty to his people to provide energy and food at the best price.
Inflation still rose from 5% to 8% in the first nine months of the year. But it has remained on average lower than wage growth and seems to have started to fall.

India has already gone through a deleveraging cycle. As a result, corporate balance sheets are healthier, especially in the banking sector, allowing credit growth to resume. The 2017 – 2019 crisis involving Indian non-banking financial companies (NBFCs) appears to be well and truly over.
Finally, the macroeconomic environment is now more favourable for the Indian Rupee, although it has depreciated sharply against the dollar this year. India now has record foreign exchange reserves and a stronger current account balance. The current foreign exchange reserves indicate that the country will be able to cover cash outflows and avoid excessive depreciation of the currency.

2. A relative political stability

There is currently no serious opposition to Prime Minister Narendra Modi and his ruling Bharatiya Janata Party. In fact, Modi seems likely to win the 2024 elections.

3. Favourable demographics

India’s population has a median age of 28, compared to 38 in the US and China, 46 in Germany and 48 in Japan. Importantly, the working-age population is also growing, increasing the labour supply, a key driver of economic growth.
Urbanization, an improving housing cycle, and the growth of the middle class are all favourable winds for the economy. Over the next 15 years, India’s urban population is also expected to grow by 125 million people. Between 2020 and 2030, the share of household discretionary spending is expected to increase from 24% to 40%.

4. One of the largest and most liquid stock markets in the region

In terms of market capitalization, India is the third largest equity market in Asia outside of Japan, after China and Hong Kong. It is also one of the most liquid markets in the region. Since the onset of the pandemic, the market has seen significant growth in domestic investor participation, particularly retail investors who channel domestic savings into the stock market and provide a buffer against foreign capital outflows (see point 6). It is also important to note that the sectoral allocation of the Indian market is changing, with more internet, media, and e-commerce companies likely to enter the market in the next two to three years. These sectors each account for less than 1% of the MSCI India Index, compared with 16-18%each in the MSCI China Index. But the majority of IPO-ready companies are in these sectors and should eventually change the sectoral composition of the index.

5. A new profit cycle

The aforementioned macroeconomic, demographic, and geopolitical fundamentals should combine to support a new corporate earnings cycle in India. It coincides with the end of the deleveraging cycle initiated in 2015, leaving companies in much stronger financial positions than a few years ago.
Annual earnings growth for S&P BSE Sensex companies over the next three years is expected to be 25%. This implies a relative outperformance of about 16% compared to the broader emerging markets index, which is expected to gain 9% per year (source: Peregrine). Corporate profits relative to GDP are now trending upward after having declined persistently for more than a decade. This is partly due to reduced stress in sectors such as banking and metals. At the same time, the information technology and pharmaceutical sectors continue to enhance India’s stature on the global stage.

6. A new enthusiasm for equity markets among local investors

Despite the positive outlook mentioned above, international investors seem to be shunning Indian equities. But demand from domestic savers more than makes up for the lack of foreign flows. The Investment Funds Association of India reported a net inflow of $2 billion in September, up 17% month-on-month.


Historically, investors have underestimated Indian equities due to India’s underrepresentation in emerging market indices (11% while GDP represents 45%) and
a misperception of risks such as liquidity or market concentration.

In the medium to long term, India should benefit from several favourable winds such as digitalization, the growth of direct-to-consumer trade and the geopolitical reshaping of supply chains.

The biggest risk to this market is a significant and sustained rise in commodity prices, which could negatively impact India’s current and fiscal accounts and push inflation higher.

The ongoing changes in the Indian economy are not fully reflected in the benchmarks. The best way to capture opportunities is to carefully select companies through fundamental and bottom-up research.

How Private Health Insurance Works Around the World: USA, UK, and Australia Compared

In the last decade, private health insurance has become more accessible and affordable in the U.S., UK, and Australia.

As a result, it’s now a viable option for millions of people who wouldn’t have been able to afford it before. Many see private health insurance as the only real way to access high-quality healthcare at an affordable price.

Health insurance has a wide range of similarities across different countries, however, there are some specialties present in some countries that are absent in others.

On that note, here are the intricacies of private health insurance in the USA, the UK, and Australia and how to work around them.

Private Health Insurance in Australia

In Australia, private health insurance offers hospital bills and extra bills such as general treatment. If you’re interested, you can take out a plan for both or mix separate covers to sort your needs.

You get to be treated as a private patient when you use a private health insurance plan, with a doctor of your choice.

One advantage of having private health insurance is that you have the privilege to select state-of-the-art healthcare with which doctor you want. And when you feel the need for a change, it can be done quickly and easily.

You can also request a plan that covers the ambulance in your state, especially when this isn’t covered by the government.

Finding Great Value Health Insurance in Australia

People take out private health insurance for various reasons, especially fast access to a doctor of their choice and the quality treatments they receive.

There are two types of private health insurance in Australia, the insurance that covers in-hospital treatment and ancillary or extra covers for ambulance, physiotherapy, and other services.

To find great value health insurance, you should consider your health needs first, this can be discovered when you seek medical advice by talking to a doctor.

After doing this, you can use iSelect to easily compare insurance policies in Australia to find one that suits both your budget and needs.

All you have to do is share a few details about yourself or family members, and the type of private health insurance you’re looking for, then you get different options for comparison.

Private Health Insurance in The United States

The United States healthcare system is a mixed one, largely dominated by commercial health insurance, with the majority of the healthcare facilities operated by the private sector.

Public healthcare is limited and mostly available only to citizens and permanent residents within a certain age range who cannot afford other options of healthcare.

Healthcare in the US is one of the best in the world but this means it can be super expensive. Many people get insurance from their employer or group health insurance plans.

Those who don’t have employer coverage have the option of individual health insurance. Previously, coverage for individuals was limited and not as broad as the employer-sponsored plan.

However, essential health benefits are now being offered on individual medical plans across states in the United States.

Private Health Insurance in the UK

The United Kingdom has several international insurance providers including AXA, Allianz, Bupa, and Cigna, coupled with other local insurers in the union.

Most private insurance plans in the UK cover the cost of inpatient treatments and day care surgery.

You can also include outpatient services, coverage for maternity, dental care, vision, and more medical services according to your health needs.

Also, the average NHS wait time in the UK is a month and two weeks, whereas private hospitals can ensure you see a doctor within hours of request and confirmation of your coverage.

Although NHS insurance provides good health coverage at public facilities, you can expand your coverage to include specific health needs by getting a private health insurance plan.

Indonesia in the Spotlight

Indonesia has proven to be an attractive investment proposition this year and now represents approximately 10% of our GEM portfolio. A key rationale for our positive view of this market is a major derating of our favoured businesses coupled with a macro tailwind. The economy has benefitted from an increase in exports, notably from commodity products which has helped improve the government’s fiscal position. Additionally, GDP is expected to grow by 5% over the next few years. We focus on companies which are domestic champions in their sector and have identified several that will perform whilst consumers’ behaviours are changing due to increased prosperity.

It is well known that the country has abundant natural resources including nickel deposits which make it the largest global supplier of the raw material. In 2021 Indonesian mines accounted for over 35% of global supply. This year, output has increased by 41% meaning that, year-to-date, Indonesia has supplied 47% of the world’s nickel.

The dominant position in this market meant that, in 2020, Indonesia’s government decided to take advantage of the growing demand generated by the electric vehicle manufacturers and banned raw nickel exports. As a result, battery and EV manufacturers such as CATL and Tesla have formed partnerships with local companies (as evidenced by Tesla’s USD 5bn nickel purchasing contract) to develop domestic refining and processing facilities. This has led to a lasting job and wealth creation rather than just a simple revenue stream from exports.

The rise of commodity prices has been benefiting Indonesia’s trade balance and fiscal position. This in turn allowed the government to increase the 2023 infrastructure budget by 8% and set a c. 90bn USD investment target for next year. Other initiatives such as easing regulations to enable further job creation, increasing minimum wage by 7% and increased support for the national health insurance programme will help consumer confidence of the population that exceeds 270m (of which, Gen Z and the millennials make up over half).

Historically, Indonesia has been seen as more dependent on commodity cycles and at risk of currency depreciation. Post covid, the government has exhibited good fiscal policies. Indonesia’s economy is running steady and the G20 summit this month is an opportunity to showcase this stability to a global audience. Furthermore, the government has been able to manage the reduction of the fuel subsidy efficiently in response to higher global oil prices. Costs have been gradually passed on to consumers, hence sentiment and actual spending remain relatively strong. We have taken this as an opportunity to invest in consumer companies that have been on our watchlist for some time.

Bank Rakyat is Indonesia’s largest bank in terms of assets and is recognised as one of the world’s leading microfinance institutions. It has a rural network of some 10, 000 branches and five hundred thousand agents enables them to reach smaller towns across the archipelago and a 30m strong client base, many of whom prefer face to face rather than online interaction.

Telkom Indonesia is the largest telecommunication operator in Indonesia with 175m subscribers. The company has benefitted from consolidation in the sector as five operators have been reduced to three. We believe Indonesia is at the sweet spot of consumer data adoption via mobile phones and fixed telecom acceleration as users demand for content increases.

Sumber Alfaria is a leading player in the growing mini-market sector with its Alfamart brand attracting 6m customers to their stores every week. This number is likely to grow as Indonesians move from the traditional wet-market to the more modern mini-mart shopping experience. Sustainable GDP growth will support the disposable income growth and, in turn, will drive sales increases.

Kalbe Farma is a pharmaceutical company in a fragmented marketplace serving over two hundred thousand outlets nationally. Its offerings include nutrition products such as powdered milk, prescription pharma and consumer healthcare. The government has suggested that the support for the Indonesia National Health Insurance programme will increase, and Kalbe Farma would be a key beneficiary of this development.

With the 2024 election in mind Joko Widodo, Indonesia’s president, will have consumer confidence and increased prosperity at the forefront of his efforts to cement his popularity for re-election for an unprecedented third term. Further measures to this effect are likely to benefit our domestic champions in the medium and long term.

China Calls for Digital Cooperation to Boost Global Economic Recovery

Building global consensus and bolstering confidence in world economic recovery is a critical task for the 17th G20 Summit, with the theme “Recover Together, Recover Stronger.”

As a new driving force for global economic growth, the digital economy has great significance. The added value of the digital economy in 47 countries around the world reached $38.1 trillion in 2021, with an increase of 15.6 percent year on year, according to a report titled “World Internet Development Report 2022”.

Against this background, China on Wednesday called on G20 members to make joint efforts in invigorating digital cooperation so as to let the fruits of the development of the digital economy benefit people of all countries.

Building global digital economic paradigm

China stands ready to continue cooperating with the G20 members to jointly build a global digital economic paradigm featuring benefits for all, balance, coordination, inclusiveness, win-win cooperation and common prosperity, said Chinese President Xi Jinping when attending and addressing the summit in Indonesia’s resort island of Bali.

Multilateralism must be upheld, Xi stressed, calling for strengthened international cooperation.

Noting that development should be prioritized, the Chinese president said the digital gap must be bridged and innovation should serve as the driving force for promoting post-pandemic recovery.

During the 2016 Hangzhou G20 Summit, China for the first time put the digital economy on the G20 agenda, vowing to innovate development patterns and tap growth potential.

At the following summits of the group in 2017 and 2018, world leaders also held extensive discussions on how to strengthen cooperation in developing the digital economy while addressing the challenges brought about by new technologies.

During these years, multiple G20 summits have made it clear that the digital economy is an increasingly important driver of global economic growth, and the G20, which includes the world’s major economies, represents the leading force in the development of the digital economy.

China in action

The Chinese president also underlined that China will continue to work with G20 members to foster a “balanced, coordinated and inclusive” global digital economy landscape that brings benefits to all and features win-win cooperation and shared prosperity.

China has launched the initiative of building a Digital Silk Road, and has identified digital economy as a key area of cooperation under the Global Development Initiative, according to Xi.

China has proposed the G20 Action Plan on Digital Innovation and Cooperation, which is aimed at promoting the innovative application of digital technology and making innovation outcomes beneficial to all and shared by all, and welcomes the participation of all parties, Xi said.

China, as the world’s second largest economy and the largest developing country, has attached great importance to developing the digital economy, and its digital development will inject new impetus into global economic recovery and create new opportunities for common development.

Over the past decade, China has witnessed remarkable progress in its digital economy, the value of which reached 45.5 trillion yuan (about $6.3 trillion) in 2021, accounting for 39.8 percent of the country’s GDP, according to a report released by the Chinese Academy of Cyberspace Studies on November 9.

By June 2022, there were 1.05 billion internet users in China, and the internet penetration rate had reached 74.4 percent, read a white paper titled “Jointly Build a Community with a Shared Future in Cyberspace” released by China’s State Council Information Office on November 7.

The country hosts the world’s largest 5G network and is one of the global leaders in 5G standards and technology, with 1.85 million 5G cell towers and 455 million 5G cell phone subscribers, according to the white paper.

Still, the 14th Five-Year Plan (2021-25) and long-range objectives through 2035, which map out a blueprint for the country’s new journey toward the full construction of a modern socialist country, makes it clear that China will continue to put efforts in promoting the digital economy.

The country aims to raise the proportion of the added value of core digital economy industries in its GDP to 10 percent in 2025, up from 7.8 percent in 2020, according to the plan.

By 2025, China will see the digital transformation of industries reach a new level, digital public services will become more inclusive, and the digital economy governance system will improve noticeably, as per the plan.  


7 Steps Businesses Should Follow In a Blackout

1.) Call your utility provider and report the power outage, or call 999 in cases of immediate danger.

During a blackout your utility company needs to know when and where it occurs, so make sure to call your utility’s designated line as soon as possible to report the blackout and provide any information that may help. You can also call 105 free to report issues or get information about blackouts in your local area. Make sure to only call 999 if you or others are in immediate danger.

2.) Turn off and disconnect equipment which may be damaged by temporary power surges.

When power returns after a blackout, electrical surges may cause circuits to fry which can result in damaged equipment and create a fire risk. Make sure to turn off and completely disconnect all your business’ large appliances, assembly lines and other equipment, including laptops and computers, to keep employees and customers safe and reduce any potential damage to your equipment.

3.) Try not to use candles or lanterns for emergency lighting.

When the power goes out, the first instinct is to light candles and lanterns for easy illumination, however, candles and lanterns are fire hazards and can be major causes of death and damage in power outages. Opting for battery-powered torches will reduce this risk, and means you don’t have to worry about burning candles.

4.) Leave one light turned on so you know when the power comes back on.

Blackouts can cost businesses thousands of pounds an hour in lost revenue and productivity. Ensure all unnecessary appliances are switched off but leave one light on so that you are aware of when electricity has returned and you can get started on responding to the blackout. 

5.) Conserve your phone’s battery.

During a blackout, your business’s Wi-Fi will cut out meaning your phone will be your connection to the outside world. Reduce your screen’s brightness, activate low power mode and turn off Wi-Fi and Bluetooth to conserve your phone’s battery power to ensure you have a way to contact others, including building management, local authorities and supervisors for any status updates.

6.) Clear pathways to prevent falls.

During a blackout, all lights will go out except the emergency lighting system. Slips and trips are a major hazard in low light, with it being more difficult to see obstructions and obstacles. Make sure pedestrian routes are clear and check your emergency lighting regularly for any faults to prevent tripping and falling.

7.) Ensure employees have work to do offline.

During a blackout, you may need to send your employees home and they may be concerned about the lack of work they will now be able to complete. Ensuring you are able to provide work for your employees that they can do offline will improve business productivity and also the well-being of your employees. 

James Longley, Managing Director at Utility Bidder has commented on the importance of UK businesses being prepared for a blackout:

“The UK is currently preparing to face what could be an unprecedented winter, with potential electricity blackouts that would directly impact business functions. Whilst blackouts are currently looking unlikely – unlikely does not equal impossible. With businesses’ reliance on electricity, preparing for potential blackouts is vital to protect both the interests of the business and your employees. 

“Here at Utility Bidder, we wanted to share some easy steps businesses can follow if they do suffer an electricity blackout this winter to prevent seeing their business and employees dramatically affected.

“Simple tips such as turning off your electronic equipment, conserving your phone battery and ensuring employees have work to do offline will enable businesses to continue to run smoothly, reduce employee stress and minimise any potential business losses.”

The Chinese Economy Has Recovered – Here’s What It Means for Investors

Maxim Manturov, Head of Investment Advice at Freedom Finance Europe, explores how China’s economy could gain momentum despite adverse factors of the Covid-19 pandemic and what investors need to know.

The Chinese economy has returned to a state of growth since Covid-19 restrictions lifted in 2021. This continued until Q2 2022 when lockdown and a slowdown of 0.4% y/y (-2.6% q/q) hit. Despite this, manufacturing and services rose in June for the first time since February with the manufacturing PMI (Purchasing Managers Index) rising to 50.2 points (up from 49.6 in May) and services rose to 54.5 (up from 41.4 in May). In addition to improved domestic demand, a record trade surplus of $98 billion (£87 billion) contributed to the recovery.

The support businesses are expecting to receive to stimulate the economy may have been the catalyst that enabled recovery.  In Q2 2022, Beijing switched to a more expansionary fiscal policy and announced a set of measures to support the economy, including new tax incentives and infrastructure investments amounting to ¥2.6 trillion (2.2% of GDP – $370 billion or £330 billion). These are typically financed by local government bond. For example, more than ¥2 trillion ($290 billion or £258 billion) worth of such bonds were issued in the first five months of 2022.

These measures are likely to increase the budget deficit, which has already reached ¥3 trillion ($430 billion or £383 billion) in the first half of 2022, and together with local government finances, ¥5 trillion (4.3% of GDP – $720 billion or £642 billion). Nevertheless, China has a relatively strong fiscal position – its debt burden does not exceed 80% of GDP.

China’s relatively strong economic outlook compared to the EU and US

In the USA the trade deficit decreased from $84.91 billion (£75.79 billion) in May to $70.7 billion (£63.1 billion) in July. At the same time, the budget burden is increasing year on year. In the Eurozone, the negative balance has only strengthened since the end of last year, increasing to €26.3 billion (£2.26 billion) in May, €24.6 billion (£21.4 billion) in June and €34 billion (£29.6 billion) in July of 2022.

Chinese imports to Germany have been rising strongly over the last few years, while exports have remained unchanged. China has generated a deficit of €220.6 billion in seven months with Europe. This trend is extending the supply of Euros, as buying Chinese goods requires the sale of Euros and the purchase of Renminbi. Overall, the EU trade balance is in deficit, as indicated by factors such as imports exceeding exports, which is not in favour of a rise in the Euro. This indicates a worsening situation in the Eurozone.

Looking ahead, there will be a stronger focus on consumption, which could support economic growth. In the short-term, China will focus more on shifting from an export-led economy to consumption-led growth.

China’s IPO market

From January to August, China’s IPO market rose 44% y/y to $58 billion (£51 billion) a record high for the period. In the US, there was a 92% y/y decline during this time. China has already had five IPOs worth over $1 billion in 2022 and another is being prepared. There has only been one such public sale in New York and Hong Kong and none in Europe.

The oil and gas company CNOOC and the telecoms provider China Mobile are the biggest debuts this year. They have raised $5 billion (£4.4 billion) and $8.6 billion (£7.7 billion) respectively. The technology sector dominated the Chinese IPO market. Demand for $1.6 billion (£1.4 billion) from the computer components maker Hygon Information Technology exceeded supply by a factor of 2000.

What can investors expect from the Chinese stock market?

Chinese industrial production, retail sales and fixed-asset investment increased faster than experts had expected last month. Economic data for August showed that China withstood the impact of many negative factors and maintained the momentum for economic recovery. Equity investors want to see a significant softening of China’s Covid-19 policy to make it more constructive.

Importantly, investment in Chinese startups and companies has been increasing since 2019. Last year, investments reached $118 billion, the second highest on record, with US venture capitalists involved in about a quarter of these deals. Alfonso Alba, the  head of Bayer Crop Science, headquartered in Germany and China, says the company is very optimistic about the Chinese market. Bayer Crop Science has developed an ambitious development plan for the next 10 years in China. Jeremy Yeo, the acting CEO of US plant-based meat company Beyond Meat, says the company sees significant potential in the Chinese market and will increase investment.

Is it time to rethink the way we approach our anti-fraud defenses?

Cybercrime is not going anywhere. According to the PwC’s Global Economic Crime and Fraud Survey from 2022, 46% of surveyed organizations reported experiencing cybercrime in the last 24 months. Just in the APAC region the number of cyberattacks grew by a staggering 168% year over year, according to Check Point researchers. Cybercrime is no longer a distant reality, but something is happening now and to everyone. Nobody is safe anymore. What are you doing to protect your business?

Is your fraud prevention preventing you from reaching your maximum?

Companies are increasingly working on developing cybersecurity strategies that can help them protect their data, business, and customers, but often that can result in disrupting their relationship with customers. Regardless of how much effort you have invested in maximizing business growth, having anti-fraud defences that are not properly executed can cause more damage than good.

Your customers want quick and efficient service, and anything that impedes that can cause customer friction. While it might be true that friction is inevitable as customer expectations are constantly changing, companies that manage to minimize it will have better customer retention while maximizing their revenue. When it comes to retail, around 68% of potential customers who reach a payment page will never complete the checkout process, creating a large number of missed conversion opportunities.

Overzealous anti-fraud defences often cause this as they prolong the checkout process by implementing additional verification steps or asking the customers to provide too much information. Having a cybersecurity strategy is more important than ever, but not at the expense of your business. Introducing frictionless and positive customer experience will directly increase your sales as over 6 in 10 consumers in the APAC region are willing to pay more to companies that deliver excellent service. Customer expectations are changing and it is the end time to adapt to them.

How can you combine an efficient cybersecurity strategy and customer satisfaction?

Having proper anti-fraud defences in place is no longer an option; it is a must-have if you want to ensure your business keeps growing. The risk of cybercrime and fraudulent activities will only increase as more people gain access to the internet and companies from different sectors fully embrace digital transformation. New threats like application fraud, synthetic identity fraud, or IOT risks will continue to infiltrate our world, and it is the end time to join the fight.

Yes, it is more important than ever to know who our customers are and if they are legitimate actors to reduce the risks of your business being exposed to fraud. But this can be done without causing unnecessary customer friction. Cybercriminals and fraudsters continuously use new technological developments to update their schemes, so why not take a page from their book? New cybersecurity trends are being developed daily, with AI and machine learning taking the lead in transforming the sector. Cybersecurity solutions do not have to cause customer friction, and that should not even be an issue anymore. With all the technological advancements we can implement, not only that effective cybersecurity solutions can minimize user friction, but they can also be used to improve conversion rates and increase customer satisfaction.

While customer verification was an extensive and tiresome process in the past, with risk analysis mainly being conducted manually, that is no longer the case. These recent innovations offer the chance to gather additional information about the users from internal and external sources, reducing the need to request that data from them and having them go through long checkout processes. This also allows businesses to conduct automated risk analysis in real-time, effectively preventing fraud while minimizing the risk of unnecessary user friction. 90% of Chinese, 84% of Indians, and 81% of Singaporeans are willing to buy more from organizations that make interactions easy, and implementing effective cybersecurity strategy can help you achieve this.


We live in a fast-moving world, and technological developments will only continue making it faster, changing customers’ expectations in the process. They want what they want, and they want it now. If you can’t provide the service they want, your competitors will. Don’t let your anti-fraud defences become your downfall. Embrace the change new cybersecurity trends can bring to your business, and ensure you provide the best possible service while protecting your business from growing online dangers.

Best B2B eCommerce Platforms: Comparison Table

As a business owner, you can make your company known across the world through the use of the best B2B eCommerce platforms. Not only can they help you reach more customers, but they can do so in an easier way. If you’re looking for a B2B eCommerce platform that will allow you to create your online store, then this article is for you. In it, we will discuss nine popular B2B eCommerce platforms used by businesses today and how they differ from each other.

How to choose the right B2B eCommerce platform

When choosing a B2B eCommerce platform, you must consider the following:

Your business: What’s your main focus? Do you have a unique selling proposition (USP)? How long have you been in business, and what kind of growth do you expect to experience in the next year or two? If possible, try to choose a platform with capabilities that complement your strengths and weaknesses.

Your customers: What are their needs? Which products or services do they want to find on an eCommerce site? Be sure to choose a platform that offers features that allow for easy integration with other platforms, such as search engines, social media channels, and payment processors—this will be easier for potential customers who are already familiar with those platforms from other websites regularly.

The budget available for technology purchases: There may be some elements within each system that could be eliminated if cost savings were more important than efficiency gains (e.g., complex reporting modules). Consider hiring someone with technical expertise instead of purchasing software vs. hiring an employee whose salary would equal out over time anyway.


Spryker is a B2B eCommerce platform used by some of the largest companies in the world. Spryker is a multi-channel platform, meaning it has both B2B and B2C functionality.

Spryker allows you to manage all your company’s online stores from one place, saving time and money spent on maintaining multiple platforms. You can also quickly scale up as your business grows because you don’t have to worry about finding new software or updating it regularly as you would if you were using separate systems for each store channel (i.e. if we had two different platforms for each physical location).


BigCommerce is one of the most popular eCommerce platforms for small and medium-sized businesses. It has a free trial, a free plan that includes unlimited products, orders, and traffic, and an advanced feature set.

The platform’s user interface is modern, responsive, and easy to navigate. New features are being added to help merchants manage their stores more efficiently. BigCommerce also offers integrations with third-party apps like WooCommerce and Magento and support from its Community Experts community forum (though this last resource isn’t always available).

Shopify Plus

Shopify Plus is an enterprise-grade eCommerce platform that provides more than just simple storefront management. It’s a full suite of tools for B2B eCommerce businesses, including inventory management, order processing, shipping and fulfilment, marketing automation, and more. Shopify Plus can help you run your entire business—not just your web store.

Shopify Plus is ideal if you want to focus on your brand rather than managing the technical aspects of running an online store. Suppose you don’t have enough time or resources to learn all the ins and outs of an eCommerce platform. In that case, Shopify Plus is an excellent option for B2B retailers looking for a hands-off solution that makes it easy to start selling online without having to hire staff or learn how everything works in detail.


Magento is a flexible and scalable eCommerce platform that provides everything you need to create an online store. Magento is an open-source platform that is free to download and install.

The Magento community has created several add-ons for the platform. These modules allow users to add new features like social media integration, coupon codes, product reviews, and more.

Magento offers many integrations with other services, such as Google Analytics and PayPal payments.


OroCommerce is an eCommerce platform. It is designed for SMBs and enterprise businesses since it offers B2C and B2B sales features. It also includes a content management system (CMS), allowing you to create your online store easily.

This platform allows you to customize your website with unique themes, extensions, and over 200 third-party applications. This way, it will be easy for you to find a solution that fits your needs perfectly.

OroCommerce’s main advantage is its scalability: It can grow with your business as you need more advanced features or traffic on the site. The Oro team offers assistance during this process so that everything goes smoothly during each development step.

Shopify Enterprise

Shopify Enterprise is a powerful eCommerce platform that allows you to sell online, on social media, and in person.

Shopify’s products are engineered to help you build a business with their robust features, including inventory management and fulfilment, payment processing, and reporting tools. Shopify’s enterprise solutions are designed for companies who want to scale their businesses quickly by providing them with the best tools possible.

In addition, they have partnered with many Fortune 500 companies worldwide, such as Walmart or Kroger, making it easier for large organizations to manage multiple stores without having to deal with separate platforms (like BigCommerce).


Episerver might be the right choice for your business if you’re looking for an all-in-one solution. It comes with tools such as:

Content Management System (CMS) to help manage your website and online stores.

Analytics to track performance and customer interactions.

Search Engine Optimization (SEO) technology to improve your website ranking on Google search results.

Payment Gateway so customers can purchase goods or services securely online.

WooCommerce for WordPress

WooCommerce is a free eCommerce platform for WordPress. It’s the most popular eCommerce platform on the web, and it’s easy to use and customize. WooCommerce is also open source, which means it can be used to build almost any kind of online store you can imagine—from simple online storefronts to complex multi-channel marketplaces.

WooCommerce has been around since 2011 and has over 35 million downloads in its repository at alone. Many users prefer WooThemes’ paid versions of their plugins (including WooCommerce), which come with additional features such as advanced inventory management tools and customer support plans.

Squarespace for Commerce

Squarespace for Commerce is an excellent option for companies that need a simple eCommerce website. It’s easy to use, and it’s affordable. The platform has a limited feature set, but it’s a good choice for small businesses that want to sell products online.

Squarespace for Commerce offers a primary site builder with drag-and-drop functionality and templates designed specifically for eCommerce stores. It also integrates with Stripe and PayPal, so you don’t have to worry about setting up payment processing or inventory management tools.

To summarize

We hope that this comprehensive look at the top B2B eCommerce platforms has helped you to make a better decision about which platform is best for your business. If you’re still unsure, we recommend you take some time to research each of these platforms and compare them against each other based on the criteria that matter most to you. Remember to find one that fits your needs and grows with your needs over time as well.

More Business Opportunities Await Foreign Investors in the Philippines with Amended Foreign Investment Act

Liberalizing its economic policies and laws, the Philippines continues to transform itself as an attractive investment destination by allowing foreign investors who are considering doing business in the country to set up and fully own domestic enterprises through the recently-amended Foreign Investment Act or the FIA.

The law is a testament of the Philippine government’s resolve and commitment to further create a business-friendly landscape so that foreign investors can grow and flourish their businesses.

The law establishes the Inter-Agency Investment Promotion Coordination Committee (IIPCC), integrating all the investment promotion activities of various Philippine government bodies with the Board of Investments (BOI) as Secretariat. The IIPCC is set to convene its inaugural meeting on November 8, 2022.

Here is the rundown of the salient features and provisions of the FIA that would offer an array of business opportunities for foreign investors who are eyeing to invest in the Philippines.

FIA slashes barrier on foreign ownership of small and medium-sized enterprises

Amending the 30-year-old law, the new measure will ultimately improve foreign investments in the Philippines by providing less stringent requirements for potential foreign investors to enter the roaring Philippine market.

Primarily, the law allows – for the first time – foreign investors to set up and completely own domestic market enterprises categorized as micro-enterprises. The said economic measure gives way for foreign nationals to invest and fully-own micro and small domestic market enterprises with paid-up equity below the stated threshold but not below USD100,000.

The enterprises, however, must fulfill the following criteria: (1) use of advanced technology, (2) endorsed as startup or startup enablers by the lead host agencies according to Republic

Act (RA) No. 11337 or the Innovative Startup Act, (3) employ Filipinos as a majority of its direct employees.

The amended FIA also trims down the employment requirement for foreign investments in domestic market enterprises from 50 direct employees to now at least 15 Filipino employees. Notably, the amended FIA cuts the list of investment areas exclusively reserved for Filipinos, namely: defense-related businesses and small and micro domestic market enterprises with paid-up equity capital of below USD200,000, subject to certain exceptions.

In addition, foreigners engaged in export enterprises can secure 100 percent ownership in areas outside the Foreign Investment Negative List (FINL).

The inception of the Inter-Agency Investment Promotion Coordination Committee

Another major feature of the law is the establishment of the Inter-Agency Investment Promotion Coordination Committee (IIPCC), which is tasked to integrate the promotion activities to woo more foreign investors to do business in the Philippines. It also aims to achieve a world-class brand image for the country within the intertwined approaches of image building, investment generation, and investment servicing.

Ushering in a culture of cooperation, the law removes competition for investments among the investment promotion agencies (IPAs), resulting in the best possible locational choice for investments. The Secretary of the Department of Trade and Industry (DTI) shall be the Chairman of the IIPCC, while the BOI, headed by the Executive Director for Investments Promotion, shall be the IIPCC Secretariat which will provide administrative support to the said Committee.

As the leader of the country’s investment promotion agencies (IPAs), the BOI is set to play an important role in spurring the growth of the country’s economy. The revised law will foster a “culture of cooperation” among the IPAs by coordinating investment promotion efforts in the country.

Through the amended FIA, the IIPCC – led by DTI Secretary Alfredo E. Pascual – is resolute to make more business opportunities happen in the Philippines for foreign investors. Before the creation of the IIPCC, there was the Philippine Investment Promotion Plan (PIPP) – an informal grouping of 19 IPAs –  in which the BOI headed both the Steering Committee and Technical Working Group.

With these amendments, foreign investors are at an advantage. The FIA is an opportune moment for foreign investors to complement the recent full reopening of the Philippine economy. The said consequential economic law, along with the Public Service Act (PSA) and Retail Trade Liberalization Act (RTLA), and the Corporate Recovery and Tax Incentives Act (CREATE) makes the country’s business climate more conducive to foreign investments.

Catching Up With the Global E-invoicing and E-reporting Developments: The E-invoicing Exchange Summit Asia Re-Opens Its Doors in Singapore

E-Invoicing is no longer the future – it is happening now, and at lightning speed. All around the world businesses and governments are implementing systems for E-Invoicing and E-Reporting. In several countries it is mandatory already or will become soon. But only if implemented in an efficient and consistent way, the huge benefits e. g. real time early warning systems for fraud or cost saving invoicing and reporting processes will be fully realised.

As good as this sounds, there are challenges and hurdles still to overcome: How can processes be standardised and optimised across the globe? How can a truly global interoperability lead to benefits for all stakeholders?

The E-Invoicing Exchange Summit Asia will re-open its doors in Singapore on December 7 and 8, 2022. After a 3-year interruption experts and thought-leaders will share and discuss in-depth information about the recent developments and future trends in the field of E-Invoicing and E-Reporting – with a strong focus on APAC countries. A unique opportunity to get in personal contact with leading experts from governments and industries to elaborate and answer these questions.

Among others, these speakers have confirmed:
Leong Der Yao, Geok Seong Wah, and Bill Xiao, IMDA, Singapore – Craig Smith, Ministry of Business, Innovation and Employment, New Zealand – Ellen Cortvriend and Brecht Van Petegem, PwC, Belgium – Hiroyuki Kato, Digital Agency, Government of Japan and Atsuya Sugawara, Delegate of Japan Peppol Authority, Japan – Bimal Jain, Chairman of Indirect Tax Committee of PHD Chamber of Commerce, India – André Hoddevik, Secretary General, OpenPeppol – Todd Albers, Sr. Payments Consultant Payments, Standards and Outreach Group, Federal Reserve Bank of Minneapolis, USA – Ivo Moszynski, Chair Forum for Electronic Invoicing Germany and Richard Luthardt Member of the Board of European E-Invoicing Service Providers Association – Vinicius Pimentel de Freitas, Inter-American Center of Tax Administrations, Panama

Furthermore, the event will host two thought leading panel discussions addressing the Upcoming drivers and shifts for national E-Invoicing initiatives in Asia-Pacific and the Next steps for truly global interoperability.

Information on the E-Inavoicing Exchange Summit and special ticket rates valid for public sector and typical senders of a high volume of invoices:

APAC Insider Magazine Announces the Winners of the 2022 Australian Made Awards

United Kingdom, 2022– APAC Insider Magazine has announced the winners of the 2022 Australian Made Awards programme.

The inaugural edition of APAC Insider’s Australian Made Awards programme was launched to recognise an industry that is so often overlooked, those manufacturers, producers and creatives who invigorate the Australian market and ensure a continuation on multiple fronts.

On the eve of the official announcement Awards Coordinator Steve Simpson spoke on the success of the programme: “It has been a delight and a pleasure to reach out to those recognised in this inaugural awards programme. It has been an incredibly challenging couple of years for business around the world – manufacturing and production perhaps some of the hardest hit. With that in mind, I offer a sincere congratulations to all of those listed here and hope you all have a wonderful 2023 ahead.”

To find out more about these prestigious awards, and the dedicated professionals selected for them, please visit where you can view our winners supplement and full winners list.


Notes to Editors.

About APAC Insider

Here at APAC Insider, our approach reflects the innovative, dedicated and results-focused culture that has seen the Asia Pacific region become home to some of the most prominent industry-leading businesses in the world.

Playing host to more than one third of the world’s biggest businesses and boasting more Global 2000 members – among them worldwide brands such as Toyota, Samsung and Bank of China – than anywhere else on Earth, we are rapidly becoming the region to watch for those seeking the corporate world’s next big thing.

Exploring everything from business strategy and analysis to emerging trends and growth opportunities, APAC Insider is an invaluable resource for more than 160,000 leaders and decision makers looking to be kept fully informed of all the major developments in this most vibrant of business arenas.

We can see the great success of our platform with over 255,322 page views in the last 12 months averaging at 21,200 page views per month we can see our magazine is loved by many. The unique users average at an incredible 6,830 per month and we can’t thank our readers enough for the amazing support they give us to bring this content to you.

About AI Global Media

Since 2010 AI Global Media ( has been committed to creating engaging B2B content that informs our readers and allows them to market their business to a global audience. We create content for and about firms across a range of industries.

Today, we have 14 unique brands, each of which serves a specific industry or region. Each brand covers the latest news in its sector and publishes a digital magazine and newsletter which is read by a global audience. Our flagship brand, Acquisition International, distributes a monthly digital magazine to a global circulation of 108,000, who are treated to a range of features and news pieces on the latest developments in the global corporate market.

A New Dawn for Global Value Chain Industry Clusters to Start Industrial Transformation for the Philippines—World Bank Report

The World Bank (WB) said it is hopeful that the Philippines can take advantage of the new dawn for global value chain (GVC) industry clusters by repositioning itself and enhancing its participation in the global context of reconfiguration. Achieving this according to the WB requires no less than concerted effort from the government and private sectors and other key players by executing a plan that can guide investments from both domestic and foreign investors.

This was the statement of WB Country Director for Brunei, Malaysia, Philippines, and Thailand Ndiame Diop said as he opened the bank’s recent release of its report “A New Dawn for Global Value Chain Participation in the Philippines” as it eyes increasing the country’s GVC participation in a post–COVID-19 world. The report was released recently (October 6, 2022) at Fairmont Hotel in Makati and was attended by public and private participants actively involved in providing inputs and insights into the report.

“For the Philippines, this is an opening to embark on industrial transformation, reconfigure our exports into industry clusters and strengthen GVC participation; and make the Philippines a more attractive investment destination. We in the new administration are committed to steering the country back to its high-growth path and keeping the momentum toward an inclusive and resilient society,” Department of Trade and Industry (DTI) Secretary Alfredo Pascual said in his keynote message.

Secretary Pascual emphasized that the country is already having signs of an economic recovery as its Gross Domestic Product (GDP) grew by 7.4 percent in the second quarter of this year which marked the fifth consecutive quarterly growth since the start of 2021. “Challenges remain. Inflation stood at 6.9 percent this September and increasing costs and supply chain disruptions slowed the country’s economic momentum. Despite these challenges, the government remains focused on fully reopening the economy and its goals to reduce costs, stabilize prices and ensure health, food, and energy security,” he pointed out.

Pascual said that implementing an inclusive, sustainable, and resilient industrial policy is imperative for building a more competitive economy, and through science, technology, and innovation (STI) and essential digital technologies, industries will be better positioned to face competition in both domestic and export markets and pave the way for industrial transformation.

“We will prioritize four industry clusters to drive our country’s growth. The selection of these clusters is guided by the WB’s analytical report on the reconfiguration of GVCs last year and is affirmed through the report being launched today.” Pascual added.

The clusters are identified as (1) the Industrial, Manufacturing, and Transport (IMT) cluster; (2) Technology, Media, and Telecommunication (TMT) cluster; and (3) Health and Life Science (HLS) cluster. “We have added the Modern Basic Needs and Resilient Economy cluster, fostering economic resilience and long-term sustainable and inclusive growth. Supporting the country’s enhanced participation in reconfigured GVCs is a long-term pursuit that entails addressing structural, systemic, and sector-specific constraints to growth.”

“In terms of policies to make the Philippines an attractive destination for FDIs, we are implementing recently-passed laws or reforms that either ease foreign ownership restrictions or incentivize investments. These include the CREATE Act, amendments in the Public Service Act and Foreign Investment Act, and the Retail Trade Liberalization Act. CREATE, in particular, is supported by the Strategic Investments Priorities Plan (SIPP). Through SIPP, CREATE serves as a tool for innovation, digital transformation, and industrialization,” Pascual expounded.

The DTI is also advocating for legislation that will further enhance trade and industry development. “We are adopting export measures to promote domestic processing for greater value addition from our reserves of green metals, such as nickel, cobalt, and copper. These measures should complement our effort to enable 100% foreign equity in solar, wind, tidal, and other renewable energy (RE) projects by amending the Implementing Rules and Regulations of our Renewable Energy Act,” Pascual said.

The Secretary further added that the Board of Investments (BOI), of which he is Chairman, is working with the Commission on Higher Education (CHED) on the National Skills Mapping and Survey on Human Resource Development. “I am pleased to share that BOI is also promoting Academe-Industry Matching or “AIM!” These projects shall identify appropriate interventions to minimize skills mismatch at the regional or provincial level; they foster interest among university students to take future-ready programs.”

During the event, Souleymane Coulibaly, WB Program Leader for Equitable Growth, Finance, and Institutions and the author of the New Dawn report, presented the highlights of the GVC launching. He said that within the next six months ”the Philippines will have to address constraints to FDI attractiveness and facilitate trade through full implementation of key recent economic bills adopted. Within the next three years, the country has to promote investment and competition in logistics and connectivity services along with the development of an innovation ecosystem while advancing the digitalization agenda to boost manufacturing.”

When asked how the public would easily understand GVC during the panel discussion, Trade Undersecretary and BOI Managing Head Ceferino Rodolfo laymanized it by quipping “just look at my cellphone. The camera system is from the Philippines, LCD from the Philippines or Vietnam, chips from Indonesia or Thailand, and the software from the Philippines or Malaysia.”

“This New Dawn for GVC Participation in the Philippines presents a golden opportunity for the country. By working together, we can Make It Happen in the Philippines,” Undersecretary Rodolfo summed it up.

In attendance were officials and representatives from the government like DTI-BOI and DOF-FIRB along with corporate officers representing the manufacturing sector, especially automotive; the technology sector, with IT-BPO in particular, as well as the Health and Life Science sector.  

Everything You Need to Know About Instagram Reels

Our modern world revolves around the idea of virtual reality. Everything around us is turning online, and the business world is no exception. Online advertisement tools, for instance, came as the answer to how to grab the customer’s attention. Whether an Instagram reel, a logo maker, or a banner creator, they have all contributed to making the process of presenting the best image smoothly and easily.

In this article, we will cover Instagram reels, for no one can deny they are captivating.

Why Instagram launched Reels?

Instagram reels are short, light-hearted vertical videos inviting the audience to infinite scrolling. In 2019, New York Times reported, “Tik Tok will change the way your social media works.” The video app gained wide popularity in a short period, and in response to that came the Instagram release of reels in 2020.

Later on, reels proved to be a successful marketing tool. Indeed a less than one-minute video was the reason for many businesses to flourish. 

How to make professional Instagram reels

Instagram reels provide the chance for a good presentation of a product to customers, an influencer to the audience, or simply showing off creativity. A combination of factors plays a vital role in creating professional Instagram reels, and below are the top four tips to consider when making a reel:

Create engaging reels

Keeping the audience attached to a reel means the content presented is exceptional, and adding a catchy title is a good starting point. Plus, engaging with the viewers in the comments section would improve the content through the feedback received. All of which would make reels hook the viewers. 

Use music and voice-over

Since Instagram added many creative tools that have eased the process of creating a reel, the sound is an enjoyable feature to add. Audio mix and voice-over options are going handy in creating better content. Furthermore, making a product personalized with your voice on it is even available now. Eventually, adding audio to a reel will make it inviting, and music will spice things up! 

Add timed text to reels

In most cases, adding text will highlight a reel’s context. In this case, even for users who do not keep the sound on when scrolling reels, multiple-timed texts will raise a viewer’s curiosity to keep watching. Moreover, multiple-timed texts mean more focused content. So, even if customers mute reels, they will still be reading the texts presented.

Add graphics to reels

Instagram reel editor allows adding one picture only for five seconds. So, using the background of a reel is another kind of advertisement. Still, the choice of using a video editor outside Instagram is possible, and extending the picture time is probable. In brief, adding an image that best represents your business and letting it go viral would sound reasonable.

Advantages of using reels for business

Despite the many available marketing tools, reels proved to be one of the most effective tools. As a business owner, choosing reels to complement a marketing strategy will bring many advantages. We will list below the top three advantages: 

Keep a business as a top trend

Reels have become the medium for spreading trends because they make reaching new audiences and higher engagement possible. Therefore, a pro reel will push a brand to become a trend if we choose the content wisely.

For example, reels about the making process of a product proved to be a successful trend, which means embracing such a trend will push our product to be a top trend as well. Hence, keeping an eye on what is trendy will keep what we also present as a trend.

Raise a brand awareness

Reels have made a turning point in raising brand awareness. They are highly shared and interacted with. So, branding colors or the logo shared in a reel will reach a larger audience. Moreover, working with micro-influencers, which are more affordable and effective, has taken part in shedding light on the brand presented. All in all, reels are short, but the message they deliver lasts long.

Allow more freedom of editing

Unlike other features available on Instagram, reels come with many options. Changing the duration and speed (to slow it down or speed it up). Plus, alignment with other clips is just one click away when it comes to reels, as Instagram has broadened the choices of editing them quickly.

In a nutshell

Social media have provided different platforms to promote business with. Yet, Instagram has proved itself among the best platforms to choose from for advertisement. Reels have stood out as an exceptional marketing tool that gained international recognition in no time. Therefore, if you want your business to spread wider and have not stepped into the realm of reels, now is the time.

Celebverse Goes Live on Metaverse

~ World’s first and only virtual world dedicated to ‘Adam & EU’, an original human couple and parents of the human race.


Celebverse aims to empower celebs across all walks of life.



Celebverse, a leading virtual real estate offering exposure to the burgeoning industry via Metaverse, is now live. It is the world’s first and only virtual world dedicated to ‘Adam & EU’, an original human couple and parents of the human race. With its help, one can acquire virtual property / NFTs and take advantage of various virtual accurate estate-centric services.


Celebverse is the revolutionary step towards Metaverse, providing users with the privilege to purchase parcels around celeb’s Metaverse Land. With the freedom, individuals around the globe can now enjoy their choice neighbourhood and own their space in the Celebverse.


As the name suggests, Celebverse is a first-of-its-kind celeb-centric virtual world where users can have an exclusive experience of celeb cities, concerts, studios, events, gigs, fashion shows, merchandise, stores, and much more. And at the same time, embracing a world built with celebrities across all walks of life, top brands, top entrepreneurs, anyone and everyone from sports, performing arts, entertainment, literature, influencers, etc., are all celebrities here. 


Talking about it, Yogesh Dixit, Head of Operations, Asia Pacific, Celebverse said, “We aim to create an ecosystem where people can test their imaginations’ limits, enjoy the rights from minting a city to owning citizenship in their favourite celeb or brand city. Characters of Celebverse will be upto 85 percent of human reality. Driven by Web 3.0 solutions, users not just buy/trade or sell virtual assets but explore the unending possibilities supported by powerful, unshakable and trusted Smart Audit Contracts of the Ethereum Blockchain.”


Celebverse is a peer-to-peer network highly facilitated in the Metaverse. The platform offers detailed FAQs and a roadmap to acquisition. Citizens can own their NFTs, design, mint, buy, sell, and auction the land parcels. Newer celebs shall also benefit from having enthralling neighbors in the new world.

Wysa to Develop Hindi Version of World’s Most Popular Mental Health App

Plans to offer AI therapy chat over WhatsApp for easier access

Wysa, the world’s leading AI-based digital companion for behavioral health, today announces plans for a Hindi language mental health app, which will also be accessible through WhatsApp. ACT, a non-profit venture philanthropy platform, is supporting the initiative and is seeking a co-funding partner to propel the development further. The pilot is expected to commence in early 2023.

Says Neetha Joy, Director – Healthcare at ACT, “This is a first of a kind effort for us, to partner with an established player to make a proven solution accessible to millions. With 14% of our population suffering from mental health disorders and the pandemic exacerbating the lack of access to quality care, we need innovative solutions to address this chasm as there aren’t enough trained care providers to meet this latent demand.”

The first iteration of the Hindi app will guide users through cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT) exercises via text with a mobile phone-based conversational agent, to help users manage depression and anxiety. The app will guide users who show moderate to severe symptoms towards a clinical program and wellness tools to others.

Wysa is popular with employers and healthcare providers due to its scalability and low cost. Being an AI based app, Wysa overcomes the stigma and privacy concerns that often prevent people seeking help for their mental health. Wysa’s English mental health app has to date served approximately 528,000 people in India, primarily through large multinational employers and direct-to-consumer downloads.

Despite its popularity, the lack of Hindi language support remains a barrier in reaching diverse socio-economic groups and demographics. Offering an app in Hindi aims to reduce this access barrier, as a large proportion of the country is conversant in Hindi, and it brings a proven and tangible mechanism to increase communication and access for the vast majority of communities in India.

As well as overcoming the language barrier, making Wysa’s AI therapy conversational agent available through WhatsApp aims to appeal to people who prefer to avoid downloading new apps. There are 487 million WhatsApp users in India, making it the top messenger application in the country. WhatsApp is not only ubiquitous but also ensures high user engagement, as much of the population relies on it for regular communication, helping therapy dialogue become a part of everyday life.

“In our ambition to help 50 million users by 2025, we must go beyond the barriers of literacy and language to create access to mental health support for all. We’ve shown that therapy through Wysa appeals to those who are unwilling to come forward to talk about their mental health problems. We have a long way to go in overcoming mental health stigma in India, but with this Hindi version of our universally popular app, delivered through Whatsapp, is a great place to start,” said Jo Aggarwal, CEO and co-founder at Wysa.

“Ludwig Wittgenstein’s said ‘The limits of my language online mean the limits of my world.’ By providing mental health support in Hindi, one of the most popular languages used in India, via Whatsapp, a platform that most Indians have access too even in rural areas, we are lowering the digital divide, moving closer to our goal of providing scalable, equitable and accessible emotional support,” added Smriti Joshi, Chief Psychologist at Wysa.

“A large part of the population in India primarily speaks in Hindi, which poses a huge language barrier for availing mental health support in addition to the stigma. Wysa in Hindi has the capability of reaching not just the metro cities but also tier 2 and 3 cities where mental health issues are more prominent and less talked about. With the simplicity of this app and science-backed techniques such as CBT, it is hugely beneficial for Hindi speakers to get guidance in their native language. In my many years of working in the mental health field, I have never seen such an initiative and I am positive that it will benefit a lot of people.” says Dr. Roma Kumar, Clinical Psychologist and Senior Consultant at Sir Ganga Ram Hospital, New Delhi.

Worldwide Earthmoving Solutions

Heavy earthmoving equipment is essential across all industries. From agricultural applications, and the Building Industry to large-scale commercial and civil construction projects, Including predominantly the Mining industry. Earthmoving equipment contains a broad range of machinery that has the ability to excavate grade soil and rock in a fast, efficient, and functional way. Much of this equipment is designed to have multiple functions that make them indispensable on job sites. Leading supplier of new and used equipment, Australian International Equipment Group (AIEG) is a supplier in the Australian market with its fingers in all the pies domestically and across the world. Here we take inspiration from AIEG as it supplies Equipment that is the cream of the crop to its many customers.


The world of earthmoving equipment is an absolutely necessary and in-demand part of the present day. It is of utmost importance that businesses are able to receive the right equipment for their projects and beyond.

It’s not simply the equipment provided, but it is about the level of customer service and invaluable solutions that businesses can provide to their clients. Earthmoving equipment needs to be up to scratch and maintained in the most specialist way on the market. Earthmoving equipment is usually comprised of heavy-duty vehicles that are made for construction operations involving a plethora of earthworks. By moving large masses of earth to dig foundations for landscaping projects, excellent earthmoving equipment is absolutely imperative for every successful job.

Earthmoving equipment – or heavy trucks, heavy machines, construction equipment, engineering equipment, heavy vehicles, and heavy hydraulics – is precious and important for a glut of projects everywhere. As most earthmoving equipment uses hydraulic solutions as the primary source of motion, it is something that needs to be correctly created, operated, and maintained by professionals who deeply understand what they are doing. Rooted in experience, each business providing earthmoving equipment must weigh up its services so as to provide not only the best equipment but the most significant forms of customer service. This is how a business thrives, for itself and for its clients.

Earthmoving equipment includes excavators, loaders, Bulldozers, and much more within these categories. It is this range of equipment that is needed for a wide selection of plans and developments of the modern age. With the world as it is, it seems that the Asia-Pacific has the greatest market share for earthmoving equipment which accounts for more than two-fifths of the global market. Right behind the Asia-Pacific, Europe and North America have their sights set on equipment that can help to form a foundation for intricate construction advancements.

With increasing demands for better facilities and projects, there are huge growth opportunities for the construction industry – increasing the need for heavy machinery that can be used for earthmoving purposes.

This is where Australian International Equipment Group (AIEG) comes into play. As a seasoned team of professionals looking to make its mark on the industry, it is continuously adding to its roster of experience and equipment so that it can reach all kinds of clients that have elaborate, sophisticated, and complex needs. Not everything is straightforward in the earthmoving sphere, and so AIEG’s work is of major significance. With its ear consistently to the ground, AIEG has been improving the industry for many years – and that’s not about to change.

Wielding over 25 years’ experience in the industry – and all around the world – AIEG is making its mark on the realm of earthmoving equipment.

Providing new and used equipment and machinery to businesses around the globe, AIEG relishes its ability to build connections with its wide variety of clients. By finding and supplying the most appropriate equipment for each project, AIEG is able to ensure the greatest outcome, every time.

As AIEG sells new and used equipment, it highly values honesty and reliability for all. Its ability to deliver on target and in good time means that AIEG can offer its help in a highly desirable way – so that its customers feel heard and prioritised. With varied purchase options and detailed reports, AIEG can approach each client with a tailor-made experience that will leave them assured and fulfilled. Its specialist equipment doesn’t ever disappoint however if there were to be any changes in the client’s needs, AIEG has multiple tricks up its sleeve to be able to fix any issues or make any preferred changes.

With its on-site service and support, AIEG provides its earthmoving equipment support, devoted professionals, and solutions to clients from the initial consultation right through to operation and fittings. AIEG has a fine ability with regards to service, repair, fittings, and maintenance that will get clients on their feet in no time – regardless of the amount of experience they have in the industry, there is advice and equipment to suit them.

AIEG’s equipment repairs field service and customer support experts specialise in repairs and maintenance to a variety of mining and industrial equipment that will get any project up and running smoothly and swiftly.

Its infield planned maintenance and breakdown maintenance covers all kinds of earthmoving and mining equipment such as Caterpillar, Komatsu, Terex, Hitachi, Liebherr, and overburden drills.

Taking pride in its incredible team, AIEG supports each team member as they offer training, maintenance support, and field servicing – alongside any other training required. These exceptional services and solutions are always bespoke to the needs of the client, as no project is the same.

AIEG’s field service team assists with all onsite support of equipment, and it does so seamlessly, with every project in the forefront of its mind. This includes repairs, diagnostics, and servicing using up-to-date computer-based systems such as Electronic Technician (ET) and Service Information System (SIS) – it is this kind of commitment and expertise that makes AIEG stand out from the crowd.

The team provides focused labour-hire for short and long term hire – this entails the provision of on-site supervisors, diesel fitters, and boilermakers who all keep the well-oiled wheel turning. Its customer service is of the highest standard as the team has endless knowledge in the huge range of mining and industrial equipment across the board. No job is too big or too small for AIEG.

By offering its broad, client-focused solutions and guidance, AIEG’s quality control standards guarantee accomplishment and achievement from all angles. Its supply of machinery and equipment are all of gold-standard and top-tier materials and operating systems that make every job possible.

Exceeding all client expectations means a great amount to AIEG, as its mission is to make things easier for each client as they embark on their earthmoving journeys across the world and locally. Its values all circle around its passion of helping clients to feel valued, happy, and satisfied with their results. Its overall goal is to create and expand on relationships with clients so that it can understand their needs and requirements – with long-lasting relationships and returning clients as well as brand new connections and networks.

Credit One – Smarter Finance and Insurance are proud to be finance partners with Australian International Equipment Group and are able to offer low-rate finance solutions on the full Australian International Equipment Group range.

With over 40 leading Australian financiers and insurers, Credit One is able to provide AIEG’s valued clients with the ability to receive the most comprehensive range of finance and insurance goods attainable in the industry. Its finance is accessible, flexible, trustworthy, comprehensive, and efficient. AIEG’s finance options allow for online quotes with same-day approvals – you could save money with AIEG and Credit One combined.

AIEG is more than able to deliver high-excellence professional solutions, services, and maintenance to all of its clients. With offices across Australia including international offices in the UAE and Hong Kong.  AIEG has bases in developing hotspots that ensure a sturdy relationship and accessible services. Its consistency, swift service alongside its subject matter skills make complex – or even seemingly impossible – tasks entirely achievable. There to save the day AIEG grants its clients’ wishes, making their dreams a reality. AIEG is at its clients’ service and offers help at their earliest convenience.

Delivering results across diverse industries and sectors, AIEG guarantees distinction throughout the agricultural, construction, mining, and forestry areas. It offers well-known brands such as Caterpillar, Komatsu, Kobelco, John Deere, Case, Terex and much more so that clients can get everything they need to carry out their plans. For construction, AIEG supplies new and used equipment with assorted attachments,( Supplied from Roo Attachments. spare parts, and servicing on equipment from Skid Steers, Backhoes, Telehandlers, and mini Excavators in addition to new Excavators and Positack loaders as well as telehandlers.

The mining industry is a huge part of the modern world, and it is important for it to receive the highest functioning equipment. By listening to its customers AIEG utilises its decades of experience to evaluate and support the clients in a way that is unbeatable in the earthmoving sales Industry.

Managing director John Wells says, “We treat all our clients no matter how large or small as if they are our number one customer. We listen, We are honest and We act with Integrity. “

Australian International Equipment Group is a proudly Australian and Veteran-owned business. We are honoured to support those who have and those who continue to serve this great country. Respect, commitment, loyalty and sacrifice. Great ingredients for a successful business and we are honoured to be considered a part of the team”.

AIEG has received spotless reviews and testimonials from its clients and has been referred to many via word of mouth. One of its favourite testimonials, and featured on its website, is from Kira Seeley – Global Account Manager of WRL Shipping Pty Ltd ( – who says, “We have been working closely with John and the Team from Australian International Equipment Group Limited for over 10 years, providing all their freight forwarding needs. They are great to work with and are prompt and friendly. I highly recommend Australian International Equipment Group to any prospective equipment buyer.”

APAC Insider is proud to present AIEG with the respected title of Best Earthmoving Equipment Supplier 2021. You could say AIEG is truly ground-breaking.


For business enquiries, contact Blake Burgess, National Sales Manager from Australian International Equipment Group Pty Ltd on their website – or on their social media profiles:

Q4 2022

Welcome to the Q4 edition of APAC Insider Magazine, your quarterly source for all of the latest news and updates from across the Asia Pacific region.

APAC Insider Magazine brings you another issue reflecting the last quarter. There have been huge shifts in many industries, as the world reacts to a myriad of situations. We can’t predict all outcomes but we can certainly take control of our own businesses to impact our clients’ lives for the better. Finding security and order in a world of uncertainty, these companies and individuals alter our perception of life – not just business.

These companies are all offering insight, innovation, and answers to problems for the foreseeable future. They have come a long way and deeply value their loyal customers, as well as newcomers to their services.

Customer service is just as important as the solutions provided by businesses, and Australian International Equipment Group Pty Ltd is bringing everything together as it wins Best Earthmoving Equipment Supplier 2021. Australian International Equipment Group is truly stunning us as it continues to provide functional and reliable earthmoving solutions – all whilst taking care of its many clients.

We are proud to present Australian International Equipment Group alongside a variety of other businesses as they all win such prestigious accolades. Unparalleled in their fields, we enjoy their unique stories.

We hope you enjoy this issue; we wish you all the best for this coming quarter, and we can’t wait to welcome you back for Q1 of APAC Insider Magazine, 2023.

Business Expansion Guide For Entrepreneurs

Thanks to the advancing technology and communication infrastructure, business expansion has become easier. Whether setting up a new branch in the North American region or planning to invest in a new Italian startup, there is an ocean of opportunities for you to explore.

For instance, if you buy stakes in an innovative Italian startup, you can associate your brand name with it. Additionally, these types of investments also make you eligible for residency-by-investment programs and avail citizenship. If this idea seems lucrative, you can contact Bersani Law Firm & Partners for assistance in learning more about the investor visa and citizenship requirements.

Nevertheless, for a successful business expansion (regional or international), you must have an effective plan in hand. And that’s precisely what we’ll discuss in this article. So, let’s cut to the chase.

  • Understanding Market Demand

The first and most critical step of every business expansion is to study the market you are willing to invest in. There is no point in investing if there is a lack of demand for your product or service. Furthermore, consumer preferences vary from country to country. Conducting proper market research will help in making a well-versed decision.

For instance, the Italian government announced an investment of $291 billion in transportation infrastructure. It will facilitate the logistics and transportation businesses in the upcoming years. So, you can make investments in the freight or shipping industry to expand your business operations.

  • Focus On Brand USP

If you are reluctant to switch to a brand new industry, you can focus on setting yourself apart from the competition. Showcase your target audience the brand USP and encourage them to connect with you.

Now, here’s the catch- Do not show your customers what you have to offer. Instead, explain why and how your product or service will add value and convenience to their life.

Believe it or not, it will surely help your brand build a loyal customer base all across the globe.

  • Recruit Local Talent

Hiring local talent is an age-old tactic to boost brand recognition in a new location. It serves two purposes; businesses get to learn about the local culture and market. Secondly, recruiting a local team is more affordable than transferring a few members from your existing team. It ensures that productivity is not hampered with the whole business expansion scenario.

In addition, local talent will add diverse educational backgrounds and proficiency in the language to your business. Thereby, you’ll be able to establish a robust relationship with your customers.

  • Look For Other Investment Opportunities

Bear in mind that business expansion is not restricted to your brand. Instead, you can look for other investment opportunities available in the market and partner with them. For instance, you could invest in Government bonds to enhance brand recognition.

Or, you could become an angel investor of newly found startups and assist them with their financial needs. It will allow you to tap into the new markets and build your business with ease.

To Sum It All Up

Business expansion is a significant decision and must be taken after careful consideration. Hopefully, this short guide will help you cover the key areas of expansion and streamline the further steps.

How Low-Code Development Can Power Healthcare Industry?

A developmental environment that is used to create application software via a graphical user interface is provided by a low-code development platform. There might be two scenarios: a low code platform would require additional coding for specific situations or produce entirely operational applications.

During and after the pandemic, the healthcare departments needed an upgrade. But some companies were left with a siloed legacy problem. How should they keep up if they neither have the time nor the budget to do so? Well! low code development is the answer and the best possible solution. By research, low code is now the best alternative to custom coding. Further details on low code development for Healthcare Industries are mentioned down below.

Healthcare Professionals Get Involved in Production

Low Code platforms are pretty simple; even people with zero coding experience can handle them. In the healthcare department, this plus point is of great importance because it would allow the doctors, nurses, paramedical staff, nutritionists, and other medical staff to be involved in the architectural development of the system and its production.

The medical staff is the one who knows more about how things work. So, shouldn`t they be the ones creating the system? Sometimes because of their field, it gets difficult to do such things, but low-coding platforms have made it easy because there are no coding skills required to do the task.

Cut Down on Costs and Maintenance

When a health care department uses other platforms, it strains the IT of the system. Low code reduces that strain and the overall costs of the software development life-cycle. These solutions allow you to deploy a minimum viable product or a working prototype quickly, efficiently, and with minimal coding. And in the meantime, you get more ideas and validation to support your idea to secure some potential investments.

As mentioned earlier, low code systems don`t need a professional to do the job, and anyone can handle it. This means it would reduce the effort and cost of hiring a professional to do the job. You can do it, requiring fewer skills, which will reduce the overall costs and save you lots of money.

Fast Development

The low-code approach reduces engineering effort by helping junior developers and senior engineers work more efficiently.

Because boilerplate code, reusable components, and pre-built templates to speed up development are provided by these platforms. In easy words, instead of making an application from scratch, you are using building blocks to make it. It`s not a head-to-toe development of software. You can always add some solutions to your platform. Low code systems provide faster answers to problems if we compare them to other systems. They work efficiently well, and better than the other platforms of the same type.

Architectures are Easily Scalable

When you are creating a healthcare developmental application, at the start, you have no idea about the number of people using it. It is a factor that depends on marketing. If you have marketed well and the app gets popular. This results in an influx of healthcare professionals using it, and then you will have to make some changes according to people`s feedback. In low code platforms, it is not that difficult to make some changes as the system`s architecture is easily scalable. Most enterprises are now using low code platforms because they are easily scalable.

Replacing the Legacy Modules

Many companies and enterprises in the Healthcare Department are still stuck with the isolated legacy system. Updating and adding new features to this system is an actual headache. This is why they need to shift the low code developmental platforms.

The low code platforms replace the legacy modules because it is easy to add new stuff while using the low code platforms. They make life easy.

Wrapping It Up!

The low code platforms are all about reducing the costs of engineering and professional coders. They power the healthcare industry by involving healthcare professionals in the architectural development of the system. Once developed, the system is not difficult to modify and is easily scalable. The low-code platform does not require some high-tech skills to get the job done. Even if you have never done coding before in life, you can handle it. The low code development platform is the only option to make the process faster, cheaper, and accessible to people outside of IT.

Best Boutique Dispute Resolution Firm – South East Asia

Having extensive experience, Judy Lim Pek Eng decided to set up on her own nearly three decades ago and hasn’t looked back since! We find out more from Judy, and her legal associate Joshua Wu Kai-Ming, in the wake of the firm being recognised in the APAC Legal Awards 2022.


Founded by Judy Lim Pek Eng in 1997, P. E. Lim is a boutique civil litigation law firm based in Petaling Jaya.

Throughout her 25 plus years in legal practice, Judy has appeared at all levels of the courts in Malaysia and is regularly engaged as a counsel in appellate matters in the Court of Appeal and Federal Court.

With a Bachelor of Laws (Hons) degree from the University of London, she went on post LL.B to obtain her Certificate of Legal Practice.

Having chambered at Messrs. Chan & Kiru, under the tutelage of Dato’​ K Kirubakaran, Judy was called to the Malaysian Bar in 1992. She was also a legal associate at Wan Haron Sukri & Nordin and Chung & Chan before deciding to venture into sole proprietorship by setting up P. E. Lim.

“My practice areas include commercial law, construction law, family law, insolvency law, property law, succession law, and tort law,” Judy enthuses.

The firm has more than 100 clients and have completed more than 800 cases since the firm was established 25 years ago.

Judy is joined at her practice by Joshua Wu Kai-Ming, who came onboard in March 2021 following his role as a Legal Associate at Josephine, L K Chow & Co.

Joshua obtained a Bachelor of Laws (LL.B), Upper Second Class Honours, from the University of London in 2017. He then went on to pursue the Certificate in Legal Practice and completed it in 2018. He was a Pupil-in-Chambers at Sreenevasan and was called to the Malaysian Bar in 2019.

“As a civil litigator, I am passionate about public interest litigation,” Joshua states. “Specifically matters involving administrative law and constitutional law.”

Joshua is experienced in administrative law, commercial law, employment and industrial relations law, insolvency law, family law, and succession law.

  1. E. Lim combines litigation experience with youthful dynamism.

Recently, P. E. Lim was recognised in the APAC Legal Awards 2022 and bestowed with the prestigious title of Best Boutique Dispute Resolution Firm – South East Asia and the future for Judy and the firm is looking bright!

For business enquiries, contact Judy Lim Pek Eng from P. E. Lim on their website –

Best Business Law Firm 2022 – Greater Western Sydney & Client Services Excellence Award 2022

It’s not always easy to be innovative in the world of corporate law, but that is just what Zohra Ali has done – and continues to do – with the launch of her boutique ‘online-only’ law practice, Corporate Legal. We look at how the firm has fared over the last three years since its inception, in the wake of it being recognised in the APAC Legal Awards 2022.


Founded in July 2020 by Zohra Ali, Corporate Legal is a law firm with a difference in the fact that it is designed to be the ‘one-stop shop’ for small to medium-sized businesses in Australia, providing all their business legal service’s needs, and operating entirely digitally, reserving face-to-face interactions for customer relationship-building purposes only.

Having worked for more than five years at a boutique law firm, Zohra discovered that there was a large gap between the service needs of customers and what they were getting from their law firm partners. Zohra also discovered the potential for leveraging systems and processes using the technological advancements of the last decade to provide legal services to customers at a lower cost.

These realisations led to Zohra’s motivation to launch a law practice that would make customer service the number one goal in servicing clients and doing so at a low cost. “By operating digitally, Corporate Legal has become easily accessible to its clients,” she elaborates. “It has, since its launch, serviced its clients to the highest standard and to date has a 100% 5-star review score on Google.”

Having been an active member of the legal profession since 2011, Zohra has developed a wealth of knowledge spanning across several legal practice areas, including debt recovery, business and contract disputes, conveyancing, leasing, estate planning, and probate and administration.

With her area of specialty being corporate legal services, Zohra also has extensive experience in civil litigation matters, and complex commercial litigation matters involving property, deceased estates, and family provision claims.

Her educational background comprises of a Bachelor of Social Science and a Bachelor of Laws completed with Western Sydney University, a Graduate Diploma in Legal Practice completed with Australian National University, and a Master of Laws (Business Law) obtained from Southern Cross University.

Zohra’s innovative thinking has had a significant impact on the growth of the business. By having an innovative approach to developing systems and processes, by which Zohra constantly assesses how things be done more efficiently and effectively using systems and processes, Corporate Legal has been able to more than double its revenue within the first two years of business.

Just because the firm operates digitally, it doesn’t operate less effectively. Zohra tells us that it provides top notch customer service, with a specific setoff KPIs relating to customer service that are rigorously met every single time, with every single client. These objectives centre around being polite and courteous, responding to missed calls and emails within a specific period, providing honest advice, and always listening to the customer.

“I believe in always being kind, polite and respectful of people,” Zohra enthuses. “It is very easy to be kind, and sometimes we forget that when servicing customers in the legal world. Lawyers generally love to problem solve and often go into problem-solving mode immediately not realising that by doing this, we sound like we are rushing the customer off the phone, and making the customer not feel listened to.”

Moving forward, Zohra is fully committed to providing the same stellar corporate legal services she has become renowned for, always assessing and improving wherever she can.

“Constant feedback from clients ensures that Corporate Legal can continue to improve its customer service levels and fill any ‘gaps’ which may be identified,” she says. “This is my commitment to my clients.”

Recently, the firm was rewarded for its diligence and dedication by being recognised in the APAC Legal Awards 2022 and crowned with not one, but two prestigious titles. First, it receives the Best Business Law Firm 2022 – Greater Western Sydney, and secondly, it gains the much-coveted Client Services Excellence Award 2022.


For business enquiries, contact Zohra Ali from Corporate Legal on their website –

Best Small Business Employment Law Advisory – Malaysia

Opening its doors in January 2021, the past year has been a whirlwind for Irene Wong Chambers, a fledgling business law firm. Irene Wong Chambers has emerged as one of the leading small law firms in the nation, with clients turning to the firm for its expertise and unique perspective.

Irene Wong Chambers (IW Chambers) is, in essence, a one woman show. Led by Irene Wong, from whom it takes its name, the small business law firm offers an array of services, ranging from business advisory to dispute resolutions. The company firm has extensive experience in advising SMEs and businesses on employment matters, contracts and licensing, shareholders and partnership issues, breach of fiduciary duties, recovery of monies fraudulently misappropriated and debt recovery. IW Chambers takes pride in its ability to offer such services to an exceptional standard whilst remaining competitive in cost.

‘IW Chambers works to resolve business legal troubles as efficiently and cost-effectively as possible to enable business owners to return their full attention to operating their businesses successfully,’ Irene explains. ‘No one wants to spend time working on a business, they much rather work in the business and grow it.’

Indeed, this is why clients turn to IW Chambers – they want expert advice and guidance that will empower them to get back to what they do best. IW Chambers endeavours offer its clients excellent value for its services, providing them with tried and tested solutions that are guaranteed to cultivate efficacy. The highly focussed practice leverages advanced technology in order to supply clients with the knowledge and sophistication of a large law firm, but with the one-on-one attention and value that only a small firm can offer.

Much of this expertise links to Irene’s impressive resume; she has spent over 15 years aiding businesses, resulting in her unique ability to view an issue from all perspectives. Irene notes, ‘having practiced in larger law firms, I have vast experience in advising and litigating many complex business-related matters for listed companies, private companies and individuals. I routinely handled cases involving business partners and employees’ dishonesty, breach of fiduciary duties, shareholders and boardroom disputes, recovery of monies fraudulently misappropriated, emergency injunctive reliefs, breach of contracts and debt recovery.’

Consequently, her approach to business has been shaped drastically by such experiences. Her style has become one of innovation, transparency, and accessibility, with client-centricity being the fundamental element within her method. Simply, Irene is a forward-thinking problem solver who always has her clients’ best interests in mind; she knows that no two clients or situations are the same.

‘My clients rely on me to be a highly-efficient and strategic voice of reason as well as their legal expert. They appreciate having my attention and services rather than from some junior lawyers’ she adds.

The company’s unprecedented success over the past year has allowed Irene to focus on expanding IW Chambers the future, for which she is incredibly ambitious. But rest assured, Irene will still be very much hands-on and the firm will continue to leverage on technology to help better serve their clients.

IW Chambers hopes to see more businesses – particularly young solopreneur and entrepreneur as well as start-ups – thrive, therefore, the firm has started to offer Outside General Counsel Services, where it takes on the role of an external general counsel. In this capacity, IW Chambers advises clients on operational legal issues as they arise, provides assistance with contracts, customer or vendor disputes, employee issues, and legal compliance matters. Of course, in true IW Chambers style, the rates are negotiable depending on the client’s individual needs.

For business enquiries, contact Irene Wong from Irene Wong Chambers via email – [email protected] or on their website –

A Guide to Business Continuity: Implementing a Plan For Your Business

What Is Business Continuity? 

Business continuity is a company or organisation’s ability to retain and maintain essential business functions during a disaster as well as how well it can recover from the situation. By ensuring that there are sufficient business continuity resources in place, an organisation can prevent serious interruptions to mission-critical operations and services.

Why Is Business Continuity Needed?

Having a business continuity plan means your business can react and adapt to situations and interruptions, such as cyber attacks, extreme weather events, power outages, political unrest and more. Having a plan in place means financial losses can be avoided, time can be saved and reputations protected, which is beneficial to your business, employees and customers. 

Protecting reputation and third-party relationships 

Businesses need to prevent unwanted downtime to ensure that critical functions and services aren’t affected. Any suppliers or external stakeholders that your organisation works closely with will also suffer the consequences of business disruptions, meaning your reputation is at risk too. A good response to interruptions will instill confidence in your brand and could attract new business and solidify your relationship with current clients and service providers.

Protecting employee well-being

Without business continuity, communication could break down as employees  scramble to try and restore order, while no one will know who to report to or what actions need to take place which could affect the well-being of the employees under your care. Every employee should know how to move forward with operations in an emergency, with a clear hierarchy structure in place. Pre-planning and preparedness are crucial when the unexpected happens. 

Ensuring regulatory standards are met

Globally, there are corporate governance regulations that require directors and key stakeholders to exercise reasonable care, skill and diligence to mitigate risks facing an organisation. With an effective business continuity plan in place, you can ensure you’re meeting the requirements of a growing body of legislation.

What Is a Business Continuity Plan?

A business continuity plan is a document used by organisations to outline procedures to follow during emergency disruptions. This comprehensive document covers a wide range of contingency plans to ensure that all areas of your business are covered, including business processes, assets, human resources and business partners to ensure a consistent and effective response. 

How Do You Begin a Business Continuity Plan?

The first step is to conduct a full Business Impact Assessment (BIA) which predicts the consequences of a significant disruption to your business processes and clarifies the potential losses that could be incurred in each circumstance. 

Please see this guide for a comprehensive list of what to include in a BIA. 

Writing Your Plan: Step By Step Instructions 

  1. Identify your business-critical processes — Critical business processes are those necessary for the survival of the company in the case of loss of revenue, customer service interruption or reputation damage. E.g. Manufacturing — what you would need to keep your production line going. Finance — how to recover important documents that contain sensitive information. IT — is home working feasible for your business?
  2. Specify the target recovery time for these processes — How long would it take for the loss of a business-critical process to do irreparable damage to your business? Your target recovery time for each process you identified should be within this window. Determine how long you could tolerate a disruption: this is known as a recovery time objective (RTO). Your business continuity plan should enable you to mitigate disruptions within this time window.
  3. Define the specific resources needed for each process — Once you’ve identified how long you’ll need to restore a process, you’ll need to outline everything you’ll need to do so, and plan within that time frame. You could split this into internal resources (key people in your organisation, passwords, office space, specialist equipment) and external resources (e.g. supplies, transportation). Along with identifying how readily available they can be, and for how long you’ll need them.
  4. Describe the steps needed to restore each process — If your business is disrupted by an IT failure, fire, flood or an extreme weather event, what is your plan to address this? Devise a backup plan for each key operation you have, detailing who to contact, what resources you’ll need, and how much you might need to spend in order to restore each process.
  5. Decide on a schedule to update the information — Once you’ve compiled the above 4 points, you’ll have a strong business continuity plan that you can action. But it won’t be bulletproof forever. As your business evolves, so will the technology it uses and the relationships it has. Therefore, you need to plan ways to keep the information up-to-date. It might be that you decide on a regular date that the whole plan needs to be revisited, whether that’s yearly, quarterly or even monthly. Alternatively, you might decide it’s better to update small elements of the plan as and when they change: e.g. if a password to a critical folder is changed, there’s someone in your organisation who is responsible for updating your business continuity plan accordingly.

Remember The 4 P’s of Business Continuity Planning 

Use the four P’s below when reviewing the initial draft of your business continuity plan to ensure you’ve considered the impact on each of them at every stage

People — This covers your staff, customers and clients.

Processes — This includes the technology and strategies your business uses to keep everything running.

Premises — Covers the buildings and spaces from which your business operates.

Providers — This includes parties that your business relies on for getting resources, like your suppliers and partners.

APAC Insider Magazine Announces the Winners of the 2022 APAC Legal Awards

United Kingdom, 2022- APAC Insider Magazine has announced winners of the 2022 Legal Awards.

Now in its seventh year, the APAC Insider Legal Awards recognises the efforts of law firms and legal advisors throughout the Asia Pacific Region. After a difficult couple of years during the COVID-19 pandemic, the legal sector has rallied to regain lost ground, and arguably come out the other side stronger.

On the eve of the announcement, Awards Co-ordinator Holly Blackwood commented on the success of the deserving winners: “I would like to congratulate all of the winners in this year’s Legal Awards. After another difficult year in many industries, these businesses have continued the thrive under pressure. We all wish you the best for the coming year ahead and can’t wait to see what you do next!”

To find out more about these prestigious awards, and the dedicated professionals selected for them, please visit where you can view our winners supplement and full winners list.




Notes to Editors


About APAC Insider

Published quarterly, APAC Insider endeavours to bring you the latest need-to-know business content and updates from across the Asia Pacific Region.

Keeping pace with a vast array of ever-changing sectors thanks to regular contributions from some of the region’s foremost corporate professionals, APAC Insider is home to the very best news, features and comment from the people and institutions in the know.

About AI Global Media

Since 2010 AI Global Media has been committed to creating engaging B2B content that informs our readers and allows them to market their business to a global audience. We create content for and about firms across a range of industries.

Today, we have 14 unique brands, each of which serves a specific industry or region. Each brand covers the latest news in its sector and publishes a digital magazine and newsletter which is read by a global audience. Our flagship brand, Acquisition International, distributes a monthly digital magazine to a global circulation of 85,000, who are treated to a range of features and news pieces on the latest developments in the global corporate market.

Alongside this, we have a luxury-lifestyle magazine, LUXlife, which appeals to a range of high-net-worth individuals, offering them insight into the latest products, experiences and innovations to ensure they can live the high-life to its fullest.

How Much Does Business Electricity Cost?

Running a business can be a very stressful enterprise. Beyond trying to provide the best possible product or service, you have a plethora of aspects to worry about; your expenses are one. Here’s our guide on business electricity prices and how to handle them.

How Does Business Electricity Pricing Work?

Business electricity pricing, like domestic, is primarily based on consumption, but the greatest factor that influences business electricity pricing is the size of your business.

Your bill is based on a unit rate per kilowatt-hour (kWh) and can either be calculated on a fixed or variable rate tariff.

The Average Price For Business Electricity

These are the current business electricity prices UK customers may get, on average:

Business Size

Average Annual Electricity Usage (kWh), Daily Standing Charge, Average Price Per kWh (GBP)


5,000 – 15,000, 39p , 44p


15,000 – 25,000, 33p, 44p


25,000 – 50,000, 47p, 43p

The prices in the UK are quite high compared to other parts of the world:

Country – Average Price Per kWh (USD)

China- $0.084

Australia – $0.172

New Zealand – $0.153

India – $0.092

Malaysia – $0.070

Philippines – $0.165

What Influences Business Energy Prices?

Energy markets can be highly complex, here are some factors that influence business energy prices:

Currency – Many countries import electricity and gas, and electricity prices are linked to gas prices, so the price of gas and electricity is influenced by the exchange rate of the currencies in the two countries involved.

Temperature – When there is a measurable change in temperature, energy prices may change too. For example, if the temperature falls then the demand for gas and electricity can go up, which will inevitably increase prices.

Global events – Global events such as conflict or natural disasters in countries that produce oil or gas can significantly hinder production and accessibility, which then pushes the price up.

What Is A Good Rate For Business Electricity?

Determining whether a rate is ‘good’ largely depends on the size of your business. It’s best to compare different suppliers and look at the amount you’re spending on electricity, in conjunction with your monthly revenue, to determine whether your current rate is befitting.

How To Reduce Your Business’s Energy Bill

In order to reduce your energy bill, you can employ most of the same practices that you would if you were trying to do the same in your home. Try the following:

Switch to energy-efficient appliances – Buying energy-efficient equipment is a once-off cost that potentially could pay off well in the future. You might not see the benefit of doing this immediately, so bear in mind that this is more of a long-term solution.

Develop a culture of sustainability – Apart from investing in energy-efficient equipment, you need to communicate the benefits of operating sustainably to your staff, the most pertinent benefit being bettering your financial health. This could also come in the form of implementing simple work policies such as switching off equipment that is not in use.

Perform frequent energy audits – As the name suggests, an energy audit is the assessment of your business’s energy consumption, needs, and efficiency. After the audit, you will be provided with bespoke recommendations to better your energy efficiency.

Frequently Asked Questions

When Should I Switch Energy Suppliers? There is no right or wrong answer when it comes to switching energy suppliers. However, with commercial gas and electricity, there is generally a limited timeframe in which you can do this, primarily because of the nature of energy contracts.

Commercial energy suppliers will typically differ very slightly in terms of their rates and energy prices rarely drop. So, if there happens to be a drop in price, then capitalising upon it to lock the price in may be a good idea.

Is Business Energy Cheaper Than Residential? If you’re pondering whether your business should switch to being fully remote, then you might be contemplating whether business energy is cheaper than residential. If using average unit rates for reference, businesses pay substantially less. Additionally, you’ll find that the larger the business, the lower the unit rate. However, there are other factors to consider.

Do Businesses Get Support For Energy Bills? Luckily for businesses, some energy suppliers offer schemes or grants geared towards improving your energy efficiency, which can, in turn, decrease your energy bill. A prime example would be the provision of subsidies for the purchase costs of energy-efficient equipment.

CGTN: China Offers Solutions to Fix Deficit in Global Security, Development

Development and security are the common concerns of all countries, the pursuit of which is hampered by once-in-a-century global changes intertwined with the unprecedented pandemic.

In the Uzbek city of Samarkand, leaders from Shanghai Cooperation Organization (SCO) member countries along with multiple observer countries and dialogue partners are meeting in person from September 15 to 16, setting an example of how countries can better work with each other in the face of global challenges.

Having committed to building a community of a shared future, Chinese President Xi Jinping has proposed a series of initiatives for global development and security, contributing Chinese wisdom to solving the pressing problems now facing mankind. His proposals have been greeted with praise from the international community, not least the SCO countries.

Common security, development for all

At April’s Boao Forum for Asia, President Xi proposed the Global Security Initiative (GSI), an idea taking security as the guiding principle, mutual respect as the fundamental requirement, indivisible security as the important principle and building a security community as the long-term goal, in order to foster a new type of security that replaces confrontation, alliance and a zero-sum approach with dialogue, partnership and win-win results.

During his bilateral meetings with world leaders in Samarkand, the Chinese president reiterated that countries should support each other on issues concerning sovereignty, independence, territorial integrity and other core interests, echoing the GSI.

Xi also urged efforts to safeguard the security interests of the region as well as the common interests of developing countries and emerging markets during his talk with Russian President Vladimir Putin, saying China and Russia need to enhance coordination under multilateral frameworks including the SCO, the Conference on Interaction and Confidence Building Measures in Asia and BRICS to promote solidarity and mutual trust among the various parties.

“In the face of changes of the world, of our times and of history, China will work with Russia to fulfill their responsibilities as major countries and play a leading role in injecting stability into a world of change and disorder,” Xi told Putin.

At the General Debate of the 76th Session of the UN General Assembly in 2021, Xi put forward the Global Development Initiative (GDI), which emphasizes openness, coordination and sharing.

Xi, during his bilateral meetings in Samarkand, repeatedly voiced China’s willingness to expand cooperation with other countries and build stronger synergy between respective development strategies so as to help achieve common development and prosperity.

Leaders endorsed the GSI and GDI during their talks with Xi. Kyrgyz President Sadyr Zhaparov on Thursday said he viewed both as important initiatives for promoting world peace and development, while President of Turkmenistan Serdar Berdimuhamedov said the initiatives were conducive to achieving the sustainable development goals of the United Nations.

Usher in a better future

This year marks the 30th anniversary of diplomatic ties between China and Kazakhstan as well as between China and Uzbekistan. On Wednesday and Thursday, President Xi paid state visits to both two countries, bringing bilateral ties to a higher level.

Both Uzbekistan and Kazakhstan have been a part of the ancient Silk Road linking Asia and Europe. Now the Belt and Road Initiative proposed by Xi has carried forward that spirit across the Eurasian continent, bringing SCO members even closer.

The import and export of goods between China and Kazakhstan totaled $25.25 billion in 2021, up 17.6 percent year on year, and the trade volume between China and Uzbekistan amounted to $8.05 billion in 2021, up 21.6 percent from 2020, showing bilateral cooperation has withstood the test of the pandemic and shown strong resilience.

The unbreakable friendship between China and Kazakhstan will contribute to the growth of positive and progressive forces in the world and to the building of a community with a shared future for mankind, Xi told Kazakh President Kassym-Jomart Tokayev on Wednesday.

Tokayev hailed Xi’s visit as a new milestone in the history of Kazakhstan-China relations, adding the BRI has become an important engine driving the building of a community with a shared future for mankind.

Uzbek President Shavkat Mirziyoyev on Thursday called the Chinese president’s state visit “historic,” saying it would help consolidate the traditional friendship between the two countries, chart a course for future cooperation, and elevate the bilateral partnership to a new height featuring new vitality and new prospects.

Xi further noted that China and Central Asian countries have a shared future and a deep stake in each other’s security and stability, and called for efforts to building a more just and equitable international governance system during talks with other leaders.–1dmIiiQWTeg/index.html

CGTN: China Takes Concrete Action in Boosting Global Economic Recovery

At the recently concluded Samarkand summit of the Shanghai Cooperation Organization (SCO), China expressed its readiness to work with the global countries to deepen practical cooperation in areas such as trade and investment, infrastructure, and maintaining the stability of supply chains.

Efforts are already under way. The International Forum on Resilient and Stable Industrial and Supply Chains began in Hangzhou, capital of Zhejiang Province in east China on Monday.

Serving as a platform where global industrial insiders can boost exchanges and cooperation, the forum aims to improve the resilience and stability of global industrial and supply chains by promoting experience sharing and building a broad consensus, according to Zhejiang Provincial Government.

Vital guarantee for promoting world economy

China attaches great importance to maintaining the resilience and stability of industrial and supply chains and has called on the global society to jointly build and share global industrial and supply chains on many occasions.

In his congratulatory letter to the forum, Chinese President Xi Jinping also noted that maintaining the resilience and stability of global industrial and supply chains is a vital guarantee for promoting the development of the world economy and serves the common interests of people globally.

China will unswervingly ensure that the industrial and supply chains are public goods in nature, safeguard the security and stability of its industrial and supply chains, take concrete actions to deepen international cooperation on industrial and supply chains, and make sure that people of all countries share the fruits of development, he said.

China ready for more effort

During the first half of the year, solid effort has been made to smooth the industrial and supply chains, consolidating the recovery momentum of the industrial economy as factory activities were disrupted, and logistics bottlenecks emerged in some regions due to the epidemic, according to the country’s Ministry of Industry and Information Technology (MIIT).

Thanks to the effort, the industrial economy maintained recovery growth. From January to July this year, the added value of industrial enterprises above designated size increased by 3.5% year on year, as per the ministry.

Xi said in the letter that China is willing to work with other countries to seize the new opportunities presented by the latest scientific and technological revolution and industrial transformation and build a global industrial and supply chain system that is secure, stable, smooth, efficient, open, inclusive, and mutually beneficial.

Everything You Should Know About Car Loans

Cars are expensive. Hence, buying one requires a lot of research and planning. While cash purchase is simpler and cheaper than loaning as no interest is accrued, such bulk payments can often lead to financial risks. Therefore, a majority of people choose car loans to finance their cars.

But you might get overwhelmed with so many things to consider to acquire a car loan.

So, you can check the information below that could help you understand car loans better.

How does a car loan work?

When you don’t have enough cash to make full payment of your car outright, you can take a loan from a lender. Usually, the loan term ranges between 2 and 7 years.

The longer the loan term, the lesser your monthly payments are. However, you may pay a lot more due to the interest on the borrowed sum. So, it is best to know the cost you might incur for different loan periods.

Should you go for a personal loan or a car loan?

If you take a personal loan, you either have to go for a secured or unsecured loan. For a secured loan, you have to offer up collateral so the lender can claim it if you default on loan repayment.

However, for unsecured loans, you don’t have the concern of collateral but may have to worry about higher interest rates.

Opting for a car loan eliminates the risk of losing your asset as the car is repossessed if you default on loan repayments. Also, car loans are secured and offer lower interest rates than personal loans. So, you can easily qualify for car loans. However, you must understand loan terms and conditions before signing the agreement.

What is a balloon payment?

A balloon payment is a form of loan where the monthly payment amount decreases when you make a single substantial payment at the end of the loan term. So, while lower monthly payments may help you deal with your finances better, you must remain prepared for the big pay-out by the end of the repayment term.

How much should you put down as a down payment?

Down payment is what you pay upfront to secure your loan and the vehicle. Paying a higher deposit is always advantageous as it will reduce the interest rate and the amount you pay for monthly payments.

It is best to deposit at least 20 per cent of the purchase price. Also, if you own a car, you can sell it or trade it to secure the deposit amount.

What is the best loan term for your car?

The choice of the loan term will depend entirely on your ability to make loan repayments. So, you must check your finances and get an estimate of costs. Knowing your affordability, you won’t have to stretch your budget or incur high-interest rates.

How can you compare car loans?

You must have some basic information to compare car loans. They include:

The vehicle’s cost

The amount you can deposit

The sum of money for monthly repayments

Way of using the car

Financial condition

The above information can give you a head start on some loan options so you can pick the vendor that provides you with the best deal for your situation.

When you take a loan, your reliability and integrity are tested, affecting your credit score. One late payment may not make much difference, but if you make recurring defaults, it will reflect poorly on your credit history, and your future loan applications may not get approved. So, you must know what you can afford before proceeding with the loan.

Asia’s Fashion Showcase CENTRESTAGE Concludes – Sustainable Fashion is seen as a Key Promotional Strategy

Asia’s premier fashion event CENTRESTAGE, organised by the Hong Kong Trade Development Council (HKTDC) and sponsored by Create Hong Kong (CreateHK), which is backed by the Government of the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region*, drew to a successful close on 11 September. The extravaganza brought together more than 240 fashion brands from 15 countries and regions, offering visitors a trip through numerous phygital experiences, including visits to the metaverse. More than 2,700 trade buyers visited the physical fair and joined online business meetings. As of today, the HKTDC has arranged about 740 business meetings, enabling exhibitors to explore business opportunities both online and offline. The three-day fair also attracted more than 22,500 public visitors to shop for fashion items, up 30% from last year.

HKTDC Deputy Executive Director Sophia Chong said: “Technology has become an integral part of our lives. In this digital era, the fashion industry has been at the forefront and is making forays into the area where technology meets fashion, opening up new possibilities for the industry. At the same time, environmental protection remains a topic of global concern and an imminent issue which businesses need to respond. “Inclusion and Diversity”, the central theme of this year’s CENTRESTAGE, not only emphasises individual uniqueness and aesthetics, but also promotes caring for society and the pursuit of sustainability in fashion to achieve diversity and gain forward momentum in the industry.”

Industry cautiously optimistic, nearly 30% expect sales growth

An on-site survey during the show gauged product trends and the fashion industry’s outlook. Regarding sales prospects and the market outlook for next year, 28% of respondents expected an overall increase in business in the coming year, while 39% thought it would remain steady, reflecting a cautious optimism among industry players. More than 50% of respondents expected production or sourcing costs to increase, while 44% saw no change. The COVID-19 pandemic has affected the industry’s operations over the past two years; 66% of respondents indicated that the impact included a decline in sales/profits, 28% reduced the number of brick-and-mortar stores, while 38% expanded e-commerce business.

Focusing on technology to address environment and sustainability issues is the biggest trend in the fashion industry, with 30% of respondents expecting sustainable fashion or functional outfits to be the most popular next year. In addition, 62% agreed or completely agreed that launching sustainable fashion collections will be the key promotional strategy next year. Meanwhile, 42% of respondents agreed that seasonless fashion collections was trending, while 41% believed the see-now, buy-now strategy was also trending.

Riding the tech wave to promote sustainable fashion

This year’s CENTRESTAGE attracted 60 local and global sustainable fashion brands among other labels, showcasing cutting-edge designs and trends in sustainable fashion. At the Fashion Hong Kong Runway Show held on the first day of the event (9 September), six local designer brands – namely 112mountainyam, ANGUS TSUI, Bettie Haute Couture, BLIND by JW, SUN=SEN, and V VISSI, showcased their environmentally friendly spring/summer 2023 collections using upcycled fabrics. ITOCHU Textile Prominent (Asia) was one of the local buyers in attendance. Celia Lo, Manager of the company’s apparel department, said the event helped promote local designer brands. She found that Hong Kong sustainable fashion label, V VISSI, which uses recycled fabrics in its collections, is very appealing, saying that ITOCHU will explore business collaboration with the label.

Hong Kong exhibitor Match Showroom showcased 14 sustainable fashion and lifestyle brands at CENTRESTAGE this year. The company’s Founder and Brand Director Maggie Lui said the fair offered a comprehensive platform to promote brands that embrace sustainability, upcycling and the use of natural fabrics. “We have successfully raised our profile, enhanced the brand awareness and promoted our philosophy on sustainable fashion and lifestyle products through our presence here. Two watch companies exhibiting at the concurrent Hong Kong Watch & Clock Fair approached us to explore the possibility of collaboration. This is the perfect place to gain exposure and to promote our brands,” Ms Lui said.

Host of runway shows promote local design talents and create business opportunities

The three-day exhibition featured 30 fashion shows and events. The spotlight opening gala show CENTRESTAGE ELITES included the 2023 spring/summer collections from local designers Derek Chan and Mite Chan’s renowned brand “DEMO”, as well as acclaimed Japanese designer Hideaki Shikama’s brand “Children of the discordance”. The show attracted scores of industry professionals, celebrities and fashionistas.

In addition to the main runway show, FASHIONALLY Collection #19 featured a number of local brands, including ARTO., CAR|2IE, FromClothingof, KEVIN HO, Lapeewee, REDEMPTIVE and WHY. Lenzing Group, headquartered in Austria, is a leading supplier of textile fibres. The company’s Global Head of Digital Brand Marketing, Vincent Leung, said Hong Kong is a hub in Asia and has the edge as a platform for businesses expanding into Mainland China. The fair is a great place to understand the latest market trends and discover local rising fashion talents. “Hong Kong’s young fashion designers have strong potential for growth,” Mr Leung said. “We have already collaborated with local brand ARTO., and identified two other designer brands – ABI and moonone – we will work together on launching new collections using our sustainable fibres.”

Three other FASHIONALLY presentations were held, with three emerging local fashion brands – Wilsonkaki, along with first-time exhibitors Kowloon City Boy and VO-YAGE – showcasing their latest collections. Focusing on supply and trading of high-end yarn from Japan, Sawada Hong Kong is a well-established garment manufacturer with a history spanning 54 years. Vivian Tam, the company’s Manager, said CENTRESTAGE helps fashion industry players explore new partnerships and opportunities. The company connected to two local menswear brands, Sred Namal and VO-YAGE during the fair to explore future collaboration.

* Disclaimer: The Government of the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region provides funding support to the project only, and does not otherwise take part in the project. Any opinions, findings, conclusions or recommendations expressed in these materials/events (or by members of the project team) are those of the project organisers only and do not reflect the views of the Government of the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region, the Culture, Sports and Tourism Bureau, Create Hong Kong, the CreateSmart Initiative Secretariat or the CreateSmart Initiative Vetting Committee.

ADDX Launches Cash Management Solution, in Tie-Up with Lion Global Investors

Dubbed “ADDX Earn”, the first two funds launched are managed by OCBC Group’s Lion Global Investors and they comprise high-quality, low-volatility liquid debt instruments.

Asia’s largest private market exchange ADDX has launched a cash management tool that allows investors with excess funds in their wallets to earn interest, instead of letting their cash sit idle. Named ADDX Earn, the solution aims to withstand short-term volatility while preserving capital.

The product line was curated to boost the returns of investors who have deposited money in their ADDX wallets, but have yet to decide on which private market product to take part in. Some of the idle capital may also have come from previous investment earnings on ADDX. Target returns for products under ADDX Earn are designed to be higher than short-term bank deposit rates – which is where many investors otherwise store undeployed capital.

The first two funds to be launched under the ADDX Earn umbrella are by Lion Global Investors, a fund manager that is a part of the OCBC Group.

The LionGlobaI SGD Enhanced Liquidity Fund and LionGlobaI USD Enhanced Liquidity Fund are invested in high-quality portfolios of debt instruments, diversified across a wide range of issuers and tenors while maintaining weighted average credit ratings of “A”. The two funds have weighted average portfolio durations of less than a year, which gives Lion Global the flexibility to adjust portfolio allocations in response to changing interest rates and market conditions. Investors can redeem their investments through ADDX on a weekly basis. In addition, the funds target low-volatility assets, which are well-suited for the current market environment that has seen increased volatility in other asset classes.

For both funds, interest is accrued daily. As of 31 July 2022, the LionGlobaI SGD Enhanced Liquidity Fund had a weighted average yield to maturity of 2.22% p.a., while that of the LionGlobaI USD Enhanced Liquidity Fund was 2.38% p.a. These rates change monthly depending on the prevailing interest rate environment and the underlying assets held by the funds.

Gerard Lee, Chief Executive Officer of Lion Global Investors, said: “Our liquidity funds are typically used by financial advisers and more recently by digital players.  We are therefore delighted to have a private market exchange use our liquidity funds to provide a solution for their investors’ excess cash.”

ADDX Chief Executive Officer Oi-Yee Choo said: “Cash should never sit idle. This is especially true at a time when investors are turning to cash cushions as they carefully weigh their investment options amid rising inflation, a volatile market and an uncertain global economic outlook. With ADDX Earn, we are presenting to investors low-risk, money market funds in a format that is liquid and reduces the likelihood of negative returns.”

She added: “ADDX Earn represents an expansion of our product range in our constant effort to improve as a private market exchange through observing and responding to investor behaviour and need. It is an important building block in the financial services ecosystem we are constructing that is designed for investors, and not just for large corporations. We want to offer investors a full shelf of products – ranging from those with a higher risk-return profile such as hedge funds and venture capital, to those with a lower risk-return profile, such as real estate funds, investment grade bonds, as well as cash management solutions at the tail end of the spectrum, such as these two Lion Global funds.”

Founded in 2017, the SGX-backed ADDX currently serves individual accredited investors from 39 countries spanning Asia Pacific, Europe and the Americas (except the US). Using blockchain and smart contract technology, ADDX reduces manual interventions in the issuance, custody and distribution of private market products. The resulting efficiency from the use of digital securities allows the platform to fractionalise investments in a scalable and commercially viable manner, bringing minimum investment sizes down from US$1 million to US$10,000 and thereby widening investor access to the private markets. To date, ADDX has listed around 40 deals on its platform involving blue-chip names such as Hamilton Lane, Partners Group, Investcorp, Singtel, UOB, CGS-CIMB, as well as Temasek-owned entities Mapletree, Azalea, SeaTown and Fullerton Fund Management. Asset classes available on ADDX include private equity, hedge funds, venture capital, private credit, real estate, debt and structured products.

Is China Becoming a Green Colussus? New Solar and Wind Park to Produce 240% More Energy Than All Renewables in Germany combined

  •  New solar and wind park in China: Total output 240% higher than all renewables in Germany combined
  • The Middle Kingdom’s planned park would even have a higher total output than all the wind energy and PV plants in the EU
  • China aims to be climate-neutral by 2060
  • Carbon dioxide emissions per inhabitant (2020) are 8.2 tonnes in China and 13.7 tonnes in the USA
  • Ukraine war could give renewables a boost worldwide
  • Stock exchange floor: Global Clean Energy ETF up 3.3% in 3-month review

China wants to build a huge solar and wind park in the Gobi Desert, which is planned to have a total capacity of 450 gigawatts. To put this into perspective: the total capacity of all renewable energy sources in Germany is 132.3 gigawatts. The planned park in the Middle Kingdom would thus even have a higher total output than all wind energy and PV plants in the European Union combined, as shown in a new infographic by

In the European Union, for example, the total capacity of wind energy is 220 gigawatts, with PV systems responsible for 165 gigawatts. Wind and solar energy play an almost equal role in Germany, whereas other renewable energies such as biomass, hydropower and others are declining in significance.

Comparing the most prominent countries in terms of installed capacity of wind turbines, China is already in undisputed first place – even without the giant park currently being planned in the Gobi Desert. In 2020, China generated 273 gigawatts with onshore wind turbines alone. The United States of America comes in second place with 118 gigawatts, followed by Germany with 54 gigawatts. Of the 10 largest manufacturers of onshore wind turbines (in terms of new installations), 7 are from China.

China is constantly pushing for a green turnaround and aims to be climate-neutral by 2060. In absolute terms, the most populous country still has the highest CO₂ emissions on earth – but in relative terms, this is far from the case. In 2020, China emitted an average of 8.2 tonnes of carbon dioxide per inhabitant, while countries such as Saudi Arabia (17 tonnes), Australia (15.2 tonnes), Canada (14.4 tonnes) and the United States of America (13.7 tonnes) emit considerably more.

Although China is making rapid progress, other countries are also increasingly focusing on renewable energies. The Ukraine war has also made it painfully clear to German players how strongly dependent they still are on fossil fuels. Investors stand to profit considerably from the green turnaround – yet the corresponding securities have been rather quiet recently, as a look at the performance of the Global Clean Energy ETF makes clear. The 3-month review shows a gain of 3.3%, although it has lost almost 3.3% of its value in the last six months.

The Trajectory Of Growth In E-commerce In Southeast Asia — A Case Of Indonesia

Countries in Southeast Asia are experiencing serious growth in e-commerce.

E-commerce sales are expected to reach nearly $90 billion this year, up about $16 billion from last year, according to eMarketer. E-commerce in the region is projected to pass the $100 billion mark by 2023, a significant increase from $37.22 billion in 2019.

Unlike other geographies that are forecasted to experience moderate growth, Southeast Asia might witness a 20.6% increase, the largest globally. Behind Southeast Asia is Latin America, which would be the only region to hit the 20% threshold this year.

Which Countries In Particular?

E-commerce sales in four countries are projected to grow faster than in all of Southeast Asia this year, and two of them — the Philippines and Indonesia — are in the region.

The Philippines ranks first with a growth rate of 25.9%, while Indonesia comes third at 23%. The other countries are India with 25.5% and Brazil, which is expected to grow by 22.2%.

Why Indonesia?

Indonesia’s e-commerce adoption is one of the largest in the world. In 2020, up to 90% of internet users between ages 16 and 64 purchased something online.

Indonesians are “among the world’s most passionate adopters of digital technology”. According to the consulting firm McKinsey & Co., an average Indonesian spends four hours per day on the internet using a handheld device — twice the time spent by a U.S. resident.

With 99.15 million users, the country has the fourth-largest population of Meta Platforms Inc.’s (NASDAQ: META) Instagram users and the largest in the Southeast Asia region. The country also is among the largest for number of Twitter Inc. (NASDAQ: TWTR) users at 18.45 million.

E-commerce In Indonesia

Of Indonesia’s 278.3 million people 138 million do their shopping online, according to a report by the Institute of Southern Asian Studies. The e-commerce industry accounts for 72% of the total value of the digital economy.

Indonesia’s e-commerce sector is expected to reach almost $63 billion in 2022, according to Statista. By 2025, the market is projected to reach $90 billion.

The e-commerce market seemingly runs on two models: e-commerce platforms such as Shopee, Tokopedia and Bukalapak and social commerce, which involves buying and selling goods on social media platforms. E-commerce platforms account for 60% of all transactions while 40% of shopping is conducted via social commerce.

Society Pass Inc. (NASDAQ: SOPA) is an example of an acquisition-focused e-commerce holding company that could be looking to become the Goliath of e-commerce in Indonesia and overall Southeast Asia. The company operates in six verticals: loyalty, lifestyle, food and beverage, telecom, digital media, and travel. It reports connecting millions of consumers and merchants in the region.

SoPa Rolls Out Loyalty App

On June 27, SoPa announced the launch of a beta version of its loyalty app that enables customers to earn and redeem points at different retailers while building customer loyalty for merchants. The company reports that the app helps merchants generate more revenue by retaining existing customers, attracting new ones, reducing customer turnover and synching customer data through personalized advertising campaigns.

“The Southeast Asian retail sector is at the cusp of a massive transformation powered by the data-driven meta economy. We designed a gorgeous user interface backed by sophisticated backend infrastructure to kickstart a virtuous cycle of revenue generation and loyalty creation, where Society Pass and Society Points generate more revenues for merchants,” SoPa Founder, Chairman and CEO Dennis Nguyen said at the launch of the beta application.

SoPa reported plans to modify and integrate the app with select customers and merchants across Vietnam, Indonesia, Philippines, Thailand and Singapore in the second quarter of the year. The company expects to fully launch the app by the end of the year, when customers will be able to pay for goods and services in-store, in-app or online.

As a loyalty and data marketing ecosystem, Society Pass operates multiple e-commerce platforms across its key markets in SEA. Its business model focuses on analysing user data through the expected launch of its Society Pass loyalty platform and circulation of its universal loyalty points, which seamlessly connects consumers and merchants across multiple product and service categories to foster organic loyalty. Since its inception, SoPa has amassed over 1.6 million registered consumers and over 5,500 registered merchants/brands on its platform. It has invested 2+ years building proprietary IT architecture with cutting edge components to effectively scale and support its consumers, merchants, and acquisitions.Society Pass provides merchants with #HOTTAB Biz and #HOTTAB POS – a specialized POS technology solution, a comprehensive system for payment, loyal customer management, user profile analytics, and convenient financial support packages for small and medium-sized enterprises.In addition, SoPa operates , Vietnam’s leading lifestyle e-commerce platform, , a popular grocery delivery company in Philippines, , a leading online restaurant delivery service based in Hanoi, Vietnam, and Gorilla Networks , a Singapore-based, blockchain/web3-enabled mobile virtual network operator.

For more information, please check out:

What Is Making This Grocery Delivery App A Preferred Choice In Southeast Asia?

E-commerce, made possible by the internet, is still booming. Businesses like Inc. (NASDAQ: AMZN), eBay Inc. (NASDAQ: EBAY), and Shopify Inc. (NYSE: SHOP) are soaring, with more people ordering products online than buying them in stores.

While most businesses nose-dived during the COVID-19 pandemic, movement restrictions induced by the pandemic fueled online retail sales. Online sales grew from 16% to 19% in 2020, with Southeast Asian countries significantly contributing to the growth, according to numbers in a United Nations Conference on Trade and Development report.

Southeast Asia, which includes countries like Philippines, Vietnam, Singapore and Malaysia, is home to more than 681 million people — 47% of whom prefer online shopping, with about 144 million people regularly purchasing online.

E-Grocery Boom

Consumers can shop online from anywhere and choose from a wide array of products such as groceries to be delivered directly to them. Online grocery, or e-grocery, shopping has also been gaining momentum for some time.

The e-grocery market is quickly expanding throughout the world, with players like Uber Technologies Inc. (NYSE: UBER), Instacart, Amazon Fresh and Fresh Direct serving customers in North America and Europe.

Southeast Asia is also seeing significant growth in the e-grocery market. A breakdown of the market by IGD Asia indicated:

  • Asia, the largest regional grocery market in the world, is expected to grow by a compound annual growth rate (CAGR) of 6% between 2018 and 2023.
  • The grocery market will be worth $4.2 trillion by 2023, up from $3.1 trillion in 2018. Its share of global grocery spending will be 37% in 2023, adding around $1.1 trillion to the worldwide grocery market.
  • China, India and Indonesia will be the biggest contributors to the region’s top-line growth, accounting for 74% of new sales added by 2023.

A Convenient Grocery Delivery App?

That level of growth could be a boon for a company like, an online grocery service started in 2017 that delivers fresh goods to consumers who use its feature-packed app.

Pushkart’s platform was developed by a group of young Filipino millennials whose goal was to ensure fast, convenient and safe grocery delivery to customers’ doors.

From Day One, — available on the web, Google Play Store and the Apple Store — said that in addition to serving consumers, it wants to be the platform of choice for retailers and help them sell their products quickly without learning the technicalities of running a digital platform or managing a logistics fleet.

From a single flagship fulfillment center at Fisher Supermarket, which has been operating since 2017, the platform is now supported by three additional hubs: Market! Market!, Ayala Malls Feliz, and AllDay Supermarket — Global South.

What Makes Say It’s Confident It Stands Out From The Rest?

  • Consumers — The company wants to bring value to consumers by allowing them to shop for their basic needs anytime from anywhere they want while sparing them from heavy city traffic or the hassle of carrying heavy bags of groceries.
  • Companies — The company wants to make it easy for corporate clients to purchase every office pantry supply they need from a single source and with the convenience of having flexible payment schemes.
  • Merchants — The company plans to empower retailers to reach the online market by giving them the means to easily transform their shops to include digital sales.
  • Society — The company wants to bring more jobs through online commerce. is a division of the Society Pass Inc. (NASDAQ: SOPA), a Southeast Asian acquisitions-focused e-commerce holding company.

Currently operating six subsidiaries, SoPa plans to expand to more than 10 more subsidiaries in eight verticals — loyalty, merchant software, lifestyle, food and beverage delivery, travel, digital advertising and telecoms — by the end of 2022.

Since its inception in 2018, SoPa has amassed over 1.6 million registered consumers and over 5,500 registered merchants and brands on its platform.

Apart from, SoPa provides merchants with #HOTTAB Biz, lifestyle e-commerce through and, a leading online restaurant delivery service based in Hanoi, Vietnam. In addition, SoPa operates Gorilla Networks, a Singapore-based, blockchain/web3-enabled mobile virtual network operator.

About Society Pass (NASDAQ: SOPA)

As a loyalty and data marketing ecosystem, Society Pass operates multiple e-commerce platforms across its key markets in SEA. Its business model focuses on analysing user data through the expected launch of its Society Pass loyalty platform and circulation of its universal loyalty points, which seamlessly connects consumers and merchants across multiple product and service categories to foster organic loyalty. Since its inception, SoPa has amassed over 1.6 million registered consumers and over 5,500 registered merchants/brands on its platform. It has invested 2+ years building proprietary IT architecture with cutting edge components to effectively scale and support its consumers, merchants, and acquisitions.Society Pass provides merchants with #HOTTAB Biz and #HOTTAB POS – a specialized POS technology solution, a comprehensive system for payment, loyal customer management, user profile analytics, and convenient financial support packages for small and medium-sized enterprises.In addition, SoPa operates, Vietnam’s leading lifestyle e-commerce platform,, a popular grocery delivery company in Philippines, and, a leading online restaurant delivery service based in Hanoi, Vietnam.

For more information, please check out:

How To Integrate Your Secure Online Payment Solution Into Your E-Commerce Website?

Nowadays, Customers anticipate receiving the same quality of care through online mode as they would in a conventional brick-and-mortar retail location.

A reliable payment gateway must be integrated into your service to offer a quick and secure checkout process on your e-commerce website.

Discover the crucial details you’ll require before integrating a payment gateway for your online clients to smoothen the acceptance of online payments.

A payment gateway: what is it?

No matter how you bring customers to your website, once they decide to buy, you need to make sure they have a quick and dependable way to handle payments. To accept payment online from customers, payment gateways give ecommerce websites access to merchant services. Similar to a conventional cash register, a payment gateway functions similarly. 

It uses an automated service between the many parties involved to process credit cards (or other online payment systems).

It will first gather and encrypt the customer’s data directly from the website. The payment gateway will get in touch with the relevant financial institution and request authorization using pre-established procedures. The payment gateway will enable the website to move on to the following stage of fulfilment after gaining permission.

Why you require an eCommerce payment gateway and how it operates

Online payment systems can generally be compared to a point of sale, where you can use your bank card to make any kind of payment. The only distinction is that you don’t need to use a physical point of service; instead, its primary responsibility is to authorise and approve the transaction.

If you own an e-commerce website but aren’t sure if you need to add a payment gateway, the answer is unquestionable yes. You must put this into practice if you want to have the chance to receive money directly from your clients. 

Even if you also operate a physical store, it still makes sense to include a payment gateway into your website to attract more clients and boost sales by catering to those who would never be able to visit your actual location.

Adding payment gateways to your website

You must choose the platform you wish to use before you can begin accepting payments on your website. Magento, Shopify, and WooCommerce are popular choices for online retailers. You must adhere to the developer’s instructions to add it to your site, whichever one you choose to use.

Adding Shopify to your website

There are two ways that Shopify can be used on your website. The first step is to establish a Shopify store and lead customers there when they are ready to pay.

The second choice is to employ a Shopify “Buy” button, which will let visitors to your website add your products immediately to a shopping cart. Every product, item, or collection must have a button.

When a customer is prepared to check out, he or she will be forwarded to the Shopify website to finish the transaction.

On the Shopify website, you may find comprehensive guidelines for both of these situations.

Updating a website with WooCommerce

To handle payments, WooCommerce makes use of WordPress. After setting up your website on WordPress, you may add the WooCommerce plugin by either manually installing it there after downloading it, or by looking for it in your dashboard.

Before the plugin can be activated, you must have a WooCommerce account.

Website created with Magento

Magento installation is a bit difficult. The organisation offers a wide range of items and commerce solutions, but you’ll need to plan your site with their solutions keeping in mind.

You would probably need to rebuild the website on Magento’s platform because integrating Magento with an existing website would be very challenging.

How to evaluate your payment gateway’s performance

You must pay great attention to the performance metrics of your site, just like with anything else about online marketing and shopping. If more customers are leaving their shopping carts empty, your payment gateway may be the source of their annoyance.

Businesses ought to have come up with solutions to the 80% cart abandonment rate during checkout.

Customers of today demand services and platforms that are convenient and simple to use. You must make sure that the checkout and fulfilment procedures are streamlined to avoid impeding customers from completing purchases.

Integration fees for payment gateways

Examine the costs associated with each stage before integrating online payment into your website. They frequently pile up, therefore it’s preferable to make a list of what matters to you so you can pay close attention to how those components are developing.

There is always setup, registration, and monthly expenses to start. Also included are transaction, processing, refund, and chargeback payment fees. Avoid forgetting about these unnoticed elements to avoid unpleasant surprises later. There are also termination costs and fees for the transfer of funds. Although the difference is frequently not very noticeable, these vary depending on the various payment methods.

Due to their complexity and frequent multifunctionality, gateways provide several benefits in addition to just accepting online payments. You might include features that will make money transfers for your users safer or more practical depending on what you need. Payment gateways frequently assist with additional tasks, such as:

  • PCI Compliance to prevent penalties
  • Recurring invoices using a price model based on subscriptions.
  • notification of transactions for verification.
  • Storage of payment information to save your consumers from having to enter their personal information again.
  • For convenient input, a virtual terminal imitates a real credit card terminal.
  • To meet particular demands, developer information and API tools are available.
  • High degrees of security using encryption for sensitive user data integration with other technologies, such as shopping carts or accounting applications.

Exactly how important is it?

With the aid of payment gateways, all business dealings between your clients and you are to be processed quickly and securely. Customer annoyance and revenue loss will result if they cannot access a shopping cart that is directly integrated with a payment gateway.

Portfolio diversification: what is it and why is it so important?

If you’re an investor, you will almost certainly be exposed to a degree of risk when buying and selling stocks, shares, forex, or any other security. Reducing this risk is paramount to making sure your investments turn a profit, and one of the best ways to do so is via portfolio diversification.

In this guide, learn what portfolio diversification is, why it matters, and how you can diversify you investment portfolio.

What is portfolio diversification?

Portfolio diversification is the process of building an investment portfolio full of securities which are different to one another. By having investments within different niches, industries, asset classes, and security types, if negative economic shocks affect a single company or industry, then your portfolio will be less likely to significantly lose value.

This approach works for day trading securities too. If you engage in CFD trading, for instance, having a diversified range of trades open at any given moment can shelter you from unpredictable swings in the value of individual assets.

The importance of diversification

The reason diversification matters is all down to risk. Less diversification, and the chances your investments will be negatively affected multiplies. The
Australian Investors Association outlines
five key types of risk – all of which can affect those with poor diversification.

Volatility – It’s impossible to predict the value of some securities. Values can drop precipitously, and if all your money is in the one stock that drops, then you’ll lose out much more than if you had
a diversified portfolio.

Knowledge – If you don’t have all the information on a company or industry, you may get caught out. Diversification stops this from happening.

Events – Disasters, economic crashes, policy changes; a lot of unknowns can affect single stocks.

Credit risk – If you own shares and a company folds, you may not get your money back; if you diversified your portfolio, you won’t lose all your money.

Sleep-at-night factor – If you’re not diversified and your stocks are hit by bad economic news, then you’ll likely feel poor mental effects. Diversification can help the situation feel less

How to diversify your portfolio

If you want to diversify, there are some quick ways you can do so.

First, consider asset allocation based on your age and lifestyle – if you’re young and have no family, go for riskier assets like tech stocks. Older with a large family, safer assets like US government bonds. Next, assess the risks to any investment before you commit, and make sure to hold onto investments for long enough time so they can grow.

Lastly, learn about the markets and economy – more information equals a higher likelihood of picking better and more varied investments.

Diversifying your investment portfolio is a great way to protect your money from risk. With the global economy facing all manner of threats, be sure to analyse your portfolio today and take steps to diversify – your financial future could rely on it!

Most Innovative Luxury Beauty eTailer 2022

‘Luxury delivers always,’ is the motto that influences every element of Beauty Affairs’ business – from the products it provides, to the way the website operates, the company exudes luxury. Henceforth, customers always come back for more, be it for the excellent customer service or the company’s vast inventory of skincare and cosmetics. Chanel, Elizabeth Arden, and Versace are just a taste of the near epicurean brands that Beauty Affairs prides itself on carrying – therefore, join us as we delve into a world filled with opulence and glamour.

What’s your skin type? Combination, dry, or oily? Whatever it may be, Beauty Affairs has the right products for you. From luxury skincare to cosmetics and fragrances, Beauty Affairs boasts an impressive array of products, including Armani perfumes, Elizabeth Arden’s range of premium skincare, and Dior’s opulent cosmetics. Indeed, Beauty Affairs caters to a multitude of clients with a primary focus on up-market customers. However, the key aim, no matter who the customer is or what their basket includes, is to provide its customers with a true, enhanced beauty affair.

Luxury is simply at the heart of Beauty Affairs. From the moment you log in to the site to the moment you check out, each element is optimised, seamless, and glamorous, providing a one-stop online shop for high-end cosmetics and skincare products.

Every detail of the customer experience is carefully thought through: shipping is expedited with same-day dispatch for orders placed before 1PM AEDT, orders are carefully wrapped in bespoke tissue-paper and customised packaging, and samples are added to orders to create a top-shelf experience.

However, Beauty Affairs understands that these products aren’t within everyone’s budgets – some can’t afford to spend money on products that won’t work for them – therefore, it has created a method that ensures accessibility called Try Before You Buy Upon utilising the skincare analysis tool, the customer has the option to obtain some complimentary skincare pots. The only cost the customer faces is the price of shipping and packaging. For $19.95 AUD clients are provided with three Luxury Mini Jars that contain 2.5gr of the original product – this includes brands such as Dermalogica and SK-II, whose products can reach up to $379.00 AUD. This is perfect for those who want just a little taste of luxury beauty before committing to a full-sized skincare routine, plus incentivises shoppers by allowing them to use that $19.95 against the full-sized products once they’ve decided to make a purchase.

Of course, this ties in with the company’s belief that luxury skincare should be personalised, accessible, and, most importantly, effective. Whilst Beauty Affairs works to curate the best luxury brands and products all in one place, it also places an enormous emphasis on education – not every skincare product will work for your skin type. It is vital to choose products that work for your skin. Beauty Affairs has invested a great amount into supplying authentic, science-based education from its global beauty experts, and be it via the blog or the skin analysis, provides a vast amount of information on the best skin care routines for a range of skin types.

Additionally, Beauty Affairs truly believes in the products it supplies. Whilst many brands on the market feature the same ingredients, there is nothing quite like the results and experiences that luxury products can create. Using luxury products can guarantee an overall superior experience – not only in the results they can provide, but with the way they feel on the skin, the way they smell, and the way they are capable of brightening a bad mood. The decision to use luxury products is a responsible one, almost always guaranteeing that the product is cruelty-free, vegan, and sustainable, and, perhaps more importantly, luxury skincare  offers a sensational experience that cannot be found elsewhere. As the company states, ‘luxury delivers always.’ 

Home to over 70 brands, Beauty Affairs hosts the best of the best – skincare titans that have become globally renowned for their upmarket ranges and effective products. Elizabeth Arden, for example, is one of the most prestigious and oldest luxury skincare and cosmetics brands on the market. Founded in 1910 as Red Door, the company passed through numerous hands, before being purchased in 2003 by FFI for $225 million USD. It was here that the company gained its iconic name which it acquired from Elizabeth Arden (1881-1966), the founder of the company. In 2016 the company was taken over by Revlon, and at this time it was estimated to have annual gross sales amounting to over $3 billion USD. Elizabeth Arden’s products have grown to be incredibly popular, particularly in recent years due to the boom in skincare popularity. Numerous products are available on the Beauty Affairs website, including the Elizabeth Arden Prevage® Anti-Aging Daily Serum, the Elizabeth Arden Retinol Ceramide Capsules Line Erasing Night Serum, and the Elizabeth Arden Ceramide Youth Restoring Essence.

Aside from a plethora of skincare products, Beauty Affairs supplies designer perfumes in abundance. Women’s, men’s, and unisex fragrances are all available through the website, featuring deluxe brands like Dolce & Gabbana, Bulgari, and Yves Saint Laurent. Tom Ford’s Black Orchid also makes an appearance, with the 100ml bottle being priced competitively at $277 AUD. Launched in 2006, the fragrance has become a recognisable and sought-after product, with its sultry tones making it an incredibly unique scent for women. Straying away from the typical sweet and floral scents, Black Orchid combines an aromatic formula of black truffle, black plum, patchouli and, of course, black orchid, to create an unforgettable perfume.

In the men’s range, Beauty Affairs advertises Paco Rabanne, Penhaligon’s, and Versace. For $499 AUD, buyers can indulge in the woody undertones of Creed’s Viking scent. Launched in 2021 by Olivier and Erwin Creed, the fragrance harbours top notes of mandarin orange, pink pepper, lemon, and bergamot, which is blended with base tones of vetiver, sandalwood, cedar, olibanum, and patchouli. The fragrance is a pleasant addition to the Creed line, of which many of its fragrances feature on Beauty Affairs and can be described as an elegant and fresh aroma.

Yet if fragrances and skincare aren’t what you’re looking for, Beauty Affairs possesses an overwhelming amount of haircare, health and wellness, and cosmetic products. Hair straighteners, beauty supplements, concealers, and more, are all highlighted on the website. It is safe to say that when Beauty Affairs names itself as a ‘one-stop shop’ it is a completely accurate statement. Quite simply, it is Australia’s leading online authority on all things luxury and cosmetics related. Consistently the company goes above and beyond the call of duty in order to infuse luxury into its clients’ lives – and this includes its VIP member deals.

Using luxury skincare is one thing but indulging in a world of luxury treatments is another. As a Beauty Affairs VIP member, you will be invited to experience one of Sydney’s best non-invasive luxury treatment spas as an exclusive offer. These deals are only available via the VIP package and cannot be found elsewhere, and the luxury packages must be booked through Beauty Affairs. Moreover, the experience in its entirety can be personalised, involving skin treatments and products that suit the customer’s skin. The treatments take place in a single treatment bed room and are carried out by highly qualified and professional aestheticians, ensuring a relaxing, attentive, and comfortable experience. Indeed, each of the treatment partners has been hand-selected by Beauty Affairs for their level of customer service, knowledge, and most importantly, luxury experience. Many that have taken this offer have complimented the service, leaving it numerous five-star reviews. Jenny R., a VIP member who completed the offer, left a testimonial stating, ‘Highly recommend! The staff are very professional and understanding of my sensitive skin. Their beautician does the most relaxing treatments – my skin is supple and settled after any treatment.’

Furthermore, Beauty Affairs has designed an awards scheme that allows members to build up a collection of points by completing tasks. For example, adding your birthday will give you 200 points, and leaving a product review awards 500. These points add up quickly and can be redeemed in return for a discount – 500 points can be exchanged for $5 AUD off your order, and 2000 for $20 AUD. When redeemed, the customer will receive a code that they can use during the checkout process. Beauty Affairs could not have made the process any simpler, it is quick, easy, and streamlined, and perhaps best of all, it provides a great incentive for customers to buy the products that they have been eyeing up.

If the customer is in need of any further assistance, they can refer to the company’s blog or social media pages. Filled with helpful articles such as Does Lash Serum Actually Work? and Everything You Need to Know About Azelaic Acid, the blog acts as a magnificent guide to skincare and skin issues. It features advice, recommendations, and information surrounding common skin issues, and serves as that little extra push for clients hesitant about purchasing luxury skincare. Being able to educate customers about skincare by using high-performance beauty products from around the world as examples elevates Beauty Affairs head and shoulders above the competition, making them the obvious choice for the luxury skincare & cosmetics connoisseur.

However, for more visual learners, the Beauty Affairs TikTok page serves as a treat. Since its creation, the account has amassed over 22 thousand followers and 78 thousand likes, all pouring in from skincare fanatics from around the globe. Featuring short videos about skincare hacks, peptides, cleansing, skin types, and recommendations – the list is endless – the TikTok page is a crash course in all things skincare. In addition, the page deconstructs the common lies and myths shared by skincare brands and consumers, including the claim of products being ‘chemical-free.’ Dozens of the videos have gone viral, with some garnering hundreds of thousands of views. The most popular video is titled Skincare Mistakes Volume 1 and has received 458 thousand views and over 30 thousand likes – the video teaches to apply oil after moisturiser, to apply retinol if needed as it is beneficial for skin rehabilitation, and to not wash your face with hot water. 

The company’s online presence alongside its devotion to quality has placed it at an advantage in a booming market. According to Statista, the global skincare market is expected to be worth around 189.3 billion U.S. dollars by 2025 and, in 2022, is currently estimated to be standing at 163.5 billion USD. This dramatic growth can be attributed to the shift in the skincare consumer base. In recent years skincare has seen its audience become younger and younger as people are becoming increasingly aware of its benefits, particularly in terms of anti-aging solutions. Contrasting this, the global cosmetics market decreased to 85.8 billion U.S. dollars in 2020, however, according to the Statista Consumer Market Outlook, it is estimated that revenue will begin to increase over the next few years, and by 2025 reach over 122 billion U.S dollars annually.

Beauty Affairs biggest advantage? Its devotion to pleasing customers. The power of the customer cannot be underestimated, especially in a cutthroat industry such as cosmetics. In essence, the customer is what guarantees the company’s survival, and if it can capture their loyalty then it is set for long-term success. Beauty Affairs has been successful in this endeavour, satisfying customers across the globe, and this is reflected in the reviews of the company. Maintaining a five-star rating on Google Reviews and Facebook, the company has clearly cultivated a positive reputation. In one review, Madeline De Neeve stated, ‘The overall experience was absolutely stellar, don’t think it can be better than this.’ Meanwhile, Isabelle Seddon summed Beauty Affairs up as, ‘undeniably superior to the rest.’

Consequently, it is blatant that Beauty Affairs is the premium source for online luxury skincare services, and it has certainly earned the title of Most Innovative Luxury Beauty eTailer 2022. There is no doubt that at Beauty Affairs the customer experience comes first, and that it works to provide an unbeatable experience that is educational, elegant, and efficient. Henceforth, Beauty Affairs has accomplished its mission. 

For business enquiries, contact Elly Agronov at Beauty Affairs via

The Benefits of a Smart Connected Commerce for MSMEs in APAC

Micro, small, and medium enterprises’ (MSMEs) contributions to the economy and exports have steadily increased over the last few years due to technological advances, government policies, and increasing levels of entrepreneurship across Asia-Pacific (APAC). MSMEs contribute an impressive amount ($15 trillion in 2021) to APAC’s gross domestic product (GDP), and about 20% to 30% of this contribution goes to the manufacturing GDP. In the Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN), Indonesian MSMEs contribute the largest percentage (61%) to their country’s GDP. In South Asia, India’s MSMEs have one of the highest shares (49% in 2020) in exports. The number of MSMEs in the region, according to the World Bank, is about 170 million. They outnumber large enterprises and, therefore, employ a significant portion of their countries’ working population. In APAC, exports from MSMEs accounted for approximately $896 billion in 2020.

MSMEs contribute significantly to the exports of APAC countries, ranging from 15% to 49% of the total exports. As commerce became smarter and more connected, MSMEs turned to electronic commerce (eCommerce) to access a more extensive network and a larger regional and international consumer base. MSMEs significantly contribute to their GDP, making them a driving force behind developing APAC markets. Countries incentivize and support MSMEs to solidify and expand their businesses within and beyond the region, and MSMEs in APAC with the need to access international markets challenged their expansion. With the COVID-19 pandemic changing market dynamics, however, the upsurge of eCommerce resolved the issue. MSME businesses require digitalization as they grow rapidly.

To download Frost & Sullivan’s complimentary executive brief, Smarter Connected Commerce, please access here.

“MSME suppliers experienced an increase in customer base locally and internationally during the pandemic due to the boom in eCommerce and mobile commerce. MSMEs in APAC will increase focus on export opportunities and trade barriers will diminish among countries to create high intra-regional trade growth as regional integration stems from free trade agreements (FTAs). Adoption of technological trends boosted last-mile operations and created new customer expectations,” explained Janesh Janardhanan, Practice Area Leader – Advisory, Supply Chain & Logistics, Asia Pacific, at Frost & Sullivan.

To take advantage of smarter connected commerce and thrive in this market, MSMEs must:

  • Adopt digital tools to expand their customer base into international markets and provide digitally advanced services to gain and maintain a customer base.
  • Partner with strong logistics companies for seamless logistics operations, resulting in greater customer satisfaction. The partnerships also minimize risks and challenges associated with potential supply chain disruptions, enabling business continuity.
  • Adopt smart business logistic solutions as eCommerce expands and the number of parcels rise.
  • Leverage technologies, such as Big Data, AI, and Internet of Things (IoT), to predict any supply chain disruptions and take actions to eradicate them for a smoother logistics experience.
  • Adopt a technology-driven approach to logistics based on route optimization and delivery automation to enable efficient and quick dispatch and delivery times to meet customer expectations and improve customer experience.
  • Implement paperless digital trade solutions and customs clearance solutions to improve logistics efficiency and competitiveness of MSMEs, enabling cross-border trade.

“Digital platforms will help MSMEs recover and increase their business in the post-COVID-19 era. With the shift in consumer behavior and sharp rise in online shopping, cross-border purchases will gain prominence between 2022 and 2025,” said Salil Chari, Senior Vice President of Marketing & Customer Experience, FedEx Express AMEA (Asia Pacific, Middle East, and Africa). “Smarter, more connected logistics services—such as FedEx International Connect Plus Services (FICP)—will help address cross-border logistics challenges, including more flexibility and control over the delivery process, and navigating diverse shipping regulations and customs in different countries, to improve customer experience and support business growth. Through solutions like FICP, FedEx helps facilitate and nourish cross-border trade so MSMEs can expand their reach at a greater value.”

Digital tools improve efficiency of logistics operations to help MSMEs gain a competitive advantage, with optimized efficiency, productivity, and flexibility to their customers through smart connected commerce. FedEx customizes the location and timeline of deliveries to extend delivery flexibility to customers, supporting the development of MSMEs. Some benefits of smarter digitalized logistics solutions include:

  • Improved efficiency and reduced costs associated with administrative delays, such as customs clearance and cross-border movement of freight, enabling timely delivery of goods and no cross-border delays.
  • Quick and more accurate monitoring and prediction of logistics delays in real time, enabling MSMEs to take suitable actions to manage risks. This prevents delays that can lead to customers canceling orders.
  • More efficient last-mile operations, making failures and mistakes negligible and preventing business loss.
  • Greater trust and long-term customer relationships for MSMEs due to the ability to track and trace goods via sensors

To learn more about how digitalization is powering smarter connected commerce, watch Frost & Sullivan’s latest Analyst Insight Video, Ensuring Smarter Connected Commerce, by clicking here.

PIMCO: What China’s Recovering Supply Chain Means for Global Inflation

By Carol Liao, China Economist, and Allison Boxer, US Economist 

  • Renewed growth in China’s manufacturing activity, coupled with softening developed market demand, should ease some supply-side pressures – but several other inflation risks remain prevalent.

After months of COVID-related disruptions, China’s economy looks to be on the path to normalization. In June, new daily coronavirus case counts stabilized in the low hundreds. More people are hopping on planes and trains, intercity highway traffic has rebounded to pre-outbreak levels, and city traffic is congested again.

Factory activity in June expanded for the first time since February, as manufacturing hubs emerged from lockdowns, production increased, and supply chains eased. The manufacturing purchasing managers’ index (PMI) crossed the 50 mark into expansionary territory, and industrial production rose 3.9% year-over-year (y/y). In particular, China’s June exports rose at the fastest pace in five months, indicating resilience in the country’s manufacturing supply chain.

The Chinese government has prioritized production and delivery of exports. To be sure, the robustness of China’s supply to the global goods market has been tested repeatedly since 2020, through waves of COVID outbreaks, power outages, and regional geopolitical crises – all without major bottlenecking. As China’s domestic supply chain continues to normalize, supply-side pressures should ease. In addition, soft domestic demand has helped China keep its inflation under control and producer price inflation (PPI) has been moderating in recent months. This, together with the depreciation of the yuan in early 2Q 2022, has resulted in a moderation of China’s export price inflation to the U.S.

Given softening demand in developed markets along with rising recession risks (see our Secular Outlook for details), going forward, we don’t believe the nation’s supply chain poses a major concern for inflation globally, despite ongoing uncertainty over COVID’s trajectory.

Furthermore, while China has stepped up stimulus to support infrastructure spending, the property market outlook remains gloomy, mitigating China’s demand for global commodities. Therefore, it is unlikely to be a dominant factor in global inflation.

Developed market inflation risks are broadening and shifting away from China

In the U.S., supply chain recovery also appears to be underway thanks to a combination of shifting consumer preferences back towards services, slower overall spending, and higher inventory levels. This has resulted in fewer backlogs at ports, increased freight capacity, and declining transport prices. Inventory-to-sales ratios for sectors like general merchandise, home goods, home electronics, and building supply stores, which are the major categories of Chinese exports to the U.S., have normalized. Import price inflation from China has also been moderating in recent months.

Despite these signs of healthier supply chains, U.S. goods inflation has recently reaccelerated (read our latest U.S. CPI blog). The continued acceleration of retail inflation – despite a slower recent pace of spending and this easing in supply chain pressures – suggests that inflation may be more entrenched than previously thought. While we still see reasons to think that goods price inflation will ultimately moderate, we’re also seeing inflation broaden to other categories.

Shelter inflation has risen sharply in recent months and geopolitical risks remain a worry for the commodity price outlook. The net result is that inflation risks appear to have migrated away from being primarily driven by supply chains and disruptions from China, to a broader set of areas that tend to be stickier, less sensitive to Fed policy action, and harder for consumers to substitute away from. This raises the risk that any further upside inflation surprises are also accompanied by a sharper slowdown in consumption.


Implications for investors

In the near term, disruptions to the global supply chain may persist, despite China’s continued recovery. Disruption from the war in Europe and strikes in some major markets could still pose risks to global supply chains. Disrupted food and energy supplies are already spurring global inflation, but growing risks of gas shortages and the associated rationing in Europe could compound supply chain challenges if factories are forced to close to ensure sufficient energy supplies for households. Inflation could remain high, contributing to a higher risk premium.

In the longer term, we see rising risks of deglobalization and more fragmented capital markets (read our latest Secular Outlook here). China’s role in the global supply chain could diminish over time, as the U.S. government seeks to ease America’s reliance on China’s massive manufacturing base for goods, spare parts, and materials of all kinds.

These trends may augment economic inefficiencies and increase inflationary pressures in the years to come, prompting many investors to focus on building resilience in portfolios.

Is it Safe to Borrow From a Licensed Money Lender in Singapore?

In life, we sometimes encounter sticky situations–ones that need an extra boost in the form of dollars and cents. It may be an upcoming wedding, a newborn on the way, or even healthcare emergencies that leave us blind-sided.

Some of us may turn to banks, others to family and friends for help. But not everyone is as lucky to not be turned away. That is where licensed money lenders can play a part.

Borrowing from a licensed money lender in Singapore is safe, but you need to make sure the money lender you’re getting the loan from is legal. It is a common misconception that getting a loan from a licensed money lender is akin to borrowing from a loan shark, but the truth could not be further. Loan sharks, who claim to be “licensed” money lenders are in fact not legal entities.

In this article, we’ll share what to look out for when borrowing from a licensed money lender in Singapore.

What are licensed money lenders?

Licensed money lenders in Singapore come under the regulation of the Ministry of Law. Firms that wish to provide financial loans are required to obtain a license from the ministry and have it regularly renewed to operate.

There are several rules which licensed money lenders to have to abide by, such as keeping to a stipulated ceiling on interest fees and administrative fees. These lenders are also barred from advertising their services on mainstream media, both print and online.

Above all, licensed money lenders are prohibited from using harassment tactics in any manner.

What are illegal money lenders?

Illegal money lenders, also known as loan sharks, are unlicensed lenders. They sometimes claim to be licensed money lenders but are actually not registered under the Ministry of Law to provide loan services.

These illegal lenders often resort to soliciting business through SMS or WhatsApp and coerce their victims into repaying via intimidation.

Things to do before getting a loan from a money lender in Singapore

Check the Ministry of Law’s registry. Do confirm first that the money lender is indeed licensed before approaching any of them.

Get familiar with the stipulated cap on interest rates and fees. Licensed money lenders in Singapore are allowed to charge a maximum of:

4% interest rate per month. 10% in administrative fees upon approving the loan.

On the occasion of a default, lenders can levy:

Late interest fees of up to 4% per month. Late repayment fees of up to S$60 per month. Full legal costs were ordered by the court.

The total charges imposed by a moneylender on any loan cannot exceed the loan principal. This includes interest, late interest, administrative fee, and late fee.

Ensure the money lender has a physical office. All licensed money lenders in Singapore should conduct their business only on the premises of a registered office. Take note of lenders who insist on meeting in public spaces when procuring a loan offer–these are most likely to be illegal lenders.

Pay attention to employees’ behavior. Always meet your loan officer in person, which lets you understand and see if the company you are borrowing from makes you feel safe and at ease. They should go over the entire contract with you and explain every single term clearly.

Look for someone with professional and polite conduct because chances are, having someone pay close attention to your needs will make the negotiation process much smoother. A thorough loan officer is also a telltale of a good business process, unlike illegal money lenders who are often in a rush to move the loan through.

Search online for reviews and testimonials. Positive feedback from people who’ve used the service provides valuable insight into the company’s reliability.

What would happen if I cannot repay my loan?

If you’re worried about the endless phone calls, and the physical and mental harassment that loan sharks often use, rest assured that a licensed money lender will, under no circumstances, be allowed to exert such means. In the unlikely event that it does happen, do not hesitate to call the police.

However, even though licensed money lenders in Singapore are not allowed to cause any property damage or other acts that would constitute harassment, they are permitted to mail or email you a letter of demand. They may also visit your home or office to issue the letter of demand and are permitted to take legal action against you if you do not repay your loan on time.

2022 China UK Green Finance Development Forum Successfully Held Online

On July 15, the 2022 China UK Green Finance Development Forum, jointly hosted by the International Institute of Green Finance (IIGF) of the Central University of Finance and Economics and the Chartered Institute for Securities & Investment (CISI), was successfully held online. Leading experts from the industry and academia were invited to attend the forum to discuss how to coordinate the balance between climate, energy and development, promote the green recovery and development of the global economy, and explore how China and the UK can further deepen cooperation in green development.

Professor Yao Wang, Director General of the International Institute of Green Finance at the Central University of Finance and Economics, and Simon Culhane, CEO of the CISI and a CISI Chartered Fellow, delivered an opening speech for the forum.

Professor Yao Wang expressed her sincere welcome to all the guests in her speech. She stressed that vigorously developing green finance is an inevitable choice for the high-quality development of China and the global economy and society. Green finance will effectively guide more public and private capital to flow into relevant investments to support the realization of carbon neutrality and sustainable goals. The urgency of “green change” requires all countries in the world to adjust their policies and development directions, establish active and effective cooperation mechanisms, and strengthen their determination and efforts to promote global sustainable development. She said that China, as one of the first countries in the world to establish a green finance policy system, and the UK, as a leader in the environmental protection movement and climate movement in developed countries, both sides play a leading role in international climate issues and green finance cooperation. China UK Green Finance Cooperation has a good historical foundation and has more room for further development in the future.

Simon Culhane expressed his thanks to all experts in his opening speech. He pointed out that every financial practitioner needs to have the ability to apply knowledge related to climate change and sustainable development, so as to effectively integrate ESG and sustainable development issues into investment, loan and other decisions, and help improve the policy standards of financial activities. He hoped that China and the UK could work together to promote the development of green and sustainable financial education, training and qualification certification, and create efficient and long-term solutions for the global response to climate risks and biodiversity challenges.

Deyun Cao, Secretary of the Party Committee, Executive Vice President and Secretary General of China Insurance Asset Management Association, Chun Cui, Chairman of Huatai Securities (Shanghai) Asset Management Co Ltd. Anjalika Bardalai, Chief Economist and Research Director of The City UK, and Leon Saunders Calvert, Head of Research and Portfolio Management of the London Stock Exchange Group made keynote speeches.

Deyun Cao pointed out in the keynote speech “exploration of green finance development and due diligence management in China’s insurance industry” that as a long-term fund, insurance funds should give full play to the advantages of long-term funds, grasp the investment opportunities brought by the dual carbon goal and green transformation, and actively provide green financial services. He said that as an organization in the field of insurance fund utilization, the China Insurance Asset Management Association should promote the development of green finance and sustainable investment in China’s insurance industry from many aspects in the future: first, actively organize and carry out special research on green investment in the insurance industry, lay the foundation for the formulation of supporting green investment and ESG information disclosure standards, and also point out the direction for the future development of relevant ability improvement courses; Second, cooperate with the release of the “green finance guidelines for banking and insurance industry”, organize industry forces under the guidance of regulatory authorities, promote the research of ESG investment guidelines for insurance funds, develop supporting green investment information disclosure and evaluation standards that adapt to China’s national conditions and industries, improve the quality of disclosed data, and reduce the cost of data acquisition and analysis; third, continue to develop and launch the due diligence management standards for China’s insurance asset management industry; fourth, continue to promote ESG capacity-building and talent training in the industry.

Chun Cui gave professional opinions on “promoting the development of ESG investment and leading the green transformation of asset management” in her keynote speech. She said that green development has gradually become a global consensus. The green transformation of China’s asset management industry is gradually on track and driving into the fast lane. Green finance has become a new label of China’s asset management ecosystem. She suggested that as an important part of the financial system, asset management institutions should play a deep role in resource allocation, long-term investment, risk management and other aspects, and guide funds to flow to green industries; second, continue to practice the ESG concept, build a bridge between ESG investment, customers and public welfare and environmental protection projects at the product and investment ends, and make two-way enabling and responsible investment; third, financial institutions need to pool industry forces to enable green development through two-way development of investment and financing, innovation of green financial products and strengthening scientific and technological integration.

Anjalika Bardalai introduced the research results of her institution in her speech entitled “Green Finance – quantitative assessment of market trends”. She pointed out that the green financial market of a country is closely related to its overall financial market and the size of the national economy. She said that in the future, financial institutions should provide assistance to the government in defining “green” standards for investment projects and quantifying green finance, and work together to promote the positive impact of the real economy on sustainable development.

Leon Saunders Calvert’s speech focused on “mitigation and adaptation to climate change – decarbonization is imperative”, emphasizing the relevance between finance and ethical investment. He said that climate risk cannot be simply and directly reflected in risk safety assessment and financing transactions. In the process of promoting the realization of decarbonization and sustainable development, first, regulators, enterprises and investors should improve the value standard and decarbonization concept, and internalize the carbon cost into the enterprise value and decision-making; Second, we need to increase investment in scientific and technological innovation to help different industries achieve decarbonization in different periods; Third, we should attach importance to the data analysis and methodology related to the evaluation of investment, and include ESG factors into the investment standards.

In the round table discussion session of the forum, Juzhong Zhuang, Academic Committee member of the International Financial Forum (IFF) and visiting professor of  Fanha International School of Finance, Fudan University; Alderman Michael Mainelli Chartered FCSI, Senior Councillor of the City of London and author of the Global Green Finance Index; Alexander Van de Putte, Professor of Sustainable Foresight at IE Business School in Spain, chairman of corporate governance and management of Astana International Financial Center, and director of the national investment company of the National Bank of Kazakhstan; Linlin Wang, assistance director of the Finance Accounting and Auditing, State Grid Energy Research Institute launched an in-depth discussion on “balancing climate, energy and development”. George Littlejohn MCSI, Senior Adviser at CISI, presided over the round table discussion.

During the round table discussion, experts put forward their own views on the challenges faced by green development from their own professional fields. Juzhong Zhuang pointed out that green finance puts forward higher requirements for market infrastructure, which will bring challenges to the construction of the financial system of developing countries around the world. It is suggested that developed countries and market participants in developing countries promote cooperation in knowledge sharing, capacity-building and sound investment principles. Developed countries should also actively fulfil their commitments to provide funds for climate action to support the development of capital markets in developing countries; Alderman Michael Mainelli said that the biggest problem with the current development of green finance is that it heavily relies on the policy regulatory framework and public awareness publicity of climate change. There is still room to improve the effectiveness of methodological applications such as ESG, effectively combining green and financial incentives, and continuously improving carbon market transactions Promoting the optimization and innovation of carbon financial products such as sustainable development linked bonds will provide key assistance to promote global green and sustainable investment; Alexander Van de Putte suggested that a sustainable and inclusive global renewable energy Internet could be built by promoting the integration of digital ecosystem, information technology and media industry, improving the resilience of the global value chain, giving full play to the advantages of technology integration and international cooperation, and promoting the realization of the global sustainable goals; LinLin Wang said that energy transformation is the key to the realization of the “double carbon” goal. As a bridge connecting primary energy and terminal energy, electricity will be the core element of the gradual transformation of modern energy systems to diversification, low-carbon, clean and intelligent. In the future, power grid investment should be included in the catalogue of green finance and transformation financial support, and at the same time, financial innovation in the green industrial chain of the energy industry should be vigorously carried out, take electricity and power grid as the carrier to promote the green transformation of the entire energy industry chain and even a wider range of industries.

This forum aims to further deepen the international cooperation and exchanges between China and the UK on green finance and jointly promote the green and low-carbon transformation. A wide range of audiences from relevant government departments, financial institutions, academic institutes participated in this forum online.

China Construction Bank, ADDX to Partner on China Offshore Investments

We use cookies on our website to give you the most relevant experience by remembering your preferences and repeat visits. By clicking “Accept All”, you consent to the use of ALL the cookies. However, you may visit “Cookie Settings” to provide a controlled consent.

How to Find Top PHP Developers for Your Online Asian Business?

Creating an online platform for any business necessitates deciding on the technologies for this digital product. Which programming language comes to mind first when you think of website development?

We can assume that it’s PHP. It is a widespread open-source programming language for creating websites and web applications. According to W3Techs, PHP is used on the server-side of about 77.5% of all websites.

Today, PHP is employed in well-known platforms like Facebook, Wikipedia, WordPress, and Yahoo. Of course, given the language’s prominence, the labor market is flooded with PHP developers.

But how can you find PHP developers that are indeed competent and experienced? You will discover the answer to this question in our article. We will also tell you about the main responsibilities of PHP programmers and other popular IT outsourcing professionals.

All You Need to Know About PHP Developers

If you want to boost your company’s online visibility, you’ll need the help of PHP professionals. They are an integral part of your team in developing websites and web apps and connecting your product with other services.

PHP experts are significant for your product development as they work on the backend of your website. They ensure that your product’s server part works properly and fix any code errors.

Here are some more reasons to hire a PHP developer:

Cost-effectiveness. PHP is an open-source language. It means that your developers can use this technology for free.

Time-saving. With PHP, your developers can reuse some parts of the code and not spend time writing everything from scratch.

Compatibility. PHP works with many operating systems, such as macOS, Windows, or Linux. This language supports over 20 databases and services such as Caudium, Apache, or Tornado.

Large community. PHP has a large community of developers worldwide, so solving any issues has never been easier.

Source: Mobilunity

So if your way is to employ a PHP developer, you should know what skills and knowledge this specialist should possess. Consider the following:

Bachelor’s or Master’s degree in Computer Engineering, Computer Science, or related specialty

Knowledge of PHP frameworks (Laravel or CodeIgniter)

Understanding of interface technologies (JavaScript, CSS, and HTML)

Experience with databases (SQL or NoSQL)

Experience with APIs

Experience in object-oriented PHP

Experience in testing and debugging

Where to Locate PHP Developers for Asian Businesses?

If you want to hire PHP developers for your business, there are some aspects to consider.

First, you need to decide whether you want to hire a development company, a freelance PHP developer, or a dedicated team.

By contracting a development company that offers PHP specialists, you get access to a high level of expertise, certified PHP developers, and timely project implementation. However, using the dev company’s services can be a bit costly.

A freelance PHP developer is a perfect solution if you have budget limitations. You can find such an employee anywhere and take advantage of a flexible work schedule. However, such an expert can work on several projects at once, and you can not be sure he will devote enough time to your product.

Hiring a dedicated team is probably the best solution to guarantee your online business’s success. Such developers will work purely on your project and understand all its features. They will invest their knowledge, experience, and time to ensure the prosperity of your product.

If you plan to hire remote workers, the best location for this is Eastern Europe. Countries in this region can boast experienced and qualified technical staff and, at the same time, a moderate level of hourly wages. One of the top destinations to employ PHP developers is Ukraine.

Where should you look for PHP developers? We suggest you consider the following:

Freelance platforms. Freelancer, Upwork, or Truelancer are places where you can find freelance PHP developers.

Social networks. You can try to find a qualified specialist in such a social network for professional networking as LinkedIn.

Job aggregators. Platforms such as Indeed, CareerJet, or Glassdoor contain many offers for developers. You can post a vacancy on one of these websites and thus find a PHP specialist.

Recommendations. You can also take full advantage of networking to search for PHP developers. Maybe one of your acquaintances mentioned something about such specialists?

Other Popular Outsourcing Specialists to Consider

Today we also want to mention two more specialists now popular for outsourcing. These are remote mobile developers and React specialists. Let’s talk about each of them in more detail.

Mobile app development is now at an all-time high, given that about 84% of the world’s population uses smartphones. That is why there is a demand for mobile developers. These can be specialists who are familiar with the creation of cross-platform apps, as well as applications for iOS or Android.

React.js is the most popular JavaScript framework, allowing you to build a frontend for digital products. Over 40% of developers worldwide have been using this platform as of 2021. So it’s a good idea to set React developer to handle your frontend.


PHP is the most often used language for developing server-side web solutions. Because of its prominence, the demand for PHP developers will only increase.

If you need specialists who know this programming language, you can find them anywhere in the world. However, our recommendation is to aim for Eastern Europe.

Locating a PHP developer is relatively easy. But finding an experienced and highly qualified one may be a real challenge. We suggest you hire dedicated teams. In particular, we offer such teams in Mobilunity.

Rise of the East: AsiaPac Banking Makes Gains on Europe & North America As Volume of New Hires Increases by Over +60% in the Past Year

  • 64% global growth of job roles in financial services
  • London has experienced the highest job growth of any banking hub (101%)
  • Singapore financial services talent almost matches the number of global leader London
  • 2 in 3 banking professionals in AsiaPac are actively looking to move job roles
  • Recruitment of senior-level professionals in FS has tripled since start of pandemic
  • +40% pay increases offered for remote roles to tackle global talent shortage
  • Asia leads the way on gender diversity, with a near 50/50 split in workforce

Hiring has reached peak levels for financial services across the globe – where across the eight major hubs the number of job roles advertised has increased by +64%, making the sector one of the fastest hiring industries post-pandemic (after technology).

Whilst London powers ahead as being home to the most financial services professionals working in any one city (293,700) – AsiaPac have steadily made gains in the past 12 months with Singapore (250,000), Sydney (167,364), and Tokyo (166,000+) the most notable cities with high levels of financial services talent.

Job Growth in the Past Year by City

  • London: +101%
  • New York: +78%
  • Tokyo: +77%
  • Singapore: +76%


Job Growth by Region

  • Europe: +62%
  • North America: +60%
  • AsiaPac: +61%

New York (48,595), London (38,945), and Paris (24,165) continue to dominate on the hiring front – having the greatest number of advertised job roles. However, it is across AsiaPac where we see the best conditions for hiring, with professionals in Sydney (81%), Singapore (76%), Hong Kong (67%), and Tokyo (60%) all expressing a high willingness to leave their role despite this being the tightest candidate market seen in decades.

The findings come from a new report from global professional services recruitment consultancy Robert Walters – Hiring Trends in the World’s Leading Financial Services Cities – which puts a lens over the labour market across 8 key banking hubs; London, New York, Tokyo, Sydney, Paris, Singapore, Frankfurt, and Hong Kong.

Toby Fowlston, CEO of Robert Walters comments:

“The global financial services system is as solid as it was before the pandemic – and much healthier than after the last crisis in 2008 (GFC).

“Whilst the pandemic did not have the expected harmful financial effects on the global banking industry, it has certainly accelerated change in a multitude of other areas. Digital banking boomed whilst cash use fell, savings expanded and credit card debts were paid-off in record time, remote became a way of working, data-capture and usage is a central business function, and environment and sustainability are now front of mind for customers and regulators.

“All of this change has led to exponential hiring in the sector – with each hub trying to fight for the same talent at the same time, the results being a fiercely competitive recruitment market like we’ve never seen before, with execs being offered over +30-40% pay increases with the option to work from anywhere in the world.”

Asia Leading the Way on Female Diversity

It is across Asia where we see the most gender diversity in the financial services sector – in fact, Singapore (46%) has near 50/50 gender diversity, whilst women make up 44% of the banking workforce in Hong Kong.

Whilst the likes of New York (36%) and London (36%) lag slightly behind in gender diversity, they continue to make strides in cultural, racial, and socio-economic diversity – with many firms having advanced recruitment programmes to ensure their workforce is representative of the diverse population of the city they are based in.

Toby adds: “As a whole the global financial services sector has made solid strides in gender diversity – with near half of the entry-level workforce in financial services being women.

“The task now is to equal representation at the top, where in banking less than a quarter of high-level senior positions are held by women. We are seeing some worthy gains been made in this area, and I think the increasing diversity in senior positions will only help to speed up the rapid rate of innovation and change within the sector.”

An Imbalance of Seniority

Not surprisingly the recruitment of senior professionals – who have been in the industry for 15+ years – was rife as the pandemic hit, as major institutions snapped up professionals who had experience of dealing with the GFC.

Where typically senior hires represent around 8-10% of all new hires – with the bulk of hiring being at junior and mid-management level – this figure sky-rocketed in the past 12-18months where in some hubs up to 1 in 3 new hires in banking has been at a senior level.

  • London: 20% of new hires is for senior roles, an increase of 5%
  • New York: Team/Department Heads was the only area to experience growth in the pandemic (+26%)
  • Tokyo: 19% of new hires are at a senior level
  • Sydney: 28% of new hires is for senior positions, an increase of 5%
  • Paris: 63% growth at Manager-level and above
  • Singapore: 31% of new hires is for a senior role

Investment into training programmes and graduate hiring all came to a standstill in Q1 2020, with the ramifications of this being felt at mid-management level who have reported the highest levels of burnout due to having a weaker support team beneath them.

Toby comments: “Employers will continue to experience challenges in attracting junior analysts and associates as the traditional appeal of working for a large Financial Services organisation now finds itself in a battle with the lure of a career in a start-up or major tech firm.

“Reputational issues suffered since the GFC and workplace-related perceptions – around hours, flexibility, and culture – will all need to be addressed head on by financial services firms if they want to build out their future talent pipeline.”

Your Strategic Framework: Are You Measuring Too Much?

The Emergent Approach
Your Strategic Framework: Are You Measuring Too Much?
By Peter Compo*

More than anywhere, because Asian companies are growing fast and serving diverse markets, metrics are an essential management tool for understanding whether strategy is leading to the achievement of objectives.

But with the digital revolution, the ability to measure is nearly limitless. How many numbers can people absorb and process? Twenty, thirty, or fifty at a time? When does a dashboard become a blur? After a relatively small number of metrics, the more you measure, the less you will see. The less you see, the more opportunity for cherry-picking and seeing what you want to see.

The Emergent Approach to Strategy presents several techniques to measure less and spend more time choosing the right metrics and understanding what they tell you. These are particularly important for Asian companies that have the advanced digital capability to easily collect and display data.

Consider three key points,

Use a Four-Station Dashboard

The idea here is to spend less time measuring results and more time measuring causes of results. The four stations used are,

Foundation metrics:  these audit whether the assumptions on which your strategy framework was built are still valid, including items like the action of competitors, economic conditions, and market trends

Adherence metrics:  these measure whether the organization is adhering to your strategy framework, including policies in areas such as marketing, product development, and personnel management, and also your overall strategy rule

Progress metrics:  These are indicators of progress towards the bottom line and the most common form of metric, including the success of the various functional groups in the company, milestone completion, and ratios of various types including benchmarks.

Bottom-line metrics:  These capture what ultimately matters and include overall financials and performance against core values such as safety and people treatment.

Minimize the number of process metrics

The process metrics are easiest to pile onto your dashboard because there are so many categories. For instance,

People (turnover, satisfaction surveys, training success)

Milestones (sale funnels, product development, stage-gate, projects in general)

Financial (costs, prices, volume, taxes)

Customer satisfaction (survey results, net promoter score, advertising performance)

Production performance (asset utilization %, asset turns, first quality rate, overtime)

High-level financial measures (inventory day’s supply, days sales outstanding, RONA, EBITDA, debt to equity ratio, margin)

Ratios (results per person, or cost per sale),

Benchmarks (any measure versus competition or some other target, including high-level aggregate financials numbers such as economic value add (EVA).

Question whether you need process metrics by asking if there are a few numbers that will give you most of what you need. Some measurements may be traditional in your business but no longer essential.

Measure at the bottleneck

Perhaps the best way to limit progress metrics is to focus metrics on the bottleneck to progress.

In the Emergent Approach, strategy is defined as the central rule or policy aimed at busting the bottleneck to achieving your overall aspiration. The bottleneck is what’s in the way of achieving your aspirations (i.e., goals, mission, vision)—what’s limiting progress.

The key is that it is impossible to make progress unless you improve what’s in the way of your overall aspirations.

Bottlenecks can be found in many areas, including,

People or culture related

Intelligence-related (lack of knowledge about competitors or markets)

Lack of process capability; digital capability

Lack of methods (for instance, management, technical, or marketing)

Lack of capital/resources


Lack of alignment and common language

Bad framework or missing strategy


Your strategy framework should have programs, plans, and tactics to bust the dominant bottleneck to achieving your goals, mission, or vision. Measure the adherence and progress on these aspects of your framework because only improvement here will enable achieving your aspiration. If you measure all aspects of the business equally, you dilute the focus on what matters most.

*Peter Compo, a former veteran of DuPont, is the author of The Emergent Approach to Strategy: Adaptive Design and Execution (Business Expert Press, May 2022). A 25-year veteran of DuPont, Compo held leadership positions in R&D, product management, marketing, supply chain, and business management, and was the corporate lead for integrated business planning. For more information, go to:

Your Strategy Framework: Are You Measuring Too Much?

More than anywhere, because Asian companies are growing fast and serving diverse markets, metrics are an essential management tool for understanding whether strategy is leading to the achievement of objectives.

But with the digital revolution, the ability to measure is nearly limitless. How many numbers can people absorb and process? Twenty, thirty, or fifty at a time? When does a dashboard become a blur? After a relatively small number of metrics, the more you measure, the less you will see. The less you see, the more opportunity for cherry-picking and seeing what you want to see.

The Emergent Approach to Strategy presents several techniques to measure less and spend more time choosing the right metrics and understanding what they tell you. These are particularly important for Asian companies that have the advanced digital capability to easily collect and display data.

Consider three key points:

Use a Four-Station Dashboard

The idea here is to spend less time measuring resultsand more time measuring causes of results. The four stations used are:

1. Foundation metrics:

These audit whether the assumptions on which your strategy framework was built are still valid, including items like the action of competitors, economic conditions, and market trends.

2. Adherence metrics:

These measures whether the organization is adhering to your strategy framework, including policies in areas such as marketing, product development, and personnel management, and also your overall strategy rule.

3. Progress metrics:

These are indicators of progress towards the bottom line and the most common form of metric, including the success of the various functional groups in the company, milestone completion, and ratios of various types including benchmarks.

4. Bottom-line metrics:

These capture what ultimately matters and include overall financials and performance against core values such as safety and people treatment.

Minimize the number of process metrics

The process metrics are easiest to pile onto your dashboard because there are so many categories. For instance,

  • People (turnover, satisfaction surveys, training success)
  • Milestones (sale funnels, product development, stage-gate, projects in general)
  • Financial (costs, prices, volume, taxes)
  • Customer satisfaction (survey results, net promoter score, advertising performance)
  • Production performance (asset utilization %, asset turns, first quality rate, overtime)
  • High-level financial measures (inventory day’s supply, days sales outstanding, RONA, EBITDA, debt to equity ratio, margin)
  • Ratios (results per person, or cost per sale),
  • Benchmarks (any measure versus competition or some other target, including high-level aggregate financials numbers such as economic value add (EVA).
  • Question whether you need process metrics by asking if there are a few numbers that will give you most of what you need. Some measurements may be traditional in your business but no longer essential.


Measure at the bottleneck

Perhaps the best way to limit progress metrics is to focus metrics on the bottleneck to progress.

In the Emergent Approach, strategy is defined as the central rule or policy aimed at busting the bottleneck to achieving your overall aspiration. The bottleneck is what’s in the way of achieving your aspirations (i.e., goals, mission, vision)—what’s limiting progress.

The key is that it is impossible to make progress unless you improve what’s in the way of your overall aspirations.

Bottlenecks can be found in many areas, including:

  • People or culture related
  • Intelligence-related (lack of knowledge about competitors or markets)
  • Lack of process capability; digital capability
  • Lack of methods (for instance, management, technical, or marketing)
  • Lack of capital/resources
  • Complexity
  • Lack of alignment and common language
  • Bad framework or missing strategy


Your strategy framework should have programs, plans, and tactics to bust the dominant bottleneck to achieving your goals, mission, or vision. Measure the adherence and progress on these aspects of your framework because only improvement here will enable achieving your aspiration. If you measure all aspects of the business equally, you dilute the focus on what matters most.

*Peter Compo, a former veteran of DuPont, is the author of The Emergent Approach to Strategy: Adaptive Design and Execution (Business Expert Press, May 2022). A 25-year veteran of DuPont, Compo held leadership positions in R&D, product management, marketing, supply chain, and business management, and was the corporate lead for integrated business planning. For more information, go to: